ACS355 user's manual Rev A

ABB general machinery drives 

User’s manual 

ACS355 drives

List of related manuals 

Drive manuals and guides Code (English) 

ACS355 user’s manual 3AUA0000066143 1) 

ACS355 drives with IP66/67 / UL Type 4x enclosure 

supplement 

3AUA0000066066 1) 

ACS355 Common DC application guide 3AUA0000070130 4) 

Option manuals and guides 

FCAN-01 CANopen adapter module user’s manual 3AFE68615500 1) 

FDNA-01 DeviceNet adapter module user’s manual 3AFE68573360 1) 

FECA-01 EtherCAT adapter module user’s manual 3AUA0000068940 1) 

FENA-01 Ethernet adapter module Modbus/TCP protocol 3AUA0000022989 1) 

manual 

FMBA-01 Modbus adapter module user’s manual 3AFE68586704 1) 

FLON-01 LONWORKS® adapter module user’s manual 3AUA0000041017 1) 

FPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP adapter module user’s manual 3AFE68573271 1) 

FRSA-00 RS-485 adapter board user’s manual 3AFE68640300 1) 

MFDT-01 FlashDrop user’s manual 3AFE68591074 1) 

MPOT-01 potentiometer module instructions for 

installation and use 

3AFE68591082 1), 3) 

MREL-01 relay output extension module user’s manual 3AUA0000035974 1) 

MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface module user’s manual 3AFE68591091 1) 

MUL1-R1 installation instructions for ACS150, ACS310, 

ACS350 and ACS355 

3AFE68642868 1), 3) 

MUL1-R3 installation instructions for ACS310, ACS350 

and ACS355 

3AFE68643147 1), 3) 

MUL1-R4 installation instructions for ACS350 and 

ACS355 

3AUA0000025916 1), 3) 

SREA-01 Ethernet adapter module quick start-up guide 3AUA0000042902 1) 

SREA-01 Ethernet adapter module user’s manual 3AUA0000042896 2) 

Maintenance manuals and guides 

Guide for capacitor reforming in ACS50, ACS55, ACS150, 3AFE68735190 

ACS310, ACS350, ACS355, ACS550 and ACH550 

1) Delivered as a printed copy with the drive or optional equipment 

2) Delivered in PDF format with the drive or optional equipment 

3) Multilingual 

4) Available from your local ABB representative 

Manuals are available in PDF format on the Internet (unless otherwise noted). See 

section Document library on the Internet on the inside of the back cover.

© 2010 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved. 

User’s Manual 


Table of contents 

1. Safety 

4. Mechanical installation 

6. Electrical installation 

8. Start-up, control with I/O 

and ID run 

3AUA0000066143 Rev A 

EN 

EFFECTIVE: 2010-01-01

Table of contents 

Table of contents 5 

List of related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 

1. Safety 

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 

Use of warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 

Safety in installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 

Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 

General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 

Safe start-up and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 

Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Safety 

General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 

2. Introduction to the manual 


Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 

Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 

Purpose of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 

Contents of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 

Related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 

Categorization by frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 

Quick installation and commissioning flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 

3. Operation principle and hardware description 


Operation principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 

Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 

Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 

Power connections and control interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 

Type designation label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 

Type designation key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 

4. Mechanical installation 


Checking the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 

Requirements for the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 

Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 

Checking the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 

Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 

Install the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 

Fasten clamping plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 

Attach the optional fieldbus module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

6 Table of contents 

5. Planning the electrical installation 


Implementing the AC power line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 

Selecting the supply disconnecting device (disconnecting means) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 

European union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 

Other regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 

Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 

Selecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 

General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 

Alternative power cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 

Motor cable shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 

Additional US requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 

Selecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 

General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 

Relay cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 

Control panel cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 

Routing the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 

Control cable ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 

Protecting the drive, input power cable, motor and motor cable in short circuit situations and 

against thermal overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 

Protecting the drive and input power cable in short-circuit situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 

Protecting the motor and motor cable in short-circuit situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 

Protecting the drive, motor cable and input power cable against thermal overload . . . . . 43 

Protecting the motor against thermal overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 

Implementing the Safe torque off (STO) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 

Using residual current devices (RCD) with the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 

Using a safety switch between the drive and the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 

Implementing a bypass connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 

Protecting the contacts of relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 

6. Electrical installation 


Checking the insulation of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 

Input power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 

Motor and motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 

Checking the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and corner-grounded TN systems . . . . . . . 48 

Connecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 

Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 

Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 

Connecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 

I/O terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 

Default I/O connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 

Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 

7. Installation checklist 

Checking the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

8. Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 



How to start up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 

How to start up the drive without a control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 

How to perform a manual start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 

How to perform a guided start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 

How to control the drive through the I/O interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 

How to perform the ID run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 

ID run procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 

9. Control panels 


About control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 

Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 

Basic control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 

Output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 

Reference mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 

Parameter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 

Copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 

Basic control panel alarm codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 

Assistant control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 

Output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 

Parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 

Assistants mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 

Changed parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 

Fault logger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 

Time and date mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 

Parameter backup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 

I/O settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 

10. Application macros 

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 

Overview of macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 

Summary of the I/O connections of the application macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 

ABB standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 

Default I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 

3-wire macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 


Alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 


Motor potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 

Default I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115


Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 

Default I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 

PID control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 


Torque control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 


User macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 

11. Program features 


Start-up assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

Default order of the tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 

List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 

Contents of the assistant displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 

Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 

Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 

External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 

Block diagram: Start, stop, direction source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 

Block diagram: Reference source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 

Reference types and processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 

Reference trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 

Programmable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 

Programmable analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 

Programmable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 

Programmable relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 

Frequency input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 

Transistor output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 

Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 

Motor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135


Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 

Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 

DC magnetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 

Maintenance trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 

DC hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 

Speed compensated stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 

Flux braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 

Flux optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 

Acceleration and deceleration ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 

Critical speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

Custom U/f ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 

Speed controller tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 

Speed control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 

Torque control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 

Scalar control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 

IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 

Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 

AI


Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 

Power limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 

Automatic resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 

Supervisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 

Parameter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 

PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 

Process controller PID1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 

External/Trim controller PID2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 

Block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 

Sleep function for the process PID (PID1) control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 

Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 

Control of a mechanical brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 

Operation time scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 

State shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 

Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 

Timed functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 

Sequence programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 

State shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 

Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 

Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 

Safe torque off (STO) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 

12. Actual signals and parameters 

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175


Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 

Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 

Fieldbus equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 

Default values with different macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 

Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 

01 OPERATING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 

03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 

04 FAULT HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 

10 START/STOP/DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 

11 REFERENCE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 

12 CONSTANT SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 

13 ANALOG INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 

14 RELAY OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 

15 ANALOG OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 

16 SYSTEM CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 

18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 

19 TIMER & COUNTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 

20 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 

21 START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 

22 ACCEL/DECEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 

23 SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 

24 TORQUE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 

25 CRITICAL SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 

26 MOTOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 

29 MAINTENANCE TRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 

30 FAULT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 

31 AUTOMATIC RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 

32 SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 

33 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 

34 PANEL DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 

35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 

36 TIMED FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 

40 PROCESS PID SET 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 

41 PROCESS PID SET 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 

42 EXT / TRIM PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 

43 MECH BRK CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 

50 ENCODER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 

51 EXT COMM MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 

52 PANEL COMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 

53 EFB PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 

54 FBA DATA IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 

55 FBA DATA OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 

84 SEQUENCE PROG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 

98 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 

99 START-UP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 

13. Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 


System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301


Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 

Drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 

Fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 

Control word and Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 

References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 

Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 

Fieldbus references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 

Reference selection and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 

Fieldbus reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 

Reference handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 

Actual value scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 

Modbus mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 

Register mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 

Function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 

Exception codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 

Communication profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 

ABB drives communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 

DCU communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 

14. Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 


System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 

Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 

Drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 

Fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 

Control word and Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 

References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 

Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 

Communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 

Fieldbus references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 

Reference selection and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 

Fieldbus reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 

Reference handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 

Actual value scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 

15. Fault tracing 


Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 

Alarm and fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 

How to reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 

Fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 

Alarm messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 

Alarms generated by the basic control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 

Fault messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 

Embedded fieldbus faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 

No master device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 

Same device address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 

Incorrect wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

16. Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 



Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 

Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 

Replacing the cooling fan (frame sizes R1…R4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 

Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 

Reforming the capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 

Power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 

Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 

Cleaning the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 

Changing the battery in the assistant control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 

17. Technical data 


Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 

Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 

Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 

Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 

Power cable sizes and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 

Dimensions, weights and free space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

Free space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

Losses, cooling data and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 

Losses and cooling data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 

Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 

Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 

Terminal and lead-through data for the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 

Electric power network specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 

Motor connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 

Control connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 

Brake resistor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 

Common DC connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 

Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 

Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 

Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 

Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 

Applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 

CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 

Compliance with the European EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 

Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 

Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 

Category C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 

Category C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 

Category C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 

UL marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 

UL checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 

C-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 

TÜV NORD Safety Approved mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376


RoHS marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 

Compliance with the Machinery Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 

Patent protection in the USA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 

18. Dimension drawings 

Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 

Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 / NEMA 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 

Frame size R2, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 

Frame size R2, IP20 / NEMA 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 





19. Appendix: Resistor braking 


Planning the braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 

Selecting the brake resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 

Selecting the brake resistor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 

Placing the brake resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 

Protecting the system in brake circuit fault situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 

Electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 

Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 

20. Appendix: Extension modules 


Extension modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 

MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 

MREL-01 output relay module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 

MPOW-01 auxiliary power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 

Electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 

21. Appendix: Safe torque off (STO) 

What this appendix contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 

Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 

Program features, settings and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 

Operation of the STO function and its diagnostics function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 

STO status indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 

STO function activation and indication delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 

Start-up and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 

STO components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403


Data related to safety standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 

Further information 

Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 

Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 

Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 

Document library on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

16 Table of contents

Safety 

What this chapter contains 

Safety 17 

The chapter contains safety instructions which you must follow when installing, 

operating and servicing the drive. If ignored, physical injury or death may follow, or 

damage may occur to the drive, motor or driven equipment. Read the safety 

instructions before you work on the drive. 

Use of warnings 

Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death 

and/or damage to the equipment, and advise on how to avoid the danger. The 

following warning symbols are used in this manual: 

Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause 

physical injury and/or damage to the equipment. 

General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by 

electricity, which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.

18 Safety 

Safety in installation and maintenance 

These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive, motor cable or motor. 

� Electrical safety 

WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or 

death, or damage to the equipment. 

Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive! 

• Never work on the drive, motor cable or motor when input power is applied. After 

disconnecting the input power, always wait for 5 minutes to let the intermediate 

circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive, motor or motor 

cable. 

Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter (impedance at least 1 Mohm) that 

1. there is no voltage between the drive input phases U1, V1 and W1 and the 

ground 

2. there is no voltage between terminals BRK+ and BRK- and the ground. 

• Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the 

external control circuits. Externally supplied control circuits may carry dangerous 

voltage even when the input power of the drive is switched off. 

• Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive. 

• Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on an IT system (an 

ungrounded power system or a high-resistance-grounded [over 30 ohms] power 

system), otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the 

EMC filter capacitors. This may cause danger or damage the drive. See page 48. 

Note: When the internal EMC filter is disconnected, the drive is not EMC 

compatible without an external filter. 

• Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on a corner-grounded 

TN system, otherwise the drive will be damaged. See page 48. Note: When the 

internal EMC filter is disconnected, the drive is not EMC compatible without an 

external filter. 

• All ELV (extra low voltage) circuits connected to the drive must be used within a 

zone of equipotential bonding, ie within a zone where all simultaneously 

accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous 

voltages appearing between them. This is accomplished by a proper factory 

grounding. 

Note: 

• Even when the motor is stopped, dangerous voltage is present at the power 

circuit terminals U1, V1, W1 and U2, V2, W2 and BRK+ and BRK-.

Permanent magnet motor drives 

Safety 19 

These are additional warnings concerning permanent magnet motor drives. Ignoring 

the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment. 

WARNING! Do not work on the drive when the permanent magnet motor is 

rotating. Also, when the supply power is switched off and the inverter is 

stopped, a rotating permanent magnet motor feeds power to the intermediate circuit 

of the drive and the supply connections become live. 

Before installation and maintenance work on the drive: 

• Stop the motor. 

• Ensure that there is no voltage on the drive power terminals according to step 1 or 

2, or if possible, according to the both steps. 

1. Disconnect the motor from the drive with a safety switch or by other means. 

Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input or output terminals 

(U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, BRK+, BRK-). 

2. Ensure that the motor cannot rotate during work. Make sure that no other 

system, like hydraulic crawling drives, is able to rotate the motor directly or 

through any mechanical connection like felt, nip, rope, etc. Measure that there 

is no voltage present on the drive input or output terminals (U1, V1, W1, U2, 

V2, W2, BRK+, BRK-). Ground the drive output terminals temporarily by 

connecting them together as well as to the PE. 

� General safety 



• The drive is not field repairable. Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive; 

contact your local ABB representative or Authorized Service Center for 

replacement. 

• Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation. 

Electrically conductive dust inside the drive may cause damage or lead to 

malfunction. 

• Ensure sufficient cooling.

20 Safety 

Safe start-up and operation 

These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation, start up or operate the 

drive. 

� Electrical safety 

Permanent magnet motor drives 

These warnings concern permanent magnet motor drives. Ignoring the instructions 

can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment. 

WARNING! It is not recommended to run the permanent magnet motor over 

1.2 times the rated speed. Motor overspeed may lead to overvoltage which 

may permanently damage the drive. 

� General safety 



• Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service, make sure that the motor and 

all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range 

provided by the drive. The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds 

above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly to the 

power line. 

• Do not activate automatic fault reset functions if dangerous situations can occur. 

When activated, these functions will reset the drive and resume operation after a 

fault. 

• Do not control the motor with an AC contactor or disconnecting device 

(disconnecting means); use instead the control panel start and stop keys and 

or external commands (I/O or fieldbus). The maximum allowed number of 

charging cycles of the DC capacitors (ie power-ups by applying power) is two per 

minute and the maximum total number of chargings is 15 000. 

Note: 

• If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the drive will start 

immediately after an input voltage break or fault reset unless the drive is 

configured for 3-wire (a pulse) start/stop. 

• When the control location is not set to local (LOC not shown on the display), the 

stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive. To stop the drive using the 

LOC 

control panel, first press the LOC/REM key REM 

and then the stop key .

Introduction to the manual 21 

Introduction to the manual 


The chapter describes applicability, target audience and purpose of this manual. It 

describes the contents of this manual and refers to a list of related manuals for more 

information. The chapter also contains a flowchart of steps for checking the delivery, 

installing and commissioning the drive. The flowchart refers to chapters/sections in 

this manual. 

Applicability 

The manual is applicable to the ACS355 drive firmware version 5.02b or later. See 

parameter 3301 FIRMWARE on page 250. 

Target audience 

The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical 

components and electrical schematic symbols. 

The manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown. 

Special US instructions for installations in the United States are given. 

Purpose of the manual 

This manual provides information needed for planning the installation, installing, 

commissioning, using and servicing the drive.

22 Introduction to the manual 

Contents of this manual 

The manual consists of the following chapters: 

• Safety (page 17) gives safety instructions you must follow when installing, 

commissioning, operating and servicing the drive. 

• Introduction to the manual (this chapter, page 21) describes applicability, target 

audience, purpose and contents of this manual. It also contains a quick 

installation and commissioning flowchart. 

• Operation principle and hardware description (page 25) describes the operation 

principle, layout, power connections and control interfaces, type designation label 

and type designation information in short. 

• Mechanical installation (page 31) tells how to check the installation site, unpack, 

check the delivery and install the drive mechanically. 

• Planning the electrical installation (page 37) tells how to check the compatibility of 

the motor and the drive and select cables, protections and cable routing. 

• Electrical installation (page 47) tells how to check the insulation of the assembly 

and the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and corner-grounded TN systems as 

well as connect power cables and control cables. 

• Installation checklist (page 57) contains a checklist for checking the mechanical 

and electrical installation of the drive. 

• Start-up, control with I/O and ID run (page 59) tells how to start up the drive as 

well as how to start, stop, change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the 

motor speed through the I/O interface. 

• Control panels (page 73) describes the control panel keys, LED indicators and 

display fields and tells how to use the panel for control, monitoring and changing 

the settings. 

• Application macros (page 109) gives a brief description of each application macro 

together with a wiring diagram showing the default control connections. It also 

explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it. 

• Program features (page 121) describes program features with lists of related user 

settings, actual signals, and fault and alarm messages. 

• Actual signals and parameters (page 175) describes actual signals and 

parameters. It also lists the default values for the different macros. 

• Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus (page 301) tells how the drive can be 

controlled by external devices over a communication network using embedded 

fieldbus. 

• Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter (page 325) tells how the drive can be 

controlled by external devices over a communication network using a fieldbus 

adapter. 

• Fault tracing (page 335) tells how to reset faults and view fault history. It lists all 

alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions.

Introduction to the manual 23 

• Maintenance and hardware diagnostics (page 353) contains preventive 

maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions. 

• Technical data (page 357) contains technical specifications of the drive, eg 

ratings, sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the 

requirements for CE and other marks. 

• Dimension drawings (page 379) shows dimension drawings of the drive. 

• Appendix: Resistor braking (page 389) tells how to select the brake resistor. 

• Appendix: Extension modules (page 393) describes the MPOW-01 auxiliary 

power extension module. It mentions the MREL-01 relay output extension module 

and MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface module briefly; readers are referred to the 

corresponding user’s manual. 

• Appendix: Safe torque off (STO) (page 399) describes STO features, installation 

and technical data. 

• Further information (inside of the back cover, page 405) tells how to make product 

and service inquiries, get information on product training, provide feedback on 

ABB Drives manuals and find documents on the Internet. 

Related documents 

See List of related manuals on page 2 (inside of the front cover). 

Categorization by frame size 

The ACS355 is manufactured in frame sizes R0…R4. Some instructions and other 

information which only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the 

frame size (R0…R4). To identify the frame size of your drive, see the table in section 

Ratings on page 358.

24 Introduction to the manual 

Quick installation and commissioning flowchart 

Task See 

Identify the frame size of your drive: R0…R4. Operation principle and hardware description: 

Type designation key on page 29 

Technical data: Ratings on page 358 

Plan the installation: select the cables, etc. 

Check the ambient conditions, ratings and 

required cooling air flow. 

Planning the electrical installation on page 37 

Technical data on page 357 

Unpack and check the drive. Mechanical installation: Unpacking on page 

33 

If the drive will be connected to an IT 

(ungrounded) or corner-grounded system, 

check that the internal EMC filter is not 

connected. 

Operation principle and hardware description: 

Type designation key on page 29 

Electrical installation: Checking the 

compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and cornergrounded 

TN systems on page 48 

Install the drive on a wall or in a cabinet. Mechanical installation on page 31 

Route the cables. Planning the electrical installation: Routing the 

cables on page 41 

Check the insulation of the input cable and the 

motor and the motor cable. 

Electrical installation: Checking the insulation 

of the assembly on page 47 

Connect the power cables. Electrical installation: Connecting the power 


Connect the control cables. Electrical installation: Connecting the control 


Check the installation. Installation checklist on page 57 

Commission the drive. Start-up, control with I/O and ID run on page 

59

Operation principle and hardware description 25 

Operation principle and 

hardware description 


The chapter briefly describes the operation principle, layout, type designation label 

and type designation information. It also shows a general diagram of power 

connections and control interfaces. 

Operation principle 

The ACS355 is a wall or cabinet mountable drive for controlling asynchronous AC 

induction motors and permanent magnet synchronous motors. 

The figure below shows the simplified main circuit diagram of the drive. The rectifier 

converts three-phase AC voltage to DC voltage. The capacitor bank of the 

intermediate circuit stabilizes the DC voltage. The inverter converts the DC voltage 

back to AC voltage for the AC motor. The brake chopper connects the external brake 

resistor to the intermediate DC circuit when the voltage in the circuit exceeds its 

maximum limit. 

AC supply 

U1 

V1 

W1 

Rectifier Capacitor 

bank 

Inverter 

U2 

V2 

W2 

Brake chopper 

BRK- BRK+ 

M 

3~ 

/ Common DC terminals 

AC motor

26 Operation principle and hardware description 

Product overview 

� Layout 

The layout of the drive is presented below. The construction of the different frame 

sizes R0…R4 varies to some extent. 

2 

1 

Covers on (R0 and R1) Covers off (R0 and R1) 

2 

1 Cooling outlet through top cover 

2 Mounting holes 

3 Panel cover (a) / basic control panel (b) / 

assistant control panel (c) 

4 Terminal cover (or optional potentiometer 

unit MPOT-01) 

5 Panel connection 

6 Option connection 

7 STO (Safe torque off) connection 

8 FlashDrop connection 

9 Power OK and Fault LEDs. See section 

LEDs on page 356. 

4 

8 

3a 

3b 

3c 

10 

11 

17 

12 

14 

15 

10 EMC filter grounding screw (EMC). 

Note: The screw is on the front in frame 

size R4. 

11 Varistor grounding screw (VAR) 

12 Fieldbus adapter (serial communication) 

connection 

13 I/O connections 

14 Input power connection (U1, V1, W1), 

brake resistor connection (BRK+, BRK-) 

and motor connection (U2, V2, W2). 

15 I/O clamping plate 

16 Clamping plate 

17 Clamps 

5 

6 

9 

17 

16 

7 

8 

13

� Power connections and control interfaces 


The diagram gives an overview of connections. I/O connections are parameterable. 

See chapter Application macros on page 109 for I/O connections for the different 

macros and chapter Electrical installation on page 47 for installation in general. 

Screen 

Analog input 1 

0…10 V 

Reference voltage 

+10 V DC, max. 10 mA 

Analog input 2 

Aux. voltage output 

+24 V DC, max. 200 mA 

PROGRAMMABLE 

DIGITAL INPUTS 

DI5 can also be used 

as a frequency input 

FlashDrop 

Fieldbus adapter 

6 

10 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

SCR 

AI1 

GND 

+10V 

AI2 

GND 

+24 V 

GND 

DCOM 

DI1 

DI2 

DI3 

DI4 

DI5 

mA 

V 

S1 

AI1 

AI2 

ON 

1 2 

8 

AO 7 

GND 8 

ROCOM 

RONC 

RONO 

DOSRC 

DOOUT 

DOGND 

OUT1 

OUT2 

IN1 

IN2 

EMC 

VAR 

PE 

L1 

PE 

U1 

Common DC 

or U2 

L2 

V1 brake 

chopper 

V2 

L3 

W1 BRK+ BRK- W2 

3-phase 

power 

supply, 

200…480 

Input 

choke 

EMC 

filter 

VAC 

t° 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

X1C:STO 

1 

2 

3 

4 

6 

Brake resistor 

Control panel 

(RJ-45) 

Modbus RTU 

(RS-232) 

Analog output 

0…20 mA 

PROGRAMMABLE RELAY 

AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS 

Relay output 

250 V AC / 30 V DC / 6 A 

Digital/frequency output, 

PNP transistor type 

30 V DC, max. 100 mA 

Extension modules 

MPOW-01 

MREL-01 

MTAC-01 

EMC filter grounding screw 

Varistor grounding screw 

Output 

choke 

M 

3 ~ 

AC motor

28 Operation principle and hardware description 

Type designation label 

The type designation label is attached to the left side of the drive. An example label 

and explanation of the label contents are shown below. 

��ACS355-03E-08A8-4 

IP20 / UL Open type 2 lllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll 

UL Type 1 with MUL1 option S/N MYYWWRXXXX 

4 kW (5 HP) llllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll 

U1 

I1 3 

f1 

3~380…480 V 

13.6 A 

48…63 Hz 

3AUA0000058189 

RoHS 

U2 3~0…U1 V 

I2 8.8 A (150% 1/10 min) 

f2 0…600 Hz 

1 Type designation, see section Type designation key on page 29 

2 Degree of protection by enclosure (IP and UL/NEMA) 

3 Nominal ratings, see section Ratings on page 358. 

4 Serial number of format MYYWWRXXXX, where 

M: Manufacturer 

YY: 09, 10, 11, … for 2009, 2010, 2011, … 

WW: 01, 02, 03, … for week 1, week 2, week 3, … 

R: A, B, C, … for product revision number 

XXXX: Integer starting every week from 0001 

5 ABB MRP code of the drive 

6 CE marking and C-Tick, C-UL US, RoHS and TÜV NORD marks (the label of your drive 

shows the valid markings) 

1 

4 

5 

6

Type designation key 


The type designation contains information on the specifications and configuration of 

the drive. You find the type designation on the type designation label attached to the 

drive. The first digits from the left express the basic configuration, for example 

ACS355-03E-09A7-4. The optional selections are given after that, separated by + 

signs, for example +J404. The explanations of the type designation selections are 

described below. 

ACS355 product series 

1-phase/3-phase 

01 = 1-phase input 

03 = 3-phase input 

Configuration 

E = EMC filter connected, 50 Hz frequency 

U = EMC filter disconnected, 60 Hz frequency 

Output current rating 

In format xxAy, where xx indicates the integer part and y the fractional part, 

eg 09A7 means 9.7 A. 

For more information, see section Ratings on page 358. 

Input voltage range 

2 = 200…240 V AC 

4 = 380…480 V AC 

Options 

B063 = IP66/IP67/UL Type 4x enclosure 

(product variant) 

J400 = ACS-CP-A assistant control panel 1) 

J404 = ACS-CP-C basic control panel 1) 

J402 = MPOT-01 potentiometer 

K451 = FDNA-01 DeviceNet 

K454 = FPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP 

K457 = FCAN-01 CANopen 

K458 = FMBA-01 Modbus RTU 

K466 = FENA-01 EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP/IP 

K452 = FLON-01 LonWorks 

ACS355-03E-09A7-4+J404+... 

K469 = FECA-01 EtherCAT 

H376 = Cable gland kit (IP66/IP67/UL Type 4x) 

F278 = Input switch kit 

C169 = Pressure compensation valve 


G406 = MPOW-01auxiliary power module 

L502 = MTAC-01 pulse encoder module 

L511 = MREL-01 relay output module 

1) The ACS355 is compatible with panels that have the following panel revisions and panel 

firmware versions. To find out the revision and firmware version of your panel, see page 74. 

Panel type Type code Panel revision Panel firmware 

version 

Basic control panel ACS-CP-C M or later 1.13 or later 

Assistant control panel ACS-CP-A F or later 2.04 or later 

Assistant control panel (Asia) ACS-CP-D Q or later 2.04 or later 

Note that unlike the other panels, the ACS-CP-D is ordered with a separate material code.

30 Operation principle and hardware description

Mechanical installation 


Mechanical installation 31 

The chapter tells how to check the installation site, unpack, check the delivery and 

install the drive mechanically. 

Checking the installation site 

The drive may be installed on the wall or in a cabinet. Check the enclosure 

requirements for the need to use the NEMA 1 option in wall installations (see chapter 

Technical data on page 357). 

The drive can be installed in three different ways, depending on the frame size: 

a) back mounting (all frame sizes) 

b) side mounting (frame sizes R0…R2) 

c) DIN rail mounting (all frame sizes). 

The drive must be installed in an upright position. 

Check the installation site according to the requirements below. Refer to chapter 

Dimension drawings on page 379 for frame details. 

� Requirements for the installation site 

Operation conditions 

See chapter Technical data on page 357 for the allowed operation conditions of the 

drive. 

Wall 

The wall should be as close to vertical and even as possible, of non-flammable 

material and strong enough to carry the weight of the drive.

32 Mechanical installation 

Floor 

The floor/material below the installation should be non-flammable. 

Free space around the drive 

The required free space for cooling above and below the drive is 75 mm (3 in). No 

free space is required on the sides of the drive, so drives can be mounted 

immediately next to each other. 

Required tools 

To install the drive, you need the following tools: 

• screwdrivers (as appropriate for the mounting hardware used) 

• wire stripper 

• tape measure 

• drill (if the drive will be installed with screws/bolts) 

• mounting hardware: screws or bolts (if the drive will be installed with screws/ 

bolts). For the number of screws/bolts, see With screws on page 34.

Unpacking 


The drive (1) is delivered in a package that also contains the following items (frame 

size R1 shown in the figure): 

• plastic bag (2) including clamping plate (also used for I/O cables in frame sizes 

R3 and R4), I/O clamping plate (for frame sizes R0…R2), fieldbus option ground 

plate, clamps and screws 

• panel cover (3) 

• mounting template, integrated into the package (4) 

• user’s manual (5) 

• possible options (fieldbus, potentiometer, extension module, all with instructions, 

basic control panel or assistant control panel). 

1 

Checking the delivery 

3 

Check that there are no signs of damage. Notify the shipper immediately if damaged 

components are found. 

Before attempting installation and operation, check the information on the type 

designation label of the drive to verify that the drive is of the correct type. See section 

Type designation label on page 28. 

2 

5 

4

34 Mechanical installation 

Installing 

The instructions in this manual cover drives with the IP20 degree of protection. To 

comply with NEMA 1, use the MUL1-R1, MUL1-R3 or MUL1-R4 option kit, which is 

delivered with multilingual installation instructions (3AFE68642868, 3AFE68643147 

or 3AUA0000025916, respectively). 

� Install the drive 

Install the drive with screws or on a DIN rail as appropriate. 

Note: Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation. 

With screws 

1. Mark the hole locations using for example the mounting template cut out from the 

package. The locations of the holes are also shown in the drawings in chapter 

Dimension drawings on page 379. The number and location of the holes used 

depend on how the drive is installed: 

a) back mounting (frame sizes R0…R4): four holes 

b) side mounting (frame sizes R0…R2): three holes; one of the bottom holes is 

located in the clamping plate. 

2. Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations. 

3. Position the drive onto the screws on the wall. 

4. Tighten the screws in the wall securely. 

On DIN rail 

1. Click the drive to the rail. 

To detach the drive, press the release lever on top of the drive (1b). 

1 1b

� Fasten clamping plates 


Note: Make sure that you do not throw the clamping plates away as they are required 

for proper grounding of the power and control cables as well as the fieldbus option. 

1. Fasten the clamping plate (A) to the plate at the bottom of the drive with the 

provided screws. 

2. For frame sizes R0…R2, fasten the I/O clamping plate (B) to the clamping plate 

with the provided screws. 

1 

� Attach the optional fieldbus module 

2 

B 

1 

3. Connect the power and control cables as instructed in chapter Electrical 

installation on page 47. 

4. Place the fieldbus module on the option ground plate (C) and tighten the 

grounding screw on the left corner of the fieldbus module. This fastens the 

module to the option ground plate. 

5. If the terminal cover is not already removed, push the recess in the cover and 

simultaneously slide the cover off the frame. 

6. Snap the fieldbus module attached to the option ground plate in position so that 

the module is plugged to the connection on the drive front and the screw holes in 

the option ground plate and the I/O clamping plate are aligned. 

7. Fasten the option ground plate to the I/O clamping plate with the provided screws. 

8. Slide the terminal cover back in place. 

A 

2 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

4 

C 

7 

3

36 Mechanical installation

Planning the electrical 

installation 


Planning the electrical installation 37 

The chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when checking the 

compatibility of the motor and drive, and selecting cables, protections, cable routing 

and way of operation for the drive. 

Note: The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable 

local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any 

installation which breaches the local laws and/or other regulations. Furthermore, if the 

recommendations given by ABB are not followed, the drive may experience problems 

that the warranty does not cover. 

Implementing the AC power line connection 

See the requirements in section Electric power network specification on page 367. 

Use a fixed connection to the AC power line. 

WARNING! As the leakage current of the device typically exceeds 3.5 mA, a 

fixed installation is required according to IEC 61800-5-1. 

Selecting the supply disconnecting device (disconnecting 

means) 

Install a hand-operated supply disconnecting device (disconnecting means) between 

the AC power source and the drive. The disconnecting device must be of a type that 

can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work.

38 Planning the electrical installation 

� European union 

To meet the European Union Directives, according to standard EN 60204-1, Safety of 

Machinery, the disconnecting device must be one of the following types: 

• a switch-disconnector of utilization category AC-23B (EN 60947-3) 

• a disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching 

devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the 

disconnector (EN 60947-3) 

• a circuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947-2. 

� Other regions 

The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations. 

Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive 

Check that the 3-phase AC induction motor and the drive are compatible according to 

the rating table in section Ratings on page 358. The table lists the typical motor power 

for each drive type. 

Only one permanent magnet synchronous motor can be connected to the inverter 

output. 

Selecting the power cables 

� General rules 

Dimension the input power and motor cables according to local regulations. 

• The input power and the motor cables must be able to carry the corresponding 

load currents. See section Ratings on page 358 for the rated currents. 

• The cable must be rated for at least 70 °C maximum permissible temperature of 

the conductor in continuous use. For US, see section Additional US requirements 

on page 40. 

• The conductivity of the PE conductor must be equal to that of the phase 

conductor (same cross-sectional area). 

• 600 V AC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC. 

• Refer to chapter Technical data on page 357 for the EMC requirements. 

A symmetrical shielded motor cable (see the figure below) must be used to meet the 

EMC requirements of the CE and C-Tick marks. 

A four-conductor system is allowed for input cabling, but a shielded symmetrical 

cable is recommended. 

Compared to a four-conductor system, the use of a symmetrical shielded cable 

reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as motor bearing 

currents and wear.

� Alternative power cable types 


Power cable types that can be used with the drive are presented below. 

Motor cables 

(recommended for input cables also) 

Symmetrical shielded cable: three phase 

conductors, a concentric or otherwise 

symmetrically constructed PE conductor 

and a shield 

PE 

conductor 

and shield 

Allowed as input cables 

� Motor cable shield 

Shield Shield 

PE 

A four-conductor system: three phase 

conductors and a protective conductor 

Note: A separate PE conductor is required 

if the conductivity of the cable shield is not 

sufficient for the purpose. 

To function as a protective conductor, the shield must have the same cross-sectional 

area as the phase conductors when they are made of the same metal. 

To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio-frequency emissions, the shield 

conductivity must be at least 1/10 of the phase conductor conductivity. The 

requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium shield. The minimum 

requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below. It consists of a 

concentric layer of copper wires. The better and tighter the shield, the lower the 

emission level and bearing currents. 

PE 

Shield 

Insulation jacket Copper wire screen Cable core 

PE 

PE


� Additional US requirements 

Type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds or 

shielded power cable is recommended for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not 

used. 

The power cables must be rated for 75 °C (167 °F). 

Conduit 

Where conduits must be coupled together, bridge the joint with a ground conductor 

bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint. Bond the conduits also to the drive 

enclosure. Use separate conduits for input power, motor, brake resistors and control 

wiring. Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit. 

Armored cable / shielded power cable 

Six-conductor (three phases and three ground) type MC continuous corrugated 

aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following 

suppliers (trade names in parentheses): 

• Anixter Wire & Cable (Philsheath) 

• BICC General Corp (Philsheath) 

• Rockbestos Co. (Gardex) 

• Oaknite (CLX). 

Shielded power cable is available from the following suppliers: 

• Belden 

• LAPPKABEL (ÖLFLEX) 

• Pirelli. 

Selecting the control cables 

� General rules 

All analog control cables and the cable used for the frequency input must be shielded. 

Use a double-shielded twisted pair cable (Figure a, for example JAMAK by Draka NK 

Cables) for analog signals. Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal. Do 

not use common return for different analog signals.


A double-shielded cable is the best alternative for low-voltage digital signals, but a 

single-shielded or unshielded twisted multipair cable (Figure b) is also usable. 

However, for frequency input, always use a shielded cable. 

a b 

Run analog and digital signals in separate cables. 

Relay-controlled signals, providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V, can be run in 

the same cables as digital input signals. It is recommended that the relay-controlled 

signals are run as twisted pairs. 

Never mix 24 V DC and 115/230 V AC signals in the same cable. 

� Relay cable 

Double-shielded twisted 

multipair cable 

The cable type with braided metallic screen (for example ÖLFLEX by LAPPKABEL) 

has been tested and approved by ABB. 

� Control panel cable 

In remote use, the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed 

3 m (10 ft). The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel 

option kits. 

Routing the cables 

Single-shielded twisted 

multipair cable 

Route the motor cable away from other cable routes. Motor cables of several drives 

can be run in parallel installed next to each other. It is recommended that the motor 

cable, input power cable and control cables are installed on separate trays. Avoid 

long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables to decrease electromagnetic 

interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output voltage. 

Where control cables must cross power cables make sure that they are arranged at 

an angle as near to 90 degrees as possible. 

The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the grounding 

electrodes. Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of 

potential.


A diagram of the cable routing is shown below. 

Input power cable 

min. 200 mm (8 in) 

� Control cable ducts 

90° 

Drive 

Control cables 

Motor cable 

Power cable 

Motor cable 

min. 500 mm (20 in) 

24 V 230 V 

24 V 

230 V 

Not allowed unless the 24 V cable is 

insulated for 230 V or insulated with an 

insulation sleeving for 230 V. 

min. 300 mm (12 in) 

Lead 24 V and 230 V control cables in 

separate ducts inside the cabinet.


Protecting the drive, input power cable, motor and motor 

cable in short circuit situations and against thermal 

overload 

� Protecting the drive and input power cable in short-circuit situations 

Arrange the protection according to the following guidelines. 

Distribution 

board 

1) 

2) 

I > 

Circuit diagram Short-circuit protection 

Input cable 

Drive 

Protect the drive and input 

cable with fuses or a 

circuit breaker. See 

footnotes 1) and 2). 

1) Size the fuses according to instructions given in chapter Technical data on page 357. The 

fuses will protect the input cable in short-circuit situations, restrict drive damage and prevent 

damage to adjoining equipment in case of a short-circuit inside the drive. 

2) Circuit breakers which have been tested by ABB with the ACS350 can be used. Fuses must 

be used with other circuit breakers. Contact your local ABB representative for the approved 

breaker types and supply network characteristics. 

WARNING! Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of circuit 

breakers, independent of the manufacturer, hot ionized gases may escape 

from the breaker enclosure in case of a short-circuit. To ensure safe use, special 

attention must be paid to the installation and placement of the breakers. Follow the 

manufacturer’s instructions. 

� Protecting the motor and motor cable in short-circuit situations 

The drive protects the motor and motor cable in a short-circuit situation when the 

motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No 

additional protection devices are needed. 

� Protecting the drive, motor cable and input power cable against 

thermal overload 

The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload 

when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No 

additional thermal protection devices are needed. 

M 

3~ 

M 

3~


WARNING! If the drive is connected to multiple motors, a separate thermal 

overload switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and 

motor. These devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short-circuit current. 

� Protecting the motor against thermal overload 

According to regulations, the motor must be protected against thermal overload and 

the current must be switched off when overload is detected. The drive includes a 

motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current 

when necessary. It is also possible to connect a motor temperature measurement to 

the drive. The user can tune both the thermal model and the temperature 

measurement function further by parameters. 

The most common temperature sensors are: 

• motor sizes IEC180…225: thermal switch (for example Klixon) 

• motor sizes IEC200…250 and larger: PTC or Pt100. 

For more information on the thermal model, see section Motor thermal protection on 

page 145. For more information on the temperature measurement function, see 

section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 155. 

Implementing the Safe torque off (STO) function 

See Appendix: Safe torque off (STO) on page 399. 

Using residual current devices (RCD) with the drive 

ACS355-01x drives are suitable to be used with residual current devices of Type A, 

ACS355-03x drives with residual current devices of Type B. For ACS355-03x drives, 

other measures for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, such as separation 

from the environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation from the supply 

system by a transformer, can also be applied. 

Using a safety switch between the drive and the motor 

It is recommended to install a safety switch between the permanent magnet motor 

and the drive output.This is needed to isolate the motor from the drive during 

maintenance work on the drive. 

Implementing a bypass connection 

WARNING! Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2, 

V2 and W2. Power line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent 

damage to the drive.


If frequent bypassing is required, employ mechanically connected switches or 

contactors to ensure that the motor terminals are not connected to the AC power line 

and drive output terminals simultaneously. 

Protecting the contacts of relay outputs 

Inductive loads (relays, contactors, motors) cause voltage transients when switched 

off. 

Equip inductive loads with noise attenuating circuits (varistors, RC filters [AC] or 

diodes [DC]) in order to minimize the EMC emission at switch-off. If not suppressed, 

the disturbances may connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the 

control cable and form a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system. 

Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible. Do not 

install protective components at the I/O terminal block. 

230 V AC 

230 V AC 

24 V DC 

Varistor 

RC filter 

Diode 

Drive 

relay 

output 

Drive 

relay 

output 

Drive 

relay 

output

46 Planning the electrical installation

Electrical installation 


Electrical installation 47 

The chapter tells how to check the insulation of the assembly and the compatibility 

with IT (ungrounded) and corner-grounded TN systems as well as connect power 

cables and control cables. 

WARNING! The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a 

qualified electrician. Follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 17. 

Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death. 

Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the input power during 

installation. If the drive is already connected to the input power, wait for 

5 minutes after disconnecting the input power. 

Checking the insulation of the assembly 

� Drive 

Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests (for example hi-pot 

or megger) on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive. Every drive has 

been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory. 

Also, there are voltage-limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing 

voltage automatically. 

� Input power cable 

Check the insulation of the input power cable according to local regulations before 

connecting to the drive.

48 Electrical installation 

� Motor and motor cable 

Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows: 

1. Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from the 

drive output terminals U2, V2 and W2. 

2. Measure the insulation resistance between each phase 

conductor and the Protective Earth conductor using a 

U1 

measuring voltage of 500 V DC. The insulation resistance 

3~ 

ohm 

of an ABB motor must exceed 100 Mohm (reference value 

at 25 °C or 77 °F). For the insulation resistance of other 

motors, please consult the manufacturer’s instructions. 

Note: Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance. If 

moisture is suspected, dry the motor and repeat the measurement. 

M 

V1 

W1 

PE 

Checking the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and 

corner-grounded TN systems 

WARNING! Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on an 

IT system (an ungrounded power system or a high-resistance-grounded [over 

30 ohms] power system), otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential 

through the EMC filter capacitors. This may cause danger or damage the drive. 

Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on a corner-grounded TN 

system, otherwise the drive will be damaged 

Note: When the internal EMC filter is disconnected, the drive is not EMC compatible 

without an external filter. 

1. If you have an IT (ungrounded) or corner-grounded TN system, disconnect the 

internal EMC filter by removing the EMC screw. For 3-phase U-type drives (with 

type designation ACS355-03U-), the EMC screw is already removed at the factory 

and replaced by a plastic one. 

1 

EMC screw in R0…R2. 

In R3, the screw is a little further up. 

EMC 

VAR 

EMC screw in R4, IP20 

(behind cover in R4, NEMA 1) 

EMC 

1

Connecting the power cables 

� Connection diagram 

For alternatives, 

see section 

Selecting the 

supply 

disconnecting 

device 

(disconnecting 

means) on page 

37. 

PE 

1) 

PE 

INPUT 

U1 V1 W1 

L1 L2 L3 

Drive 

1) Ground the other end of the PE conductor at the distribution board. 


OUTPUT 

U2 V2 W2 

V1 

U1 W1 

3 ~ 

Motor 

2) Use a separate grounding cable if the conductivity of the cable shield is insufficient (smaller 

than the conductivity of the phase conductor) and there is no symmetrically constructed 

grounding conductor in the cable. See section Selecting the power cables on page 38. 

3) 

For more information on Common DC, see ACS355 Common DC application guide 

(3AUA0000070130 [EN]). 

Note: 

BRK+ BRK- 

Optional brake 

resistor or 

Common DC 3) 

Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable. 

If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the motor cable in addition to 

the conductive shield, connect the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the drive 

and motor ends. 

Route the motor cable, input power cable and control cables separately. For more 

information, see section Routing the cables on page 41. 

Grounding of the motor cable shield at the motor end 

For minimum radio frequency interference: 

• ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows: 

flattened width > 1/5 · length 

b > 1/5 · a 

• or ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the leadthrough 

of the motor terminal box. a b 

2)


� Connection procedure 

1. Fasten the grounding conductor (PE) of the input power cable under the 

grounding clamp. Connect the phase conductors to the U1, V1 and W1 terminals. 

Use a tightening torque of 0.8 N·m (7 lbf·in) for frame sizes R0…R2, 1.7 N·m 

(15 lbf·in) for R3 and 2.5 N·m (22 lbf·in) for R4. 

2. Strip the motor cable and twist the shield to form as short a pigtail as possible. 

Fasten the twisted shield under the grounding clamp. Connect the phase 

conductors to the U2, V2 and W2 terminals. Use a tightening torque of 0.8 N·m 

(7 lbf·in) for frame sizes R0…R2, 1.7 N·m (15 lbf·in) for R3 and 2.5 N·m (22 lbf·in) 

for R4. 

3. Connect the optional brake resistor to the BRK+ and BRK- terminals with a 

shielded cable using the same procedure as for the motor cable in the previous 

step. 

4. Secure the cables outside the drive mechanically. 

1 3 2 

1 

2

Connecting the control cables 

� I/O terminals 


The figure below shows the I/O terminals. Tightening torque is 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf·in. 

S1 

mA 

V 

AI1 

AI2 

X1C:STO 

1 2 3 4 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 17 18 19 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 21 22 

X1A X1B 

Voltage and current selection for analog inputs 

X1A: 

1: SCR 

2: AI1 

3: GND 

4: +10 V 

5: AI2 

6: GND 

7: AO 

8: GND 

9: +24 V 

10: GND 

11: DCOM 

12: DI1 

13: DI2 

14: DI3 

15: DI4 

X1B: 

17: ROCOM 

18: RONC 

19: RONO 

20: DOSRC 

21: DOOUT 

22: DOGND 

X1C:STO 

1: OUT1 

2: OUT2 

3: IN1 

4: IN2 

16: DI5 digital or frequency input 

S1: Selects voltage or current as 

the signal types for analog 

inputs AI1 and AI2. 

Switch S1 selects voltage (0 [2]…10 V / -10…10 V) or current (0 [4]…20 mA / 

-20…20 mA) as the signal types for analog inputs AI1 and AI2. The factory settings 

are unipolar voltage for AI1 (0 [2]…10 V) and unipolar current for AI2 (0 [4]…20 mA), 

which correspond to the default usage in the application macros. The switch is 

located to the left of I/O terminal 9 (see the I/O terminal figure above). 

S1 

1 

ON 

2 

AI1 

AI2 

Top position (ON): I (0 [4]…20 mA, default for AI2; or -20…20 mA) 

Bottom position (OFF): U (0 [2]…10 V, default for AI1; or -10…10 V)


Voltage and current connection for analog inputs 

Bipolar voltage (-10…10 V) and current (-20…20 mA) are also possible. If a bipolar 

connection is used instead of a unipolar one, see section Programmable analog 

inputs on page 130 for how to set parameters accordingly. 

Unipolar voltage 

1…10 kohm 

SCR 

AI 

GND 

+10V 

PNP and NPN configuration for digital inputs 

You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration. 

External power supply for digital inputs 

For using an external +24 V supply for the digital inputs, see the figure below. 

0VDC 

+24 V DC 

Frequency input 

+10 V GND -10 V 

PNP connection (source) 

X1 

9 +24V 

10 GND 

11 DCOM 

12 DI1 

13 DI2 

14 DI3 

15 DI4 

16 DI5 

PNP connection (source) 

X1 

9 +24V 

10 GND 

11 DCOM 

12 DI1 

13 DI2 

14 DI3 

15 DI4 

16 DI5 

Bipolar voltage Unipolar/Bipolar current 

+24 V DC 

0VDC 

SCR 

AI 

GND 

SCR 

AI 

GND 

Use external power supply. 

NPN connection (sink) 

X1 

9 +24V 

10 GND 

11 DCOM 

12 DI1 

13 DI2 

14 DI3 

15 DI4 

16 DI5 

NPN connection (sink) 

X1 

9 +24V 

10 GND 

11 DCOM 

12 DI1 

13 DI2 

14 DI3 

15 DI4 

16 DI5 

If DI5 is used as a frequency input, see section Frequency input on page 133 for how 

to set parameters accordingly.

Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors 


Hand/Auto, PID control, and Torque control macros (see section Application macros, 

pages 116, 117 and 118, respectively) use analog input 2 (AI2). The macro wiring 

diagrams on these pages use an externally powered sensor (connections not shown). 

The figures below give examples of connections using a two-wire or three-wire 

sensor/transmitter supplied by the drive auxiliary voltage output. 

Note: Maximum capability of the auxiliary 24 V (200 mA) output must not be 

exceeded. 

Two-wire sensor/transmitter 

P 

I 

- 

+ 

4…20 mA 

X1A 

5 AI2 Process actual value measurement or reference, 

6 

… 

GND 0(4)…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm 

9 +24V Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated, 

10 GND +24VDC, max. 200mA 

Note: The sensor is supplied through its current output and the drive feeds the supply 

voltage (+24 V). Thus the output signal must be 4…20 mA, not 0…20 mA. 

Three-wire sensor/transmitter 

P 

I 

OUT 

- 

+ 

X1A 

(0)4…20 mA 

5 AI2 Process actual value measurement or reference, 

6 

… 

GND 0(4)…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm 

9 +24V Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated, 

10 GND +24VDC, max. 200mA


� Default I/O connection diagram 

The default connection of the control signals depends on the application macro in 

use, which is selected with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO. 

The default macro is the ABB standard macro. It provides a general purpose I/O 

configuration with three constant speeds. Parameter values are the default values 

given in section Default values with different macros on page 176. For information on 

other macros, see chapter Application macros on page 109. 

The default I/O connections for the ABB standard macro are given in the figure below. 

1…10 kohm 

max. 500 ohm 

4) 

X1A 

1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen) 

2 AI1 Output frequency reference: 0…10 V 1) 

3 GND Analog input circuit common 

4 +10V Reference voltage: +10 V DC, max. 10 mA 

5 AI2 Not in use by default. 0…10 V 


7 AO Output frequency value: 0…20 mA 

8 GND Analog output circuit common 

9 +24V Auxiliary voltage output: +24 V DC, max. 200 mA 

10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 

11 DCOM Digital input common 

12 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) 

13 DI2 Forward (0) / Reverse (1) 

14 DI3 Constant speed selection 2) 


16 DI5 Acceleration and deceleration selection 3) 

X1B 

17 ROCOM Relay output 1 

18 RONC 

19 RONO 

No fault [Fault (-1)] 

20 DOSRC Digital output, max. 100 mA 

21 DOOUT 

22 DOGND 

X1C:STO 


1 OUT1 STO (Safe torque off) connection 

2 OUT2 

3 IN1 

4 IN2

1) AI1 is used as a speed reference if vector 

mode is selected. 

2) 

See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 

SPEEDS: 

DI3 DI4 Operation (parameter) 

0 0 Set speed through AI1 

1 0 Speed 1 (1202) 

0 1 Speed 2 (1203) 

1 1 Speed 3 (1204) 


3) 0 = ramp times according to parameters 

2202 and 2203. 

1 = ramp times according to parameters 

2205 and 2206. 

4) 

360 degree grounding under a clamp. 

Tightening torque = 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf·in.


� Connection procedure 

1. Remove the terminal cover by simultaneously pushing the recess and sliding the 

cover off the frame. 

2. Analog signals: Strip the outer insulation of the analog signal cable 360 degrees 

and ground the bare shield under the clamp. 

3. Connect the conductors to the appropriate terminals. Use a tightening torque of 

0.4 N·m (3.5 lbf·in). 

4. Twist the grounding conductors of each pair in the analog signal cable together 

and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal (terminal 1). 

5. Digital signals: Strip the outer insulation of the digital signal cable 360 degrees 

and ground the bare shield under the clamp. 

6. Connect the conductors of the cable to the appropriate terminals. Use a tightening 

torque of 0.4 N·m (3.5 lbf·in). 

7. For double-shielded cables, twist also the grounding conductors of each pair in 

the cable together and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal (terminal 1). 

8. Secure all cables outside the drive mechanically. 

9. Unless you need to install the optional fieldbus module (see section Attach the 

optional fieldbus module on page 35), slide the terminal cover back in place. 

10. Connect STO conductors to the appropriate terminals. Use a tightening torque of 

0.4 N·m (3.5 lbf·in). 

1 

2 

4 

3 

2 

6 

10

Installation checklist 

Checking the installation 

Installation checklist 57 

Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start-up. Go 

through the checklist below together with another person. Read chapter Safety on 

page 17 of this manual before you work on the drive. 

Check 

MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 

The ambient operating conditions are allowed. (See Mechanical installation: Checking the 

installation site on page 31 as well as Technical data: Losses, cooling data and noise on 

page 364 and Ambient conditions on page 371.) 

The drive is fixed properly on an even vertical non-flammable wall. (See Mechanical 

installation on page 31.) 

The cooling air will flow freely. (See Mechanical installation: Free space around the drive 

on page 32.) 

The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start. (See Planning the electrical 

installation: Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive on page 38 as well as 

Technical data: Motor connection data on page 367.) 

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION (See Planning the electrical installation on page 37 and 

Electrical installation on page 47.) 

For ungrounded and corner-grounded systems: The internal EMC filter is disconnected 

(EMC screw removed). 

The capacitors are reformed if the drive has been stored over a year. 

The drive is grounded properly. 

The input power voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage. 

The input power connections at U1, V1 and W1 are OK and tightened with the correct 

torque.

58 Installation checklist 

Check 

Appropriate input power fuses and disconnector are installed. 

The motor connections at U2, V2 and W2 are OK and tightened with the correct torque. 

The motor cable, input power cable and control cables are routed separately. 

The external control (I/O) connections are OK. 

Safe torque off (STO) connections, operation and reaction are OK. 

The input power voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive (with a bypass 

connection). 

Terminal cover and, for NEMA 1, hood and connection box, are in place.

Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 59 

Start-up, control with I/O and 

ID run 


The chapter tells how to: 

• perform the start-up 

• start, stop, change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the speed of the 

motor through the I/O interface 

• perform an Identification run for the drive. 

Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter. For 

details on how to use the control panel, refer to chapter Control panels on page 73. 

How to start up the drive 

WARNING! The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified 

electrician. 

The safety instructions given in chapter Safety on page 17 must be followed during 

the start-up procedure. 

The drive will start up automatically at power-up if the external run command is on 

and the drive is in the remote control mode. 

Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger. De-couple the 

driven machine if: 

• there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or 

• an ID run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. ID run is essential only 

in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.

60 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 

• Check the installation. See the checklist in chapter Installation checklist on page 

57. 

How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have, if any. 

• If you have no control panel, follow the instructions given in section How to start 

up the drive without a control panel on page 60. 

• If you have a basic control panel (ACS-CP-C), follow the instructions given in 

section How to perform a manual start-up on page 61. 

• If you have an assistant control panel (ACS-CP-A, ACS-CP-D), you can either 

run the Start-up assistant (see section How to perform a guided start-up on page 

66) or perform a manual start-up (see section How to perform a manual start-up 

on page 61). 

The Start-up assistant, which is included in the assistant control panel only, guides 

you through all essential settings to be done. In the manual start-up, the drive 

gives no guidance; you go through the very basic settings by following the 

instructions given in section How to perform a manual start-up on page 61. 

� How to start up the drive without a control panel 

POWER-UP 

Apply input power and wait for a moment. 

Check that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking. 

The drive is now ready for use.

� How to perform a manual start-up 


For the manual start-up, you can use the basic control panel or the assistant control 

panel. The instructions below are valid for both control panels, but the displays shown 

are the basic control panel displays, unless the instruction applies to the assistant 

control panel only. 

Before you start, ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand. 

POWER-UP 

Apply input power. 

The basic control panel powers up into the Output 

mode. 

The assistant control panel asks if you want to run 

EXIT 

the Start-up assistant. If you press , the Startup 

assistant is not run, and you can continue with 

manual start-up in a similar manner as described 

below for the basic control panel. 

REM CHOICE 

MANUAL ENTRY OF START-UP DATA (parameter group 99) 

If you have an assistant control panel, select the REM PAR EDIT 

language (the basic control panel does not 

support languages). See parameter 9901 for the 

values of the available language alternatives. 

9901 LANGUAGE 

For instructions on how to set parameters with the 

assistant control panel, see section Assistant control 

panel on page 87. 

Select the motor type (9903). 

• 1 (AM): Asynchronous motor 

• 2 (PMSM): Permanent magnet motor. 

Setting of parameter 9903 is shown below as an 

example of parameter setting with the basic control 

panel. You find more detailed instructions in section 

Basic control panel on page 75. 

1. To go to the Main menu, press if the bottom line 

shows OUTPUT; otherwise press 

until you see MENU at the bottom. 

repeatedly 

2. Press keys / until you see “PAr”, and 

press . 

3. Find the appropriate parameter group with keys 

/ and press . 

4. Find the appropriate parameter in the group with 

keys / . 

00 . 

REM Hz 

OUTPUT FWD 

REM 

REM 

REM 

REM 

REM 

Do you want to 

use the start-up 

assistant? 

Yes 

No 

EXIT 00:00 OK 

ENGLISH 

[0] 

CANCEL 00:00 SAVE 

9903 

PAR FWD 

rEF 

MENU FWD 

-01- 

PAR FWD 

9901 

PAR FWD 

9903 

PAR FWD


5. Press and hold for about two seconds until the 

parameter value is shown with SET under the value. REM 

6. Change the value with keys / . The value 

changes faster while you keep the key pressed 

down. 

7. Save the parameter value by pressing . 

Select the application macro (parameter 9902) 

according to how the control cables are 

connected. 

The default value 1 (ABB STANDARD) is suitable in 

most cases. 

Select the motor control mode (parameter 9904). 

1(VECTOR: SPEED) is suitable in most cases. 

2(VECTOR: TORQ) is suitable for torque control 

applications. 

3(SCALAR: FREQ) is recommended 

• for multimotor drives when the number of the motors 

connected to the drive is variable 

• when the nominal current of the motor is less than 

20% of the nominal current of the drive 

• when the drive is used for test purposes with no motor 

connected. 

3(SCALAR: FREQ) is not recommended for permanent 

magnet motors. 

Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate. 

Asynchronous motor nameplate example: 

6312/C3 

ABB Motors 

3 motor 

M2AA 200 MLA 4 

IEC 200 M/L 55 

No 

Ins.cl. F IP 55 

V Hz kW r/min A cos IA/IN t E/s 

690 Y 50 30 1475 32.5 0.83 

400 D 50 30 1475 56 0.83 

660 Y 50 30 1470 34 0.83 

380 D 50 30 1470 59 0.83 

415 D 50 30 1475 54 0.83 

440 D 60 35 1770 59 0.83 

Cat. no 3GAA 202 001 - ADA 

6210/C3 

IEC 34-1 

180 

380 V 

supply 

voltage 

REM 

REM 

REM 

REM 

1 

PAR SET FWD 

2 

PAR SET FWD 

9903 

PAR FWD 

9902 

PAR FWD 

9904 

PAR FWD 

Note: Set the motor data to 

exactly the same value as on 

the motor nameplate. For 

example, if the motor nominal 

speed is 1440 rpm on the 

nameplate, setting the value of 

parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM 

SPEED to 1500 rpm results in 

the wrong operation of the drive.

Permanent magnet motor nameplate example: 

• motor nominal voltage (parameter 9905). 

For permanent magnet motors, enter the back emf 

voltage at nominal speed here. Otherwise use 

nominal voltage and perform ID run. 

If the voltage is given as voltage per rpm, eg 60 V per 

1000 rpm, the voltage for 3000 rpm nominal speed is 

3 · 60 V = 180 V. 

• motor nominal current (parameter 9906) 

Allowed range: 0.2…2.0 · I2N A 

• motor nominal frequency (parameter 9907) 

• motor nominal speed (parameter 9908) 

• motor nominal power (parameter 9909) 


REM 

REM 

REM 

REM 

REM 

9905 

PAR FWD 

9906 

PAR FWD 

9907 

PAR FWD 

9908 

PAR FWD 

9909 

PAR FWD


Select the motor identification method (parameter 9910). 

The default value 0 (OFF/IDMAGN) using the identification magnetization is 

suitable for most applications. It is applied in this basic start-up procedure. Note 

however that this requires that parameter 9904 is set to 1 (VECTOR: SPEED) or 

2(VECTOR: TORQ). 

If your selection is 0 (OFF/IDMAGN), move to the next step. 

Value 1 (ON) should be selected if: 

• the operation point is near zero speed, and/or 

• operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed 

range and without any measured speed feedback is required. 

If you decide to perform the ID run (value 1 [ON]), continue by following the 

separate instructions given on page 69 in section How to perform the ID run and 

then return to step DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION on page 64. 

IDENTIFICATION MAGNETIZATION WITH ID RUN SELECTION 0 (OFF/IDMAGN) 

LOC 

Press key REM to switch to local control (LOC 

shown on the left). 

Press to start the drive. The motor model is 

now calculated by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 

15 s at zero speed. 

DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION 

Check the direction of the motor rotation. 

• If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on LOC 

LOC 

the left), switch to local control by pressing . 

Hz 

REM xxx . 

• To go to the Main menu, press if the bottom 

SET FWD 

line shows OUTPUT; otherwise press 

repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom. 

• Press keys / until you see “rEF” and 

press . 

• Increase the frequency reference from zero to a 

small value with key . 

• Press to start the motor. 

• Check that the actual direction of the motor is 

the same as indicated on the display (FWD 

means forward and REV reverse). 

• Press to stop the motor. 

To change the direction of the motor rotation: 

forward 

direction 

reverse 

direction

• Invert the phases by changing the value of 

parameter 9914 to the opposite, ie from 0 (NO) 

to 1 (YES), or vice versa. 

• Verify your work by applying input power and 

repeating the check as described above. 


SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES 

Set the minimum speed (parameter 2001). 

Set the maximum speed (parameter 2002). 

Set the acceleration time 1 (parameter 2202). 

Note: Set also acceleration time 2 (parameter 

2205) if two acceleration times will be used in the 

application. 

Set the deceleration time 1 (parameter 2203). 

Note: Set also deceleration time 2 (parameter 

2206) if two deceleration times will be used in the 

application. 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

SAVING A USER MACRO AND FINAL CHECK 

The start-up is now completed. However, it might LOC 

be useful at this stage to set the parameters 

required by your application and save the settings 

as a user macro as instructed in section User 

macros on page 119. 

Check that the drive state is OK. 

Basic control panel: Check that there are no faults 

or alarms shown on the display. 

If you want to check the LEDs on the front of the 

drive, switch first to remote control (otherwise a 

fault is generated) before removing the panel and 

verifying that the red LED is not lit and the green 

LED is lit but not blinking. 

Assistant control panel: Check that there are no 

faults or alarms shown on the display and that the 

panel LED is green and does not blink. 

The drive is now ready for use. 

9914 

PAR FWD 

2001 

PAR FWD 

2002 

PAR FWD 

2202 

PAR FWD 

2203 

PAR FWD 

9902 

PAR FWD


� How to perform a guided start-up 

To be able to perform the guided start-up, you need the assistant control panel. 

Guided start-up is applicable to AC induction motors. 

Before you start, ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand. 

POWER-UP 

Apply input power. The control panel first asks if you 

want to use the Start-up assistant. 

OK 

• Press (when Yes is highlighted) to run the 

Start-up assistant. 

EXIT 

• Press if you do not want to run the Start-up 

assistant. 

OK 

• Press key to highlight No and then press 

if you want to make the panel ask (or not ask) the 

question about running the Start-up assistant again 

the next time you switch on the power to the drive. 

SELECTING THE LANGUAGE 

If you decided to run the Start-up assistant, the 

display then asks you to select the language. Scroll to 

the desired language with keys / and press 

SAVE 

to accept. 

EXIT 

If you press , the Start-up assistant is stopped. 

STARTING THE GUIDED SET-UP 

The Start-up assistant now guides you through the 

set-up tasks, starting with the motor set-up. Set the 

motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor 

nameplate. 

Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys 

SAVE 

/ and press to accept and continue 

with the Start-up assistant. 

EXIT 

Note: At any time, if you press , the Start-up 

assistant is stopped and the display goes to the 

Output mode. 

The basic start-up is now completed. However, it 

might be useful at this stage to set the parameters 

required by your application and continue with the 

application set-up as suggested by the Start-up 

assistant. 

REM CHOICE 


use the start-up 

assistant? 

Yes 

No 

EXIT 00:00 OK 

REM CHOICE 

Show start-up 

assistant on 

next boot? 

Yes 

No 

EXIT 00:00 OK 

REM 

PAR EDIT 

9901 LANGUAGE 

ENGLISH 

[0] 

EXIT 00:00 SAVE 

REM 

PAR EDIT 

9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 

220 V 


REM CHOICE 


continue with 

application setup? 

Continue 

Skip 

EXIT 00:00 OK

Select the application macro according to which the 

control cables are connected. 

Continue with the application set-up. After completing 

a set-up task, the Start-up assistant suggests the next 

one. 

OK 

• Press (when Continue is highlighted) to 

continue with the suggested task. 

• Press key to highlight Skip and then press 

OK 

to move to the following task without doing the 

suggested task. 

EXIT 

• Press to stop the Start-up assistant. 

DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION 

LOC 

Press key REM to switch to local control (LOC shown 

on the left). 

• If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the 

LOC 

status line), switch to local control by pressing REM . 

EXIT 

• If you are not in the Output mode, press 

repeatedly until you get there. 

• Increase the frequency reference from zero to a 

small value with key . 

• Press to start the motor. 

• Check that the actual direction of the motor is the 

same as indicated on the display ( means forward 

and reverse). 

• Press to stop the motor. 

To change the direction of the motor rotation: 

• Invert the phases by changing the value of 

parameter 9914 to the opposite, ie from 0 (NO) to 

1(YES), or vice versa. 

• Verify your work by applying input power and 

repeating the check as described above. 

FINAL CHECK 

After the whole set-up is completed, check that there 

are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the 

panel LED is green and does not blink. 

The drive is now ready for use. 


REM 

PAR EDIT 

9902 APPLIC MACRO 

ABB STANDARD 

[1] 


REM CHOICE 


continue with 

EXT1 reference setup? 

Continue 

Skip 

EXIT 00:00 OK 

LOC xx.xHz 

xx. x Hz 

x . x A 

xx. x % 

DIR 00:00 MENU 

forward 

direction 

LOC 

PAR EDIT 

reverse 

direction 

9914 PHASE INVERSION 

YES 

[1] 

CANCEL 00:00 SAVE


How to control the drive through the I/O interface 

The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog 

inputs when: 

• the motor start-up is performed, and 

• the default (standard) parameter settings are valid. 

Displays of the basic control panel are shown as an example. 

PRELIMINARY SETTINGS 

If you need to change the direction of rotation, check 

that parameter 1003 DIRECTION is set to 3 

(REQUEST). 

Ensure that the control connections are wired 

according to the connection diagram given for the 

ABB standard macro. 

See section Default I/O 

connection diagram on page 54. 

Ensure that the drive is in remote control. Press key In remote control, the panel 

LOC 

REM to switch between remote and local control. display shows text REM. 

STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR 

Start by switching digital input DI1 on. 

Basic control panel: Text FWD starts flashing fast and 00 . 

stops after the setpoint is reached 

Assistant control panel: The arrow starts rotating. It is 

dotted until the setpoint is reached. 

OUTPUT FWD 

Regulate the drive output frequency (motor speed) by 

adjusting the voltage of analog input AI1. 

CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION 

Reverse direction: Switch digital input DI2 on. 

Forward direction: Switch digital input DI2 off. 

STOPPING THE MOTOR 

Switch digital input DI1 off. The motor stops. 

Basic control panel: Text FWD starts flashing slowly. 

Assistant control panel: The arrow stops rotating. 

REM Hz 

500 . 

REM Hz 

OUTPUT FWD 

500 . 

500 . 

REM Hz 

OUTPUT REV 

REM Hz 

OUTPUT FWD 

00 . 

REM Hz 

OUTPUT FWD

How to perform the ID run 


The drive estimates motor characteristics automatically when the drive is started for 

the first time and after any motor parameter (group 99 START-UP DATA) is changed. 

This is valid when parameter 9910 ID RUN has value 0 (OFF/IDMAGN). 

In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID run. The ID run should 

be selected if: 

• vector control mode is used (parameter 9904 = 1 [VECTOR: SPEED] or 

2[VECTOR: TORQ]), and 

• operation point is near zero speed and/or 

• operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque, over a wide speed 

range, and without any measured speed feedback (ie without a pulse encoder) is 

needed or 

• permanent magnet motor is used and the back emf voltage is unknown. 

Note: If motor parameters (group 99 START-UP DATA) are changed after the ID run, 

it must be repeated. 

� ID run procedure 

The general parameter setting procedure is not repeated here. For basic control 

panel, see page 75 and for assistant control panel, see page 87 in chapter Control 

panels. The ID run cannot be performed without a control panel. 

PRE-CHECK 

WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50…80% of the 

nominal speed during the ID run. The motor will rotate in the forward 

direction. Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID run! 

De-couple the motor from the driven equipment 

If parameter values (group 01 OPERATING DATA to group 98 OPTIONS) are 

changed before the ID run, check that the new settings meet the following 

conditions: 

2001 MINIMUM SPEED < 0 rpm 

2002 MAXIMUM SPEED > 80% of the motor rated speed 

2003 MAX CURRENT > I2N 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 > 50% or 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 > 50%, depending on 

which limit is in use according to parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL. 

Check that the Run enable signal is on (parameter 1601). 

LOC 

Ensure that the panel is in local control (LOC shown at the top). Press key REM 

to 

switch between local and remote control.


ID RUN WITH THE BASIC CONTROL PANEL 

Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 (ON). Save LOC 

the new setting by pressing . 

If you want to monitor actual values during the ID 

run, go to the Output mode by pressing 


Press to start the ID run. The panel keeps 

switching between the display that was shown 

when you started the run and the alarm display 

presented on the right. 

In general, it is recommended not to press any 

control panel keys during the ID run. However, you 

can stop the ID run at any time by pressing . 

After the ID run is completed, the alarm display is 

not shown any more. 

If the ID run fails, the fault display presented on 

the right is shown. 

ID RUN WITH THE ASSISTANT CONTROL PANEL 

Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 (ON). Save REM 

SAVE 

the new setting by pressing . 

If you want to monitor actual values during the ID 

EXIT 

run, go to the Output mode by pressing 


Press to start the ID run. The panel keeps 

switching between the display that was shown 

when you started the run Run and the alarm 

display presented on the right. 

In general, it is recommended not to press any 

control panel keys during the ID run. However, you 

can stop the ID run at any time by pressing . 

LOC 

LOC 

9910 

PAR FWD 

1 

PAR SET FWD 

00 . 

OUTPUT FWD 

LOC 

LOC 

A2019FWD 

F0011FWD 

PAR EDIT 

9910 ID RUN 

ON 

[1] 



Hz 

LOC 50.0Hz 

LOC 

ID RUN 

0. 0 Hz 

0. 0 A 

0. 0 % 

ALARM 

ALARM 2019 

00:00

After the ID run is completed, the alarm display is 

not shown any more. 

If the ID run fails, the fault display presented on 

the right is shown. 


LOC 

FAULT 

FAULT 11 

ID RUN FAIL 

00:00

72 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run

Control panels 


Control panels 73 

The chapter describes the control panel keys, LED indicators and display fields. It 

also instructs in using the panel in control, monitoring and changing the settings. 

About control panels 

Use a control panel to control the ACS355, read status data, and adjust parameters. 

The drive works with either of two different control panel types: 

• Basic control panel – This panel (described in section Basic control panel on page 

75) provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values. 

• Assistant control panel – This panel (described in section Assistant control panel 

on page 87) includes pre-programmed assistants to automate the most common 

parameter setups. The panel provides language support. It is available with 

different language sets. 

Applicability 

The manual is applicable to panels with the panel revisions and the panel firmware 

versions given in the table below. 

Panel type Type code Panel revision Panel firmware 

version 

Basic control panel ACS-CP-C M or later 1.13 or later 

Assistant control panel ACS-CP-A F or later 2.04 or later 

Assistant control panel (Asia) ACS-CP-D Q or later 2.04 or later

74 Control panels 

To find out the panel revision, see the label on the back of the panel. An example 

label and explanation of the label contents are shown below. 

1 

2 

ABB Oy, ACS-CP-A 

S/N M0935E0001 RoHS 

1 Panel type code 

2 Serial number of format MYYWWRXXXX, where 

M: Manufacturer 

YY: 09, 10, 11, …, for 2009, 2010, 2011, … 

WW: 01, 02, 03, … for week 1, week 2, week 3, … 

R: A, B, C, … for panel revision 

XXXX: Integer starting every week from 0001 

3 RoHS mark (the label of your drive shows the valid markings) 

3 

To find out the panel firmware version of your assistant control panel, see page 91. 

For the basic control panel, see page 78. 

See parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to find out the languages supported by the different 

assistant control panels.

Basic control panel 

� Features 


The basic control panel features: 

• numeric control panel with an LCD display 

• copy function – parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later 

transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.


� Overview 

The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the basic control 

panel. 

No. Use 

1 LCD display – Divided into five areas: 

a. Upper left – Control location: 

LOC: drive control is local, that is, from the 

control panel 

REM: drive control is remote, such as the drive 

I/O or fieldbus. 

b. Upper right – Unit of the displayed value. 

1a 

1d 

LOC 

OUTPUT 

A 

1c 11. 

FWD 

1b 

1e 

c. Center – Variable; in general, shows parameter 

and signal values, menus or lists. Shows also 

2 

4 

3 

fault and alarm codes. 

6 5 

7 

d. Lower left and center – Panel operation state: 

OUTPUT: Output mode 

PAR: Parameter mode 

MENU: Main menu. 

FAULT : Fault mode. 

e. Lower right – Indicators: 

8 9 

2 

FWD (forward) / REV (reverse): direction of the motor rotation 

Flashing slowly: stopped 

Flashing rapidly: running, not at setpoint 

Steady: running, at setpoint 

SET 

: Displayed value can be modified (in the Parameter and Reference modes). 

RESET/EXIT – Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed values. 

Resets faults in the Output and Fault modes. 

3 MENU/ENTER – Enters deeper into menu level. In the Parameter mode, saves the 

displayed value as the new setting. 

4 Up – 

• Scrolls up through a menu or list. 

• Increases a value if a parameter is selected. 

• Increases the reference value in the Reference mode. 

• Holding the key down changes the value faster. 

5 Down – 

• Scrolls down through a menu or list. 

• Decreases a value if a parameter is selected. 

• Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode. 

• Holding the key down changes the value faster. 

6 LOC/REM – Changes between local and remote control of the drive. 

7 DIR – Changes the direction of the motor rotation. 

8 STOP – Stops the drive in local control. 

9 START – Starts the drive in local control.

� Operation 


You operate the control panel with the help of menus and keys. You select an option, 

eg operation mode or parameter, by scrolling the and arrow keys until the 

option is visible in the display and then pressing the key. 

With the key, you return to the previous operation level without saving the made 

changes. 

The basic control panel has five panel modes: Output mode, Reference mode, 

Parameter mode, Copy mode and Fault mode. The operation in the first four modes 

is described in this chapter. When a fault or alarm occurs, the panel goes 

automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm code. You can reset the 

fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode (see chapter Fault tracing on page 335). 

After the power is switched on, the panel is in the 

Output mode, where you can start, stop, change the 

direction, switch between local and remote control and 

monitor up to three actual values (one at a time). To do 

other tasks, go first to the Main menu and select the 

appropriate mode. 

How to do common tasks 

491 . 

PAr 

REM Hz 

OUTPUT FWD 

The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them and the page 

number where the steps to do the task are described in detail. 

Task Mode Page 

How to find out the panel firmware version At power up 78 

How to switch between local and remote control Any 78 

How to start and stop the drive Any 78 

How to change the direction of the motor rotation Any 79 

How to browse the monitored signals Output 80 

How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference Reference 81 

How to change the value of a parameter Parameter 82 

How to select the monitored signals Parameter 83 

How to reset faults and alarms Output, Fault 335 

How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Copy 86 

How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Copy 86 

REM 

MENU FWD


How to find out the panel firmware version 

Step Action Display 

1. If the power is switched on, switch it off. 

2. Keep key pressed down while you switch on the 

power and read the panel firmware version shown on 

the display. 

When you release the 

Output mode. 

key, the panel goes to the 

How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control 

You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be 

able to start or stop the drive, the drive must be in local control. 

After pressing the key, the display briefly shows 

message “LoC” or “rE”, as appropriate, before 

returning to the previous display. 

The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in 

remote control (REM) and controlled through the 

drive I/O terminals. To switch to local control (LOC) 

and control the drive using the control panel, press 

. The result depends on how long you press 

XXX . 


1. • To switch between remote control (REM shown on 

the left) and local control (LOC shown on the left), 

LOC press REM . 

Note: Switching to local control can be disabled 

with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK. 

LOC 

OUTPUT 

Hz 491 . 

FWD 

LOC 

REM 

the key: 

• If you release the key immediately (the display 

flashes “LoC”), the drive stops. Set the local 

control reference as instructed on page 81. 

• If you press the key for about two seconds 

(release when the display changes from “LoC” 

to “LoC r”), the drive continues as before. The 

drive copies the current remote values for the 

run/stop status and the reference, and uses 

them as the initial local control settings. 

• To stop the drive in local control, press . Text FWD or REV on the bottom 

line starts flashing slowly. 

• To start the drive in local control, press . Text FWD or REV on the bottom 

line starts flashing rapidly. It 

stops flashing when the drive 

reaches the setpoint. 

LOC 

LoC 

FWD

How to change the direction of the motor rotation 

You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode. 



1. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the 

LOC 

left), switch to local control by pressing REM . The 

display briefly shows message “LoC” before 

returning to the previous display. 

LOC 

OUTPUT 

Hz 491 . 

FWD 

2. To change the direction from forward (FWD shown at 

the bottom) to reverse (REV shown at the bottom), or 

vice versa, press . 

LOC 

OUTPUT 

Hz 491 . 

REV 

Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 

(REQUEST).


� Output mode 

In the Output mode, you can: 

• monitor actual values of up to three group 01 OPERATING DATA signals, one 

signal at a time 

• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control. 

You get to the Output mode by pressing until the display shows text OUTPUT at 

the bottom. 

The display shows the value of one group 01 

OPERATING DATA signal. The unit is shown on the 

right. Page 83 tells how to select up to three signals to 

be monitored in the Output mode. The table below 

shows how to view them one at a time. 

How to browse the monitored signals 

491 . 

REM Hz 

OUTPUT FWD 


1. If more than one signals have been selected to be 

monitored (see page 83), you can browse them in 

the Output mode. 

To browse the signals forward, press key 

repeatedly. To browse them backward, press key 

repeatedly. 

REM 

OUTPUT 

REM 

Hz 491 . 

FWD 

A 

05 . 

OUTPUT FWD 

107 . 

REM % 

OUTPUT FWD

� Reference mode 


In the Reference mode, you can: 

• set the speed, frequency or torque reference 


How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference 


1. Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in 

the Output mode, otherwise by pressing 


REM PAr 

MENU FWD 

2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the 

LOC 

left), switch to local control by pressing REM . The 

display briefly shows “LoC” before switching to local 

control. 

Note: With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT, you 

can allow the reference modification in remote 

control (REM). 

3. If the panel is not in the Reference mode (“rEF” not 

visible), press key or until you see “rEF” 

and then press . Now the display shows the 

current reference value with SET under the value. 

4. • To increase the reference value, press . 

• To decrease the reference value, press . 

The value changes immediately when you press the 

key. It is stored in the drive permanent memory and 

restored automatically after power switch-off. 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

PAr 

MENU FWD 

rEF 

491 . 

MENU FWD 

SET FWD 

500 . 

SET FWD 

Hz 

Hz


� Parameter mode 

In the Parameter mode, you can: 

• view and change parameter values 

• select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode 


How to select a parameter and change its value 





LOC 

rEF 

MENU FWD 

2. If the panel is not in the Parameter mode (“PAr” not 

visible), press key or until you see “PAr” 

and then press . The display shows the number 

of one of the parameter groups. 

3. Use keys and to find the desired 

parameter group. 

4. Press . The display shows one of the 

parameters in the selected group. 

5. Use keys and to find the desired 

parameter. 

6. Press and hold for about two seconds until the 

display shows the value of the parameter with SET 

underneath indicating that changing of the value is 

now possible. 

Note: When SET is visible, pressing keys and 

simultaneously changes the displayed value to 

the default value of the parameter. 

7. Use keys and to select the parameter 

value. When you have changed the parameter value, 

SET starts flashing. 

• To save the displayed parameter value, press 

. 

• To cancel the new value and keep the original, 

press . 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

PAr 

-01- 

MENU FWD 

PAR FWD 

-11- 

PAR FWD 

1101 

PAR FWD 

1103 

PAR FWD 

1 

PAR SET FWD 

2 

PAR SET FWD 

1103 

PAR FWD

How to select the monitored signals 


1. You can select which signals are monitored in the 

Output mode and how they are displayed with group 

34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters. See page 82 for 

detailed instructions on changing parameter values. 

By default, the display shows three signals. 

Signal 1: 0102 SPEED for macros 3-wire, Alternate, 

Motor potentiometer, Hand/Auto and PID control; 

0103 OUTPUT FREQ for macros ABB standard and 

Torque control 

Signal 2: 0104 CURRENT 

Signal 3: 0105 TORQUE. 

To change the default signals, select up to three 

signals from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be 

shown. 

Signal 1: Change the value of parameter 3401 

SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal 

parameter in group 01 OPERATING DATA 

(= number of the parameter without the leading 

zero), eg 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE. 

Value 100 means that no signal is displayed. 

Repeat for signals 2 (3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM) and 3 

(3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM). For example, if 3401 = 0 

and 3415 = 0, browsing is disabled and only the 

signal specified by 3408 appears in the display. If all 

three parameters are set to 0, ie no signals are 

selected for monitoring, the panel displays text “n.A”. 

2. Specify the decimal point location, or use the decimal 

point location and unit of the source signal (setting 9 

[DIRECT]). Bar graphs are not available for basic 

control panel. For details, see parameter 3404. 

Signal 1: parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 


Signal 3: parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM. 

3. Select the units to be displayed for the signals. This 

has no effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9 

(DIRECT). For details, see parameter 3405. 

Signal 1: parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT 


Signal 3: parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT. 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 


103 

PAR SET FWD 

104 

PAR SET FWD 

105 

PAR SET FWD 

9 

PAR SET FWD 

3 

PAR SET FWD



4. Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the 

minimum and maximum display values. This has no 

effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9 

(DIRECT). For details, see parameters 3406 and 

3407. 

Signal 1: parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 

OUTPUT1 MAX 


OUTPUT2 MAX 


OUTPUT3 MAX. 

LOC 

LOC 

00 . 

PAR SET FWD 

5000 . 

PAR SET FWD 

Hz 

Hz

� Copy mode 


The basic control panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to three user 

sets of drive parameters to the control panel. Uploading and downloading can be 

performed in local control. The control panel memory is non-volatile. 

In the Copy mode, you can do the following: 

• Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel (uL – Upload). This 

includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by the 

user) parameters such as those created by the ID run. 

• Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive (dL A – 

Download all). This writes all parameters, including the internal non-useradjustable 

motor parameters, to the drive. It does not include the user sets of 

parameters. 

Note: Only use this function to restore a drive, or to transfer parameters to 

systems that are identical to the original system. 

• Copy a partial parameter set from the control panel to a drive (dL P – Download 

partial). The partial set does not include user sets, internal motor parameters, 

parameters 9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any group 51 EXT COMM 

MODULE and 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters. 

The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same. 

• Copy user set 1 parameters from the control panel to the drive (dL u1 – Download 

user set 1). A user set includes group 99 START-UP DATA parameters and the 

internal motor parameters. 

The function is only shown on the menu when user set 1 has been first saved 

using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO (see section User macros on page 119) 

and then uploaded to panel. 


user set 2). As dL u1 – Download user set 1 above. 


user set 2). As dL u1 – Download user set 1 above. 

• Start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.


How to upload and download parameters 

For the upload and download functions available, see above. Note that the drive has 

to be in local control for uploading and downloading. 




repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom. – If 

LOC 

REM is shown on the left, press first REM to switch to 

local control. 

LOC 

PAr 

MENU FWD 

2. If the panel is not in the Copy mode (“CoPY” not 

visible), press key or until you see 

“CoPY”. 

LOC 

CoPY 

MENU FWD 

Press . 

3. To upload all parameters (including user sets) from 

the drive to the control panel, step to “uL” with keys 

and . 

Press . During the transfer, the display shows 

the transfer status as a percentage of completion. 

To perform downloads, step to the appropriate 

operation (here “dL A”, Download all, is used as an 

example) with keys and . 

Press . During the transfer, the display shows 

the transfer status as a percentage of completion. 

� Basic control panel alarm codes 

In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive (see chapter Fault tracing 

on page 335), the basic control panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of 

form A5xxx. See section Alarms generated by the basic control panel on page 341 for 

a list of the alarm codes and descriptions. 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

LOC 

uL 

MENU FWD 

uL 

MENU FWD 

uL 50 

dL A 

FWD 

MENU FWD 

dL 50 

FWD 

% 

%

Assistant control panel 

� Features 


The assistant control panel features: 

• alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display 

• language selection for the display 

• Start-up assistant to ease drive commissioning 

• copy function – parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later 

transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system. 

• context sensitive help 

• real time clock.


� Overview 

The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the assistant 

control panel 

No. Use 

1 

1 Status LED – Green for normal operation. If LED is 

2 

flashing, or red, see section LEDs on page 356. 

LCD display – Divided into three main areas: 

f. Status line – variable, depending on the mode of 

operation, see section Status line on page 89. 

g. Center – variable; in general, shows signal and 

2a 

2b 

2c 

LOC 49.1Hz 

49. 1 Hz 

0. 5 A 

10. 7 % 


parameter values, menus or lists. Shows also 

faults and alarms. 

3 

5 

4 

h. Bottom line – shows current functions of the two 7 6 

8 

3 

soft keys and, if enabled, the clock display. 

Soft key 1 – Function depends on the context. The 

text in the lower left corner of the LCD display 

indicates the function. 

9 10 

4 Soft key 2 – Function depends on the context. The text in the lower right corner of the 

LCD display indicates the function. 

5 Up – 

• Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display. 

• Increments a value if a parameter is selected. 

• Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted. 

Holding the key down changes the value faster. 

6 Down – 

• Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display. 

• Decrements a value if a parameter is selected. 

• Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted. 

Holding the key down changes the value faster. 

7 LOC/REM – Changes between local and remote control of the drive. 

8 Help – Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed. The information 

displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display. 

9 STOP – Stops the drive in local control.

Status line 


The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive. 

No. Field Alternatives Significance 

1 Control location LOC Drive control is local, that is, from the 

control panel. 

REM Drive control is remote, such as the drive 

I/O or fieldbus. 

2 State Forward shaft direction 

Reverse shaft direction 

Rotating arrow Drive is running at setpoint. 

Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint. 

Stationary arrow Drive is stopped. 

Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present, but the motor is 

not running, eg because start enable is 

3 Panel operation 

mode 

� Operation 

LOC 49.1Hz 

4 Reference value or 

number of the 

selected item 

LOC MAIN MENU 

1 2 4 1 2 3 4 

missing. 

• Name of the current mode 

• Name of the list or menu shown 

• Name of the operation state, eg PAR 

EDIT. 

• Reference value in the Output mode 

• Number of the highlighted item, eg 

mode, parameter group or fault. 

You operate the control panel with menus and keys. The keys include two contextsensitive 

soft keys, whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the 

display above each key. 

You select an option, eg operation mode or parameter, by scrolling the and 

arrow keys until the option is highlighted (in reverse video) and then pressing 

the relevant soft key. With the right soft key you usually enter a mode, accept an 

option or save the changes. The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes 

and return to the previous operation level. 

The assistant control panel has nine panel modes: Output mode, Parameter mode, 

Assistants mode, Changed parameters mode, Fault logger mode, Time and date 

mode, Parameter backup mode, I/O settings mode and Fault mode. The operation in 

the first eight modes is described in this chapter. When a fault or alarm occurs, the 

panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm. You can reset 

it in the Output or Fault mode (see chapter Fault tracing on page 335). 

1


Initially, the panel is in the Output mode, where you can 

start, stop, change the direction, switch between local and 

remote control, modify the reference value and monitor up 

to three actual values. 

To do other tasks, go first to the Main menu and select the 

appropriate mode on the menu. The status line (see 

section Status line on page 89) shows the name of the 

current menu, mode, item or state. 

How to do common tasks 

LOC 49.1Hz 

49. 1 Hz 

0. 5 A 

10. 7 % 


LOC MAIN MENU 1 

PARAMETERS 

ASSISTANTS 

CHANGED PAR 

EXIT 00:00 ENTER 

The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them and 

the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail. 

Task Mode Page 

How to get help Any 91 

How to find out the panel version At power up 91 

How to adjust the display contrast Output 94 

How to switch between local and remote control Any 92 

How to start and stop the drive Any 93 

How to change the direction of the motor rotation Output 93 

How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference Output 94 

How to change the value of a parameter Parameters 95 

How to select the monitored signals Parameters 96 

How to do guided tasks (specification of related parameter sets) 

with assistants 

Assistants 98 

How to view and edit changed parameters Changed 

parameters 

100 

How to view faults Fault logger 101 

How to reset faults and alarms Output, Fault 335 

How to show/hide the clock, change date and time formats, set the Time and date 

clock and enable/disable automatic clock transitions according to 

the daylight saving changes 

102 

How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Parameter 

backup 

105 

How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Parameter 

backup 

105 

How to view backup information Parameter 

backup 

106 

How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals I/O settings 107

How to get help 

If help text exists for the item, it is shown on the display. 

2. If the whole text is not visible, scroll the lines with keys 

and . 

How to find out the panel version 



1. Press ? to read the context-sensitive help text for the 

item that is highlighted. 

LOC PAR GROUPS 10 

01 OPERATING DATA 

03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 

04 FAULT HISTORY 

10 START/STOP/DIR 

11 REFERENCE SELECT 

EXIT 00:00 SEL 

LOC HELP 

This group defines 

external sources 

(EXT1 and EXT2) for 

commands that enable 

start, stop and 

EXIT 00:00 

LOC HELP 

external sources 

(EXT1 and EXT2) for 

commands that enable 

start, stop and 

direction changes. 

EXIT 00:00 

3. After reading the text, return to the previous display by 

EXIT 

pressing . 









1. If the power is switched on, switch it off. 

2. Keep key ? pressed down while you switch on the 

power and read the information. The display shows the 

following panel information: 

Panel SW: panel firmware version 

ROM CRC: panel ROM check sum 

Flash Rev: flash content version 

Flash content comment. 

PANEL VERSION INFO 

Panel SW: x.xx 

Rom CRC: xxxxxxxxxx 

Flash Rev: x.xx 

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 

When you release the 

Output mode. 

? key, the panel goes to the


How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control 

You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be 

able to start or stop the drive, the drive must be in local control. 


1. • To switch between remote control (REM shown on the 

status line) and local control (LOC shown on the status 

LOC 

line), press REM . 

LOC MESSAGE 

Switching to the 

local control mode. 

Note: Switching to local control can be disabled with 

parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK. 

The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in 

remote control (REM) and controlled through the drive 

I/O terminals. To switch to local control (LOC) and 

LOC 

control the drive using the control panel, press REM 

. 

00:00 

The result depends on how long you press the key: 

• If you release the key immediately (the display 

flashes “Switching to the local control mode”), the 

drive stops. Set the local control reference as 

instructed on page 94. 

• If you press the key for about two seconds, the drive 

continues as before. The drive copies the current 

remote values for the run/stop status and the 

reference, and uses them as the initial local control 

settings. 

• To stop the drive in local control, press . The arrow ( or ) on the 

status line stops rotating. 

• To start the drive in local control, press . The arrow ( or ) on the 

status line starts rotating. It 

is dotted until the drive 

reaches the setpoint.

� Output mode 


In the Output mode, you can: 

• monitor actual values of up to three signals in group 01 OPERATING DATA 

• change the direction of the motor rotation 

• set the speed, frequency or torque reference 

• adjust the display contrast 


EXIT 

You get to the Output mode by pressing repeatedly. 

The top right corner of the 

display shows the reference 

value. The center can be 

configured to show up to three 

LOC 49.1Hz 

49. 1 Hz 

0. 5 A 

10. 7 % 

0. 4 A 

24. 4 % 

signal values or bar graphs. If 

just one or two signals are 


00:00 

selected for display, the number and name of each displayed signal are shown in 

addition to the value or bar graph. See page 96 for instructions on selecting and 

modifying the monitored signals. 

How to change the direction of the motor rotation 


1. 

EXIT 

If you are not in the Output mode, press repeatedly 

until you get there. 

REM 49.1Hz 

2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status 

LOC 

line), switch to local control by pressing REM . The display 

briefly shows a message about changing the mode and 

then returns to the Output mode. 

3. To change the direction from forward ( shown on the 

status line) to reverse ( 

DIR 

vice versa, press . 

shown on the status line), or 

Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 

(REQUEST). 

LOC 5.0Hz 

Hz50% 

DIR MENU 

49. 1 Hz 

0. 5 A 

10. 7 % 


LOC 49.1Hz 

49. 1 Hz 

0. 5 A 

10. 7 % 


LOC 49.1Hz 

49. 1 Hz 

0. 5 A 

10. 7 % 

DIR 00:00 MENU


How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference 


1. 

EXIT 



REM 49.1Hz 

2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status 

LOC 

line), switch to local control by pressing REM . The display 

briefly shows a message about changing the mode and 

then returns to the Output mode. 

Note: With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT, you can 

allow the reference modification in remote control. 

3. • To increase the highlighted reference value shown in 

the top right corner of the display, press . The 

value changes immediately. It is stored in the drive 

permanent memory and restored automatically after 

power switch-off. 

• To decrease the value, press . 

How to adjust the display contrast 


1. 

EXIT 



LOC 49.1Hz 

MENU 

2. • To increase the contrast, press keys 

simultaneously. 

and 

MENU 

• To decrease the contrast, press keys and 

simultaneously. 

49. 1 Hz 

0. 5 A 

10. 7 % 


LOC 49.1Hz 

49. 1 Hz 

0. 5 A 

10. 7 % 


LOC 50.0Hz 

50. 0 Hz 

0. 5 A 

10. 7 % 


49. 1 Hz 

0. 5 A 

10. 7 % 


LOC 49.1Hz 

49. 1 Hz 

0. 5 A 

10. 7 % 

DIR 00:00 MENU

� Parameters mode 


In the Parameters mode, you can: 

• view and change parameter values 


How to select a parameter and change its value 


1. 

MENU 

Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the 

EXIT 

Output mode, otherwise by pressing repeatedly until 

you get to the Main menu. 


2. Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS 

on the menu with keys 

ENTER 

. 

and , and pressing 

3. Select the appropriate parameter group with keys 

and . 

SEL 

Press . 

4. Select the appropriate parameter with keys and 

. The current value of the parameter is shown 

below the selected parameter. 

EDIT 

Press . 

5. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys 

and . 

Pressing the key once increments or decrements the 

value. Holding the key down changes the value faster. 

Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed 

value with the default value. 

PARAMETERS 

ASSISTANTS 

CHANGED PAR 










99 START-UP DATA 






LOC PARAMETERS 

9901 LANGUAGE 

ENGLISH 


9903 MOTOR TYPE 

9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 

EXIT 00:00 EDIT 


9901 LANGUAGE 


ABB STANDARD 




LOC 

PAR EDIT 


ABB STANDARD 

[1] 


LOC 

PAR EDIT 


3-WIRE 

[2] 

CANCEL 00:00 SAVE



SAVE 

6. • To save the new value, press . 

• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press 

CANCEL 

. 

How to select the monitored signals 


1. You can select which signals are monitored in the Output 

mode and how they are displayed with group 34 PANEL 

DISPLAY parameters. See page 95 for detailed 

instructions on changing parameter values. 

LOC PAR EDIT 

3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 

By default, the display shows three signals. 

Signal 1: 0102 SPEED for macros 3-wire, Alternate, 

Motor potentiometer, Hand/Auto and PID control; 

[103] 

CANCEL 00:00 

LOC PAR EDIT 

SAVE 

0103 OUTPUT FREQ for macros ABB standard and 

Torque control 

Signal 2: 0104 CURRENT 


CURRENT 

[104] 

Signal 3: 0105 TORQUE. 


To change the default signals, select up to three signals 

from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be shown. 

Signal 1: Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 

PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in group 01 

OPERATING DATA (= number of the parameter without 

the leading zero), eg 105 means parameter 0105 

TORQUE. Value 0 means that no signal is displayed. 

Repeat for signals 2 (3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM) and 3 

(3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM). 

LOC PAR EDIT 


TORQUE 

[105] 


2. Select how you want the signals to be displayed: as a 

decimal number or a bar graph. For decimal numbers, 

you can specify the decimal point location, or use the 

decimal point location and unit of the source signal 

(setting 9 [DIRECT]). For details, see parameter 3404. 



Signal 3: parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM. 

3. Select the units to be displayed for the signals. This has 

no effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9 

(DIRECT). For details, see parameter 3405. 



Signal 3: parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT. 


9901 LANGUAGE 


3-WIRE 




OUTPUT FREQ 

LOC 

PAR EDIT 

3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 

DIRECT 

[9] 


LOC 

PAR EDIT 

3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT 

Hz 

[3] 

CANCEL 00:00 SAVE

4. Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the 

minimum and maximum display values. This has no 

effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9 (DIRECT). 

For details, see parameters 3406 and 3407. 


OUTPUT1 MAX 


OUTPUT2 MAX 


OUTPUT3 MAX. 



LOC 

PAR EDIT 

3406 OUTPUT1 MIN 

0.0 Hz 


LOC 

PAR EDIT 

3407 OUTPUT1 MAX 

500.0 Hz 

CANCEL 00:00 SAVE


� Assistants mode 

When the drive is first powered up, the Start-up assistant guides you through the 

setup of the basic parameters. The Start-up assistant is divided into assistants, each 

of which is responsible for the specification of a related parameter set, for example 

Motor set-up or PID control. The Start-up assistant activates the assistants one after 

the other. You may also use the assistants independently. For more information on 

the tasks of the assistants, see section Start-up assistant on page 121. 

In the Assistants mode, you can: 

• use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters 


How to use an assistant 

The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through 

assistants. The Motor set-up assistant is used as an example. 


1. 

MENU 


EXIT 




PARAMETERS 

ASSISTANTS 

CHANGED PAR 


2. Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on 

ENTER 

the menu keys and , and pressing . 

LOC ASSISTANTS 

Start-up assistant 

Motor Set-up 

Application 

Speed control EXT1 

Speed control EXT2 

1 


3. Select the assistant with keys and , and 

SEL 

press . 

If you select any other assistant than the Start-up 

assistant, it guides you through the task of specification 

LOC PAR EDIT 


200 V 

of its parameter set as shown in steps 4. and 5. below. 

After that you can select another assistant on the 

Assistants menu or exit the Assistants mode. The Motor 

set-up assistant is used here as an example. 


If you select the Start-up assistant, it activates the first 

assistant, which guides you through the task of 

specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4. 

and 5. below. The Start-up assistant then asks if you 

want to continue with the next assistant or skip it – select 

the appropriate answer with keys and , and 

SEL 

press . If you choose to skip, the Start-up assistant 

asks the same question about the next assistant, and so 

on. 

LOC CHOICE 


continue with 

application setup? 

Continue 

Skip 

EXIT 00:00 OK

4. • To specify a new value, press keys and . 

• To ask for information on the requested parameter, 

press key ? . Scroll the help text with keys and 

EXIT 

. Close the help by pressing . 

5. • To accept the new value and continue to the setting of 

SAVE 

the next parameter, press . 

EXIT 

• To stop the assistant, press . 



LOC 

PAR EDIT 


240 V 


LOC HELP 

Set as given on the 

motor nameplate. 

Voltage value must 

correspond to motor 

D/Y connection. 

EXIT 00:00 

LOC 

PAR EDIT 

9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 

1.2 A 

EXIT 00:00 SAVE


� Changed parameters mode 

In the Changed parameters mode, you can: 

• view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default 

values 

• change these parameters 


How to view and edit changed parameters 


1. 

MENU 


EXIT 




2. Go to the Changed parameters mode by selecting 

CHANGED PAR on the menu with keys 

ENTER 

and pressing . 

and , 

3. Select the changed parameter on the list with keys 

and . The value of the selected parameter is shown 

EDIT 

below it. Press to modify the value. 

4. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys 

and . 





SAVE 

5. • To accept the new value, press . If the new value 

is the default value, the parameter is removed from the 

list of changed parameters. 


CANCEL 

. 

PARAMETERS 

ASSISTANTS 

CHANGED PAR 


LOC CHANGED PAR 

1202 CONST SPEED 1 

10.0 Hz 





LOC 

PAR EDIT 


10.0 Hz 


LOC 

PAR EDIT 


15.0 Hz 


LOC CHANGED PAR 


15.0 Hz 




EXIT 00:00 EDIT

� Fault logger mode 


In the Fault logger mode, you can: 

• view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults (after a power off, only the three 

latest faults are kept in the memory) 

• see the details of the three latest faults (after a power off, the details of only the 

most recent fault is kept in the memory) 

• read the help text for the fault 


How to view faults 


1. 

MENU 


EXIT 




4. To show the help text, press . Scroll the help text with 

keys and . 

After reading the help, press 

previous display. 

OK 

to return to the 

PARAMETERS 

ASSISTANTS 

CHANGED PAR 


2. Go to the Fault logger mode by selecting FAULT 

LOGGER on the menu with keys and , and 

ENTER 

pressing . The display shows the fault log starting 

with the latest fault. 

LOC FAULT LOGGER 

10: PANEL LOSS 

19.03.05 13:04:57 

6: DC UNDERVOLT 

7: AI1 LOSS 

1 

The number on the row is the fault code according to 

which the causes and corrective actions are listed in 

chapter Fault tracing on page 335. 

EXIT 00:00 DETAIL 

3. To see the details of a fault, select it with keys 

DETAIL 

, and press . 

and LOC PANEL LOSS 

DI STATUS AT FLT 

00000 bin 

FAULT TIME 1 

13:04:57 

FAULT TIME 2 

EXIT 00:00 DIAG 

DIAG 

LOC DIAGNOSTICS 

Check: comm lines 

and connections, 

parameter 3002, 

parameters in groups 

10 and 11. 

EXIT 00:00 OK


� Time and date mode 

In the Time and date mode, you can: 

• show or hide the clock 

• change date and time display formats 

• set the date and time 

• enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving 

changes 


The assistant control panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock 

when the panel is not powered by the drive. 

How to show or hide the clock, change display formats, set the date and time 

and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes 


1. 

MENU 


EXIT 




2. Go to the Time and date mode by selecting TIME & 

DATE on the menu with keys 

ENTER 

pressing . 

and , and 

3. • To show (hide) the clock, select CLOCK VISIBLILITY 

SEL 

on the menu, press , select Show clock (Hide 

SEL 

clock) and press , or, if you want to return to the 

EXIT 

previous display without making changes, press . 

• To specify the date format, select DATE FORMAT on 

SEL 

the menu, press and select a suitable format. 

OK CANCEL 

Press to save or to cancel your changes. 

• To specify the time format, select TIME FORMAT on 

SEL 

the menu, press and select a suitable format. 

OK CANCEL 

Press to save or to cancel your changes. 

PARAMETERS 

ASSISTANTS 

CHANGED PAR 


LOC TIME & DATE 

CLOCK VISIBILITY 

TIME FORMAT 

DATE FORMAT 

SET TIME 

SET DATE 

1 


LOC CLOCK VISIB 1 

Show clock 

Hide clock 


LOC DATE FORMAT 1 

dd.mm.yy 

mm/dd/yy 

dd.mm.yyyy 

mm/dd/yyyy 

CANCEL 00:00 OK 

LOC TIME FORMAT 1 

24-hour 

12-hour 

CANCEL 00:00 SEL

• To set the time, select SET TIME on the menu and 

SEL 

press . Specify the hours with keys and 

OK 

, and press .Then specify the minutes. Press 

OK CANCEL 

to save or to cancel your changes. 

• To set the date, select SET DATE on the menu and 

SEL 

press . Specify the first part of the date (day or 

month depending on the selected date format) with 

OK 

keys and , and press . Repeat for the 

OK 

second part. After specifying the year, press . To 

CANCEL 

cancel your changes, press . 

• To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions 

according to the daylight saving changes, select 

SEL 

DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press . 

Pressing ? opens the help that shows the beginning 

and end dates of the period during which daylight 

saving time is used in each country or area whose 

daylight saving changes you can select to be followed. 

Scroll the help text with keys and . 

• To disable automatic clock transitions according to 

the daylight saving changes, select Off and press 

SEL 

. 

• To enable automatic clock transitions, select the 

country or area whose daylight saving changes are 

SEL 

followed and press . 

• To return to the previous display without making 

EXIT 

changes, press . 



LOC 

SET TIME 

15:41 


LOC 

SET DATE 

19.03.05 


LOC DAYLIGHT SAV 1 

Off 

EU 

US 

Australia1:NSW,Vict.. 

Australia2:Tasmania.. 


LOC HELP 

EU: 

On: Mar last Sunday 

Off: Oct last Sunday 

US: 

EXIT 00:00


� Parameter backup mode 

The Parameter backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another 

or to make a backup of the drive parameters. Uploading to the panel stores all drive 

parameters, including up to three user sets, to the assistant control panel. The full set, 

partial parameter set (application) and user sets can then be downloaded from the 

control panel to another drive or the same drive. Uploading and downloading can be 

performed in local control. 

The control panel memory is non-volatile and does not depend on the panel battery. 

In the Parameter backup mode, you can: 

• Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel (UPLOAD TO PANEL). 

This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by 

the user) parameters such as those created by the ID run. 

• View the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD 

TO PANEL (BACKUP INFO). This includes eg the type and rating of the drive 

where the backup was made. It is useful to check this information when you are 

going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to 

ensure that the drives match. 

• Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD 

FULL SET). This writes all parameters, including the internal non-user-adjustable 

motor parameters, to the drive. It does not include the user sets of parameters. 

Note: Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer 

parameters to systems that are identical to the original system. 

• Copy a partial parameter set (part of the full set) from the control panel to a drive 

(DOWNLOAD APPLICATION). The partial set does not include user sets, internal 

motor parameters, parameters 9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any group 51 

EXT COMM MODULE and 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters. 

The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same. 

• Copy user set 1 parameters from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD 

USER SET1). A user set includes group 99 START-UP DATA parameters and the 

internal motor parameters. 

The function is only shown on the menu when user set 1 has been first saved 

using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO (see section User macros on page 119) 

and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL. 


USER SET2). As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above. 


USER SET3). As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above. 

• Start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

How to upload and download parameters 


For the upload and download functions available, see above. Note that the drive has 

to be in local control for uploading and downloading. 


1. 

MENU 


EXIT 


you get to the Main menu. – If REM is shown on the 

LOC 

status line, press first REM to switch to local control. 

LOC MAIN MENU 

PARAMETERS 

ASSISTANTS 

1 

CHANGED PAR 


2. Go to the Par backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP 

on the menu with keys and , and pressing 

ENTER 

. 

LOC PAR BACKUP 1 

UPLOAD TO PANEL 

BACKUP INFO 

DOWNLOAD FULL SET 

DOWNLOAD APPLICATION 

DOWNLOAD USER SET1 


3. • To copy all parameters (including user sets and 

internal parameters) from the drive to the control 

panel, select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Par backup 

SEL 

menu with keys and , and press . 

LOC PAR BACKUP 

Copying parameters 

50% 

During the transfer, the display shows the transfer 

ABORT 

status as a percentage of completion. Press if you 

want to stop the operation. 

ABORT 00:00 

After the upload is completed, the display shows a 

OK 

message about the completion. Press to return to 

the Par backup menu. 

LOC MESSAGE 

Parameter upload 

successful 

OK 00:00 

• To perform downloads, select the appropriate 

operation (here DOWNLOAD FULL SET is used as an 

example) on the Par backup menu with keys 

SEL 

and , and press . The display shows the 

transfer status as a percentage of completion. Press 

ABORT 

if you want to stop the operation. 

LOC PAR BACKUP 

Downloading 

parameters (full 

set) 

50% 

ABORT 00:00 

After the download is completed, the display shows a 

OK 

message about the completion. Press to return to 

the Par backup menu. 

LOC MESSAGE 

Parameter download 

successfully 

completed. 

OK 00:00


How to view information about the backup 


1. 

MENU 


EXIT 




2. Go to the Par backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP 


ENTER 

. 


PARAMETERS 

ASSISTANTS 

CHANGED PAR 




BACKUP INFO 





3. Select BACKUP INFO on the Par backup menu with keys 

SEL 

and , and press . The display shows the 

following information about the drive where the backup 

was made: 

DRIVE TYPE: type of the drive 

DRIVE RATING: rating of the drive in format XXXYZ, 

where 

XXX: Nominal current rating. If 

present, an “A” indicates a decimal 

point, eg 9A7 means 9.7 A. 

Y: 2 = 200 V 

4 = 400 V 

LOC BACKUP INFO 

DRIVE TYPE 


3304 DRIVE RATING 

9A74i 

3301 FIRMWARE 

EXIT 00:00 

LOC BACKUP INFO 


3304 DRIVE RATING 

9A74i 

3301 FIRMWARE 

241A hex 

EXIT 00:00 

Z: i = European loading package 

n = US loading package 

FIRMWARE: firmware version of the drive. 

You can scroll the information with keys and . 

4. 

EXIT 

Press to return to the Par backup menu. 



BACKUP INFO 




EXIT 00:00 SEL

� I/O settings mode 


In the I/O settings mode, you can: 

• check the parameter settings related to any I/O terminal 

• edit the parameter setting. For example, if “1103: REF1” is listed under Ain1 

(Analog input 1), that is, parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT has value AI1, you can 

change its value to eg AI2. You cannot, however, set the value of parameter 1106 

REF2 SELECT to AI1. 


How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals 


1. 

MENU 


EXIT 




2. Go to the I/O settings mode by selecting I/O SETTINGS 


ENTER 

. 


3. Select the I/O group, eg DIGITAL INPUTS, with keys 

and , and press . After a brief pause, the 

display shows the current settings for the selection. 

SEL -DI1- 

4. Select the setting (line with a parameter number) with 

EDIT LOC PAR EDIT 

keys and , and press . 

1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 

5. Specify a new value for the setting with keys 

. 

and 

6. 





SAVE 

• To save the new value, press . 


CANCEL 

. 

PARAMETERS 

ASSISTANTS 

CHANGED PAR 


LOC I/O SETTINGS 1 

DIGITAL INPUTS (DI) 

ANALOG INPUTS (AI) 

RELAY OUTPUTS (ROUT) 

ANALOG OUTPUTS (AOUT) 

PANEL 


LOC I/O SETTINGS 

1001:START/STOP (E1) 

-DI2- 

1001:DIR (E1) 

-DI3- 

EXIT 00:00 

DI1,2 

[2] 


LOC 

PAR EDIT 


DI1P,2P 

[3] 


LOC I/O SETTINGS 

-DI1- 

1001:START PLS(E1) 

-DI2- 

1001:STOP PLS (E1) 

-DI3- 

EXIT 00:00

108 Control panels

Application macros 


Application macros 109 

The chapter describes the application macros. For each macro, there is a wiring 

diagram showing the default control connections (digital and analog I/O). The chapter 

also explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it. 

Overview of macros 

Application macros are pre-programmed parameter sets. While starting up the drive, 

the user typically selects one of the macros - the one that is best suited for the 

purpose - with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO, makes the essential changes and 

saves the result as a user macro. 

The ACS355 has seven standard macros and three user macros. The table below 

contains a summary of the macros and describes suitable applications. 

Macro Suitable applications 

ABB standard Ordinary speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant 

speeds are used. Start/stop is controlled with one digital input (level start 

and stop). It is possible to switch between two acceleration and 

deceleration times. 

3-wire Ordinary speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant 

speeds are used. The drive is started and stopped with push buttons. 

Alternate Speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant speeds 

are used. Start, stop and direction are controlled by two digital inputs 

(combination of the input states determines the operation). 

Motor 

potentiometer 

Speed control applications where no or one constant speed is used. The 

speed is controlled by two digital inputs (increase / decrease / keep 

unchanged).

110 Application macros 

Macro Suitable applications 

Hand/Auto Speed control applications where switching between two control devices is 

needed. Some control signal terminals are reserved for one device, the 

rest for the other. One digital input selects between the terminals (devices) 

in use. 

PID control Process control applications, for example different closed loop control 

systems such as pressure control, level control and flow control. It is 

possible to switch between process and speed control: Some control 

signal terminals are reserved for process control, others for speed control. 

One digital input selects between process and speed control. 

Torque control Torque control applications. It is possible to switch between torque and 

speed control: Some control signal terminals are reserved for torque 

control, others for speed control. One digital input selects between torque 

and speed control. 

User The user can save the customized standard macro, ie the parameter 

settings including group 99 START-UP DATA, and the results of the motor 

identification run into the permanent memory, and recall the data at a later 

time. 

For example, three user macros can be used when switching between 

three different motors is required.


Summary of the I/O connections of the application macros 

The following table gives the summary of the default I/O connections of all application 

macros. 

Input/ 

output 

AI1 

(0…10 V) 

AI2 

(0…20 mA) 

ABB 

standard 

Macro 

3-wire Alternate Motor 

potentiom. 

Hand/Auto PID 

control 

Freq. ref. Speed ref. Speed ref. - Speed ref. 

(Hand) 

- - - - Speed ref. 

(Auto) 

AO Output 

freq. 

DI1 Stop/Start Start 

(pulse) 

DI2 Fwd/Rev Stop 

(pulse) 

DI3 Const. 

speed 

input 1 

DI4 Const. 

speed 

input 2 

DI5 Ramp pair 

selection 

Speed ref. 

(Hand) / 

Proc. ref. 

(PID) 

Process 

value 

Torque 

control 

Speed ref. 

(Speed) 

Torque 

ref. 

(Torque) 

Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed 

Fwd/Rev Const. 

speed 

input 1 

Const. 

speed 

input 1 

Const. 

speed 

input 2 

Start (fwd) Stop/Start Stop/Start 

(Hand) 

Start (rev) Fwd/Rev Fwd/Rev 

(Hand) 

Const. 

speed 

input 2 

Ramp pair 

selection 

Speed ref. 

up 

Speed ref. 

down 

Const. 

speed 1 

Stop/Start 

(Hand) 

Hand/Auto Const. 

speed 1 

Fwd/Rev 

(Auto) 

Stop/Start 

(Auto) 

Stop/Start 

(Speed) 

Hand/PID Fwd/Rev 

Run 

enable 

Stop/Start 

(PID) 

Speed/ 

Torque 

Const. 

speed 1 

Ramp pair 

selection 

RO Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) 

DO Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1)


ABB standard macro 

This is the default macro. It provides a general purpose I/O configuration with three 

constant speeds. Parameter values are the default values given in section 

Parameters on page 185. 

If you use other than the default connections presented below, see section I/O 

terminals on page 51. 

� Default I/O connections 

1…10 kohm 

max. 500 ohm 

1) AI1 is used as a speed reference if vector 

mode is selected. 

2) 

See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 

SPEEDS: 



1 0 Speed 1 (1202) 

0 1 Speed 2 (1203) 

1 1 Speed 3 (1204) 

4) 

X1A 


2 AI1 Output frequency reference: 0…10 V 1) 





7 AO Output frequency value: 0…20 mA 





12 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) 





X1B 


18 RONC 


19 RONO 


21 DOOUT 


22 DOGND 


2202 and 2203. 


2205 and 2206. 

4) 

360 degree grounding under a clamp. 

Tightening torque = 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf·in. 

Safe torque off connections (X1C:STO; not 

shown in the diagram) are jumpered by default.

3-wire macro 


This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push-buttons. It 

provides three constant speeds. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 

9902 APPLIC MACRO to 2 (3-WIRE). 

For the parameter default values, see section Default values with different macros on 

page 176. If you use other than the default connections presented below, see section 

I/O terminals on page 51. 

Note: When the stop input (DI2) is deactivated (no input), the control panel start and 

stop buttons are disabled. 


1…10 kohm 

max. 500 ohm 

1) See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 

SPEEDS: 



1 0 Speed 1 (1202) 

0 1 Speed 2 (1203) 

1 1 Speed 3 (1204) 

2) 

X1A 


2 AI1 Motor speed reference: 0…10 V 





7 AO Motor speed value: 0…20 mA 





12 DI1 Start (pulse ) 

13 DI2 Stop (pulse ) 




X1B 


18 RONC 


19 RONO 


21 DOOUT 


22 DOGND 

2) 360 degree grounding under a clamp. 





Alternate macro 

This macro provides an I/O configuration adapted to a sequence of DI control signals 

used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor. To enable the macro, set the 

value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 3 (ALTERNATE). 





1…10 kohm 

max. 500 ohm 

1) See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 

SPEEDS: 



1 0 Speed 1 (1202) 

0 1 Speed 2 (1203) 

1 1 Speed 3 (1204) 

3) 

X1A 


2 AI1 Motor speed reference: 0…10 V 










12 DI1 Start forward: If DI1 = DI2, the drive stops. 

13 DI2 Start reverse 




X1B 


18 RONC 


19 RONO 


21 DOOUT 


22 DOGND 


2202 and 2203. 


2205 and 2206. 





Motor potentiometer macro 


This macro provides a cost-effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the 

motor using only digital signals. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902 

APPLIC MACRO to 4 (MOTOR POT). 





max. 500 ohm 

1) If DI3 and DI4 are both active or inactive, the 

speed reference is unchanged. 

The existing speed reference is stored 

during stop and power down. 

2) 

X1A 












12 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) 


14 DI3 Speed reference up 1) 

15 DI4 Speed reference down 1) 

16 DI5 

X1B 

Constant speed 1: parameter 1202 


18 RONC 

19 RONO 



21 DOOUT 

22 DOGND 







Hand/Auto macro 

This macro can be used when switching between two external control devices is 

needed. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 

5(HAND/AUTO). 




Note: Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 (OFF). 


1…10 kohm 

max. 500 ohm 


2) The signal source is powered externally. See 

the manufacturer’s instructions. To use 

sensors supplied by the drive aux. voltage 

output, see page 53. 

1) 

X1A 


2 AI1 Motor speed reference (Hand): 0…10 V 



5 AI2 Motor speed reference (Auto): 0…20 mA 2) 







12 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) (Hand) 

13 DI2 Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (Hand) 

14 DI3 Hand (0) / Auto (1) control selection 

15 DI4 Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (Auto) 

16 DI5 

X1B 

Stop (0) / Start (1) (Auto) 


18 RONC 

19 RONO 



21 DOOUT 

22 DOGND 





PID control macro 


This macro provides parameter settings for closed-loop control systems such as 

pressure control, flow control, etc. Control can also be switched to speed control 

using a digital input. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC 

MACRO to 6 (PID CONTROL). 




Note: Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 (OFF). 


1…10 kohm 

max. 500 ohm 

1) Hand: 0…10 V -> speed reference. 

PID: 0…10 V -> 0…100% PID setpoint. 




2) 

X1A 


2 AI1 Motor speed ref. (Hand) / Proc. ref. (PID): 0…10 V 1) 



5 AI2 Process actual value: 4…20 mA 3) 







12 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) (Hand) 

13 DI2 Hand (0) / PID (1) control selection 

14 DI3 Constant speed 1: parameter 1202 

15 DI4 Run enable 

16 DI5 

X1B 

Stop (0) / Start (1) (PID) 


18 RONC 

19 RONO 



21 DOOUT 

22 DOGND 








Torque control macro 

This macro provides parameter settings for applications that require torque control of 

the motor. Control can also be switched to speed control using a digital input. To 

enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 8 (TORQUE 

CTRL). 





1…10 kohm 

max. 500 ohm 

1) Speed control: Changes rotation direction. 

Torque control: Changes torque direction. 


2202 and 2203. 


2205 and 2206. 


3) 

X1A 


2 AI1 Motor speed reference (Speed): 0…10 V 



5 AI2 Motor torque reference (Torque): 4…20 mA 4) 







12 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) (Speed) 

13 DI2 Forward (0) / Reverse (1) 1) 

14 DI3 Speed (0) / Torque (1) control selection 

15 DI4 Constant speed 1: parameter 1202 


X1B 


18 RONC 


19 RONO 


21 DOOUT 


22 DOGND 








User macros 


In addition to the standard application macros, it is possible to create three user 

macros. The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings, including 

group 99 START-UP DATA, and the results of the motor identification into the 

permanent memory and recall the data at a later time. The panel reference is also 

saved if the macro is saved and loaded in local control. The remote control setting is 

saved into the user macro, but the local control setting is not. 

The steps below show how to create and recall User macro 1. The procedure for the 

other two macros is identical, only the parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO values are 

different. 

To create User macro 1: 

• Adjust the parameters. Perform the motor identification if it is needed in the 

application but it is not done yet. 

• Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification to the 

permanent memory by changing parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to -1 (USER 

S1 SAVE). 

MENU 

SAVE ENTER 

• Press (assistant control panel) or (basic control panel) to save. 

To recall User macro 1: 

• Change parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 0 (USER S1 LOAD). 

MENU 

SAVE ENTER 

• Press (assistant control panel) or (basic control panel) to load. 

The user macro can also be switched through digital inputs (see parameter 1605 

USER PAR SET CHG). 

Note: User macro load restores the parameter settings, including group 99 START- 

UP DATA and the results of the motor identification. Check that the settings 

correspond to the motor used. 

Hint: The user can for example switch the drive between three motors without having 

to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the 

motor is changed. The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor 

identification once for each motor and then to save the data as three user macros. 

When the motor is changed, only the corresponding user macro needs to be loaded, 

and the drive is ready to operate.

120 Application macros

Program features 


Program features 121 

The chapter describes program features. For each feature, there is a list of related 

user settings, actual signals, and fault and alarm messages. 

Start-up assistant 

� Introduction 

The Start-up assistant (requires the assistant control panel) guides the user through 

the start-up procedure, helping to enter the requested data (parameter values) to the 

drive. The Start-up assistant also checks that the entered values are valid, ie within 

the allowed range. 

The Start-up assistant calls other assistants, each of which guides the user through 

the task of specifying a related parameter set. At the first start, the drive suggests 

entering the first task, Language select, automatically. The user may activate the 

tasks either one after the other as the Start-up assistant suggests, or independently. 

The user may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using 

the assistant at all. 

See section Assistants mode on page 98 for how to start the Start-up assistant or 

other assistants.

122 Program features 

� Default order of the tasks 

Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 9902 APPLIC 

MACRO), the Start-up assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests. The 

default tasks are shown in the table below. 

Application selection Default tasks 

ABB STANDARD Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed 

control EXT1, Speed control EXT2, Start/Stop control, Timed 

functions, Protections, Output signals 

3-WIRE Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed 



ALTERNATE Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed 



MOTOR POT Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed 



HAND/AUTO Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed 



PID CONTROL Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, PID 

control, Speed control EXT2, Start/Stop control, Timed functions, 

Protections, Output signals 

TORQUE CTRL Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed 

control EXT2, Start/Stop control, Timed functions, Protections, 

Output signals

� List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters 


Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 9902 APPLIC 

MACRO), the Start-up assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests. 

Name Description Set parameters 

Language select Selecting the language 9901 

Motor set-up Setting the motor data 

9904…9909 

Performing the motor identification. (If the 

speed limits are not in the allowed range: 

Setting the limits.) 

9910 

Application Selecting the application macro 9902, parameters 

associated to the macro 

Option modules Activating the option modules Group 35 MOTOR TEMP 

MEAS, group 52 PANEL 

COMM 

9802 

Speed control EXT1 Selecting the source for the speed 

reference 

1103 

(If AI1 is used: Setting analog input AI1 

limits, scale, inversion) 

(1301…1303, 3001) 

Setting the reference limits 1104, 1105 

Setting the speed (frequency) limits 2001, 2002 (2007, 2008) 

Setting the acceleration and deceleration 

times 

2202, 2203 

Speed control EXT2 Selecting the source for the speed 

reference 

1106 



(1301…1303, 3001) 


Torque control Selecting the source for the torque 

reference 

1106 



(1301…1303, 3001) 


Setting the torque ramp up and ramp down 2401, 2402 

times 

PID control Selecting the source for the process 

reference 

1106 



(1301…1303, 3001) 


Setting the speed (frequency) limits 2001, 2002 (2007, 2008) 

Setting the source and limits for the 

process actual value 

4016, 4018, 4019


Name Description Set parameters 

Start/Stop control Selecting the source for start and stop 

signals of the two external control 

locations, EXT1 and EXT2 

1001, 1002 

Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 1102 

Defining the direction control 1003 

Defining the start and stop modes 2101…2103 

Selecting the use of Run enable signal 1601 

Protections Setting the current and torque limits 2003, 2017 

Output signals Selecting the signals indicated through Group 14 RELAY 

relay output RO1 and, if MREL-01 relay 

output extension module is in use, 

RO2…RO4. 

OUTPUTS 

Selecting the signals indicated through 

analog output AO 

Setting the minimum, maximum, scaling 

and inversion 

� Contents of the assistant displays 

Group 15 ANALOG 

OUTPUTS 

Timed functions Setting the timed functions 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 

Selecting the timed start/stop control for 

external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 

1001, 1002 

Selecting timed EXT1/EXT2 control 1102 

Activation of timed constant speed 1 1201 

Selecting timed function status indicated 

through relay output RO1 or, if MREL-01 

relay output extension module is in use, 

RO2…RO4. 

1401…1403, 1410 

Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1/2 

control 

4027 

There are two types of displays in the Start-up assistant: Main displays and 

information displays. The main displays prompt the user to feed in information. The 

assistant steps through the main displays. The information displays contain help texts 

for the main displays. The figure below shows a typical example of both and 

explanations of the contents. 

1 

2 

Main display Information display 

REM PAR EDIT 


220 V 

LOC HELP 

Set exactly as given 

on the motor 

nameplate 

If connected to 

multiple motors 


EXIT 00:00 

1 Parameter Help text … 

2 Feed-in field … help text continued

Local control vs. external control 


The drive can receive start, stop and direction commands and reference values from 

the control panel or through digital and analog inputs. Embedded fieldbus or an 

optional fieldbus adapter enables control over an open fieldbus link. A PC equipped 

with the DriveWindow Light 2 PC tool can also control the drive. 

Local control 

Control panel 

or 

PC tool 

� Local control 

Panel 

connection (X2) 

Drive 

Panel 


or 

FBMA adapter 

connected to X3 



External control 

Embedded 

fieldbus 

(Modbus*) 

Fieldbus 

adapter 

Standard I/O 

Potentiometer 

* With SREA-01 Ethernet adapter module it is possible to use Modbus TCP/IP with the 

Ethernet. For more information, see SREA-01 Ethernet adapter module user’s manual 

(3AUA0000042896 [English]). 

The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in 

local control. LOC indicates local control on the panel display. 

Assistant control panel Basic control panel 

LOC 49.1Hz 

49. 1 Hz 

0. 5 A 

10. 7 % 


The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in 

local control. 

LOC 

491 . 

OUTPUT FWD 

Hz


� External control 

When the drive is in external (remote) control, the commands are given through the 

standard I/O terminals (digital and analog inputs) and/or the fieldbus interface. In 

addition, it is also possible to set the control panel as the source for the external 

control. 

External control is indicated with REM on the panel display. 

The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations, EXT1 or 

EXT2. Depending on the user selection, either one is active at a time. This function 

operates on a 2 ms time level. 

� Settings 

Panel key Additional information 

LOC/REM 

Parameter 

Selection between local and external (remote) control 

1102 Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 

1001/1002 Start, stop, direction source for EXT1/EXT2 

1103/1106 Reference source for EXT1/EXT2 

� Diagnostics 

Assistant control panel Basic control panel 

REM 49.1Hz 

49. 1 Hz 

0. 5 A 

10. 7 % 


Actual signal Additional information 

0111/0112 EXT1/EXT2 reference 

491 . 

REM Hz 

OUTPUT FWD

� Block diagram: Start, stop, direction source for EXT1 


The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start, stop, and 

direction for external control location EXT1. 

DI1 

DI5 

Embedded fieldbus 


Control panel 

Timed function 

Timer/Counter 

Sequence 

programming 

Fieldbus selection 

See chapters 

Fieldbus control with 

embedded fieldbus 

on page 301 and 


fieldbus adapter on 

page 325. 

COMM 

KEYPAD 

TIMED FUNC 1…4 

� Block diagram: Reference source for EXT1 

Select 

1001 

The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed 

reference of external control location EXT1. 

AI1 

AI2 

DI3 

DI4 

DI5 




Control panel 

Sequence 

programming 

Fieldbus selection 

See chapters 



on page 301 and 


fieldbus adapter on 

page 325. 

DI1 

DI5 

START/STOP 

SEQ PROG 

AI1, AI2, DI3, DI4, DI5 

COMM 

FREQ INPUT 

KEYPAD 

SEQ PROG 

Select 

1103 

EXT1 

Start/stop/ 

direction 

EXT1 

Reference 

REF1 

(Hz/rpm)


Reference types and processing 

The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analog 

input and control panel signals. 

• The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs: One digital input 

increases the speed, the other decreases it. 

• The drive can form a reference out of two analog input signals by using 

mathematical functions: addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. 

• The drive can form a reference out of an analog input signal and a signal received 

through a serial communication interface by using mathematical functions: 

addition and multiplication. 

• The drive reference can be given with frequency input. 

• In external control location EXT1/2, the drive can form a reference out of an 

analog input signal and a signal received through Sequence programming by 

using a mathematical function: addition. 

It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and 

maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum 

speed limits. 

� Settings 

Parameter Additional information 

Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT External reference source, type and scaling 

Group 20 LIMITS Operating limits 

Group 22 ACCEL/DECEL Speed reference acceleration/deceleration ramps 

Group 24 TORQUE CONTROL Torque reference ramp times 

Group 32 SUPERVISION Reference supervision 



0111/0112 REF1/REF2 reference 

Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS References in different stages of the reference 

processing chain

Reference trimming 


In reference trimming, the external reference is corrected depending on the 

measured value of a secondary application variable. The block diagram below 

illustrates the function. 

1105 REF1 MAX / 

1108 REF2 MAX 2) 

max. 

freq 

max. 

speed 

PID2 ref 

PID2 act 

Switch 

9904 

MOTOR CTRL 

MODE 

max. 

torque 

� Settings 

PID2 

Switch 

4233 

TRIM 

SELECTION 1) 

PID2 

output 

Switch 3) 

Switch 

REF1 

(Hz/rpm) / 

REF2 (%) 1) 

4232 CORRECTION SRC 


1102 REF1/2 selection 

4230 …4232 Trimming function settings 

4201 …4229 PID control settings 

Group 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits 

0 

Select 

2 (DIRECT) 

1 

(PROPORTION 

AL) 

0 (NOT SEL) 

REF1 (Hz/rpm) / 

REF2 (%) 

Mul. 

1) 

Mul. 

REF1 (Hz/rpm) / REF2 (%) = Drive reference before trimming 

REF’ = Drive reference after trimming 

max. speed = par. 2002 (or 2001 if the absolute value is greater) 

max. freq = par. 2008 (or 2007 if the absolute value is greater) 

max. torque = par. 2014 (or 2013 if the absolute value is greater) 

PID2 ref = par. 4210 

PID2 act = par. 4214…4221 

1) Note: Torque reference trimming is only for external reference REF2 (%) 

2) REF1 or REF2 depending on which is active. See parameter 1102. 

3) When par. 4232 = PID2REF, the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter 

1105 when REF1 is active and by parameter 1108 when REF2 is active. 

When par. 4232 = PID2OUTPUT, the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter 

2002 if parameter 9904 value is VECTOR: SPEED or VECTOR: TORQ and by parameter 

2008 value if parameter 9904 value is SCALAR: FREQ. 

4230 

4231 TRIM SCALE 

Add 

REF’


� Example 

The drive runs a conveyor line. It is speed controlled but the line tension also needs 

to be taken into account: If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint, the 

speed will be slightly decreased, and vice versa. 

To accomplish the desired speed correction, the user 

• activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the 

measured tension to it. 

• tunes the trimming to a suitable level. 

Speed controlled conveyor line 

Simplified block diagram 

Speed reference 

Tension 

measurement 

Tension 

setpoint 

Programmable analog inputs 

The drive has two programmable analog voltage/current inputs. The inputs can be 

inverted, filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted. The update 

cycle for the analog input is 8 ms (12 ms cycle once per second). The cycle time is 

shorter when information is transferred to the application program (8 ms -> 2 ms). 

� Settings 

PID 

Tension measurement 


Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT AI as reference source 

Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input processing 

3001, 3021, 3022, 3107 AI loss supervision 

Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS AI in motor temperature measurement 

Groups 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 AI as PID process control reference or actual value 

…42 EXT / TRIM PID 

source 

Add 

Drive rollers (pull) 

Trimmed speed 

reference


8420, 8425, 8426 

8430, 8435, 8436 

… 

8490, 8495, 8496 


Programmable analog output 


One programmable current output (0…20 mA) is available. Analog output signal can 

be inverted, filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted. The 

analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed, output frequency, output 

current, motor torque, motor power, etc. The update cycle for the analog output is 

2ms. 

Analog output can be controlled with Sequence programming. It is also possible to 

write a value to an analog output through a serial communication link. 

� Settings 


AI as Sequence programming reference or trigger 

signal 


0120, 0121 Analog input values 

1401 AI1/A2 signal loss through RO 1 

1402/1403/1410 AI1/A2 signal loss through RO 2…4. With option 

MREL-01 only. 

Alarm 

AI1 LOSS / AI2 LOSS AI1/AI2 signal below limit 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT / 

3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT 

Fault 

AI1 LOSS / AI2 LOSS AI1/AI2 signal below limit 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT / 

3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT 

PAR AI SCALE Incorrect AI signal scaling (1302 < 1301 or 1305 < 

1304) 


Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS AO value selection and processing 

Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS AO in motor temperature measurement 

8423/8433/…/8493 AO control with Sequence programming 


0124 AO value 

0170 

Fault 

AO control values defined by Sequence programming



PAR AO SCALE Incorrect AO signal scaling (1503 < 1502) 

Programmable digital inputs 

The drive has five programmable digital inputs. The update time for the digital inputs 

is 2 ms. 

One digital input (DI5) can be programmed as a frequency input. See section 

Frequency input on page 133. 

� Settings 


Group 10 START/STOP/DIR DI as start, stop, direction 

Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT DI in reference selection, or reference source 

Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS DI in constant speed selection 

Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS DI as external Run enable, fault reset or user macro 

change signal 

Group 19 TIMER & COUNTER DI as timer or counter control signal source 

2013, 2014 DI as torque limit source 

2109 DI as external emergency stop command source 

2201 DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection 

signal 

2209 DI as zero ramp force signal 

3003 DI as external fault source 

Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS DI in motor temperature measurement 

3601 DI as timed function enable signal source 

3622 DI as booster activation signal source 

4010/4110/4210 DI as PID controller reference signal source 

4022/4122 DI as sleep function activation signal in PID1 

4027 DI as PID1 parameter set 1/2 selection signal source 

4228 DI as external PID2 function activation signal source 

Group 84 SEQUENCE PROG DI as Sequence programming control signal source 



0160 DI status 

0414 DI status at the time the latest fault occurred

Programmable relay output 


The drive has one programmable relay output. It is possible to add three additional 

relay outputs with the optional MREL-01 relay output extension module. For more 

information, see MREL-01 relay output extension module user's manual 

(3AUA0000035974 [English]). 

With a parameter setting it is possible to choose what information to indicate through 

the relay output: Ready, running, fault, alarm, etc. The update time for the relay 

output is 2 ms. 

A value can be written to a relay output through a serial communication link. 

� Settings 


Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS RO value selections and operation times 

8423 RO control with Sequence programming 



0134 RO Control word through fieldbus control 

0162 RO 1 status 

0173 RO 2…4 status. With option MREL-01 only. 


Digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input. Frequency input 

(0…16000 Hz) can be used as the external reference signal source. The update time 

for the frequency input is 50 ms. Update time is shorter when information is 

transferred to the application program (50 ms -> 2 ms). 

� Settings 


Group 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT Frequency input minimum and maximum values and 

filtering 

1103/1106 External reference REF1/2 through frequency input 

4010, 4110, 4210 Frequency input as PID reference source 



0161 Frequency input value


Transistor output 

The drive has one programmable transistor output. The output can be used either as 

a digital output or frequency output (0…16000 Hz). The update time for the 

transistor/frequency output is 2 ms. 

� Settings 


Group 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT Transistor output settings 

8423 Transistor output control with Sequence programming 



0163 Transistor output status 

0164 Transistor output frequency 

Actual signals 

Several actual signals are available: 

• Drive output frequency, current, voltage and power 

• Motor speed and torque 

• Intermediate circuit DC voltage 

• Active control location (LOCAL, EXT1 or EXT2) 

• Reference values 

• Drive temperature 

• Operating time counter (h), kWh counter 

• Digital I/O and analog I/O status 

• PID controller actual values. 

Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the assistant control panel display 

(one signal on the basic control panel display). It is also possible to read the values 

through the serial communication link or through the analog outputs. 

� Settings 


1501 Selection of an actual signal to AO 

1808 Selection of an actual signal to frequency output 

Group 32 SUPERVISION Actual signal supervision 

Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of an actual signals to be displayed on the 

control panel



Groups 01 OPERATING DATA … 


Lists of actual signals 

Motor identification 


The performance of vector control is based on an accurate motor model determined 

during the motor start-up. 

A motor Identification magnetization is automatically performed the first time the start 

command is given. During this first start-up, the motor is magnetized at zero speed 

for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created. This identification method 

is suitable for most applications. 

In demanding applications a separate Identification run (ID run) can be performed. 

� Settings 

Parameter 9910 ID RUN


Power loss ride-through 

If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilizing 

the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as 

the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue the 

operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed. 

TM fout (N·m) (Hz) 

160 

120 

80 

40 

80 

60 

40 

20 

� Settings 

Parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 

DC magnetizing 

When DC magnetizing is activated, the drive automatically magnetizes the motor 

before starting. This feature guarantees the highest possible break-away torque, up 

to 180% of the motor nominal torque. By adjusting the premagnetizing time, it is 

possible to synchronize the motor start and eg a mechanical brake release. The 

Automatic start feature and DC magnetizing cannot be activated at the same time. 

� Settings 

U DC 

(Vdc) 

520 

390 

260 

130 

0 0 0 

1.6 4.8 8 11.2 14.4 

U DC = Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, f out = Output frequency of the drive, 

T M = Motor torque 

Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (f out = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage 

drops to the minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the input 

power is switched off. The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but 

the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy. 

Parameters 2101 START FUNCTION and 2103 DC MAGN TIME 

U input power 

U DC 

f out 

T M 

t (s)

Maintenance trigger 


A maintenance trigger can be activated to show a notice on the panel display when 

eg drive power consumption has exceeded the defined trigger point. 

� Settings 

Parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 

DC hold 

With the motor DC hold feature, it is possible 

to lock the rotor at zero speed. When both the 

reference and the motor speed fall below the 

preset DC hold speed, the drive stops the 

motor and starts to inject DC into the motor. 

When the reference speed again exceeds the 

DC hold speed, the normal drive operation 

resumes. 

� Settings 

Parameters 2101…2106 

Speed compensated stop 

Speed compensation stop is available eg for 

applications where a conveyer needs to travel 

a certain distance after receiving the stop 

command. At maximum speed, the motor is 

stopped normally along the defined 

deceleration ramp. Below maximum speed, 

stop is delayed by running the drive at current 

speed before the motor is ramped to a stop. 

As shown in the figure, the distance travelled 

after the stop command is the same in both 

cases, ie area A equals area B. 

Speed compensation can be restricted to forward or reverse rotating direction. 

� Settings 

Parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION 

Motor speed 

DC hold 

speed 


DC hold 

speed 

Max. 

speed 

Used 

speed 

Motor speed 

DC hold 

Stop command 

t (s) 

t (s) 

area A = area B 

A 

B 

t (s)


Flux braking 

The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the 

motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during 

braking can be converted to motor thermal energy. 

Motor speed 

Flux braking 

Braking torque (%) 

100 

80 

60 

40 

20 

0 

100 

80 

60 

40 

20 

0 

3 

3 

2 

2 

No Flux braking 

1 

1 

TBr TN 60 

40 

(%) 

T Br = Braking torque 

T N = 100 N·m 

Flux braking 

20 


t (s) f (Hz) 

50 Hz / 60 Hz 

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 

Braking torque (%) 

Flux braking 


0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 

Rated 

motor power 

1 

2 

3 

f (Hz) 

f (Hz) 

7.5 kW 

2.2 kW 

0.37 kW


The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during the Flux braking. 

Therefore, Flux braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the 

speed. The other benefits of Flux braking are: 

• The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does 

not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking. 

• The cooling of the motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor increases 

during the Flux braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more 

efficiently than the rotor. 

� Settings 

Parameter 2602 FLUX BRAKING 

Flux optimization 

Flux optimization reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when 

the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and the drive) 

can be improved by 1% to 10%, depending on the load torque and speed. 

� Settings 

Parameter 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE 

Acceleration and deceleration ramps 

Two user-selectable acceleration and 

deceleration ramps are available. It is possible to 

adjust the acceleration/deceleration times and 

the ramp shape. Switching between the two 

ramps can be controlled through a digital input or 

fieldbus. 

The available ramp shape alternatives are 

Linear and S-curve. 

Linear shape is suitable for drives requiring 

steady or slow acceleration/deceleration. 

S-curve shape is ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications 

where a smooth transition is required when changing the speed. 

� Settings 

Parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL 

Motor speed 

Linear 

S-curve 

Sequence programming offers eight additional ramp times. See section Sequence 

programming on page 166. 

2 

t (s)


Critical speeds 

Critical speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid 

certain motor speeds or speed bands because of eg mechanical resonance 

problems. The user can define three critical speeds or speed bands. 

� Settings 

Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS 

Constant speeds 

It is possible to define seven positive constant speeds. Constant speeds are selected 

with digital inputs. Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference. 

Constant speed selections are ignored if 

• torque control is active, or 

• PID reference is being followed, or 

• drive is in local control mode. 

This function operates on a 2 ms time level. 

� Settings 


Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Constant speed settings 

1207 Constant speed 6. Used also for jogging function. See 

section Jogging on page 161. 

1208 Constant speed 7. Used also for fault functions (see group 

30 FAULT FUNCTIONS) and for jogging function (see 

section Jogging on page 161).

Custom U/f ratio 


The user can define a U/f curve (output voltage as a function of frequency). This 

custom ratio is used only in special applications where linear and squared U/f ratio 

are not sufficient (eg when motor break-away torque needs to be boosted). 

Voltage (V) 

Par. 2618 

Par. 2616 

Par. 2614 

Par. 2612 

Par. 2610 

Par. 2603 

Note: The U/f curve can be used in scalar control only, ie when 9904 MOTOR CTRL 

MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ. 

Note: The voltage and the frequency points of the U/f curve must fulfill the following 

requirements: 

2610 < 2612 < 2614 < 2616 < 2618 and 

2611 < 2613 < 2615 < 2617 < 9907 

WARNING! High voltage at low frequencies may result in poor performance or 

motor damage (overheating). 

� Settings 


2605 Custom U/f ratio activation 

2610…2618 Custom U/f ratio settings 


Custom U/f ratio 

f (Hz) 

Par. 2611 Par. 2613 Par. 2615 Par. 2617 Par. 9907 

Fault Additional information 

PAR CUSTOM U/F Incorrect U/f ratio


Speed controller tuning 

It is possible to manually adjust the controller gain, integration time and derivation 

time, or let the drive perform a separate speed controller Autotune run (parameter 

2305 AUTOTUNE RUN). In Autotune run, the speed controller is tuned based on the 

load and inertia of the motor and the machine. The figure below shows speed 

responses at a speed reference step (typically, 1 to 20%). 

n 

n N 

(%) 

t 

A: Undercompensated 

B: Normally tuned (autotuning) 

C: Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B 

The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller 

output is the reference for the torque controller. 

Speed 

reference 

Note: The speed controller can be used in vector control, ie when 9904 MOTOR 

CTRL MODE setting is VECTOR: SPEED or VECTOR: TORQ. 

� Settings 

A 

+ 

- 

Calculated actual speed 

B C D 

Error 

value 

Derivative 

acceleration 

Proportional, 

integral 

Derivative 

Parameter groups 23 SPEED CONTROL and 20 LIMITS 

+ 

+ 

+ 

Torque 

reference


Actual signal 0102 SPEED 

Speed control performance figures 

The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control. 

Speed 

control 

Static 

accuracy 

Dynamic 

accuracy 

No pulse 

encoder 

20% of motor 

nominal slip 

< 1% s with 

100% torque 

step 

With pulse 

encoder 

2% of motor 

nominal slip 

< 1% s with 

100% torque 

step 

Torque control performance figures 

T 

(%) 

TN Program features 143 

The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the 

motor shaft. The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control. 

Torque No pulse 

control encoder 

Non-linearity ± 5% with 

nominal 

torque 

(± 20% at the 

most 

demanding 

operating 

point) 

Torque step < 10 ms with 

rise time nominal 

torque 

With pulse 

encoder 

± 5% with 

nominal 

torque 

< 10 ms with 

nominal 

torque 

100 

T load 

nact-nref nN TN = rated motor torque 

nN = rated motor speed 

nact = actual speed 

T 

(%) 

T N 

100 

90 

10 

T ref 

< 5 ms 

T act 

TN = rated motor torque 

Tref = torque reference 

t (s) 

Area < 1% s 

t (s)


Scalar control 

It is possible to select scalar control as the motor control method instead of vector 

control. In the scalar control mode, the drive is controlled with a frequency reference. 

It is recommended to activate the scalar control mode in the following special 

applications: 

• In multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 

2) if the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed 

after the motor identification. 

• If the nominal current of the motor is less than 20% of the nominal output current 

of the drive. 

• When the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected. 

The scalar control mode is not recommended for permanent magnet motors. 

In the scalar control mode, some standard features are not available. 

� Settings 

Parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 

IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive 

IR compensation is active only when the motor 

control mode is scalar (see section Scalar 

control on page 144). When IR compensation is 

activated, the drive gives an extra voltage boost 

to the motor at low speeds. IR compensation is 

useful in applications that require high breakaway 

torque. In vector control, no IR 

compensation is possible/needed. 

� Settings 

Parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT 

Programmable protection functions 

� AI

� Panel loss 


Panel loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as 

the control location for the drive stops communicating. 

Settings 

Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 

� External fault 

External faults (1 and 2) can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source 

for an external fault indication signal. 

Settings 

Parameters 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 

� Stall protection 

The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision 

limits (frequency, time) and choose how the drive reacts to the motor stall condition 

(alarm indication / fault indication & drive stop / no reaction). 

Settings 

Parameters 3010 STALL FUNCTION, 3011 STALL FREQUENCY and 3012 STALL 

TIME 

� Motor thermal protection 

The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor thermal 

protection function. 

The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following 

assumptions: 

• The motor is in the ambient temperature of 30 °C when power is applied to the 

drive. 

• Motor temperature is calculated using either the user-adjustable or automatically 

calculated motor thermal time constant and motor load curve (see the figures 

below). The load curve should be adjusted if the ambient temperature exceeds 

30 °C


. 

Motor 

load 

100% 

Temp. 

rise 

100% 

63% 

Motor thermal time constant 

Settings 


Note: It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function. See 

section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 155. 

� Underload protection 

Loss of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The drive provides an 

underload function to protect the machinery and process in such a serious fault 

condition. Supervision limits - underload curve and underload time - can be specified 

as well as the action taken by the drive upon the underload condition (alarm 

indication / fault indication & drive stop / no reaction). 

Settings 


� Earth fault protection 

The Earth fault protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable. The 

protection can be selected to be active during start and run or during start only. 

An earth fault in the input power line does not activate the protection. 

Settings 

} 

Parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 

� Incorrect wiring 

t 

t 

P 3007 

P 3008 

100 = 

127% 

Defines the operation when incorrect input power cable connection is detected. 

150 

50 

Output current relative (%) to 

motor nominal current 

Break point 

Zero speed load 

P 3009 

Motor load curve 

f

Settings 

Parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 

� Input phase loss 


Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the input power cable connection status 

by detecting intermediate circuit ripple. If a phase is lost, the ripple increases. 

Settings 

Parameter 3016 SUPPLY PHASE 

Pre-programmed faults 

� Overcurrent 

The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 325% of the drive nominal current. 

� DC overvoltage 

The DC overvoltage trip limit is 420 V (for 200 V drives) and 840 V (for 400 V drives). 

� DC undervoltage 

The DC undervoltage trip limit is adaptive. See parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL. 

� Drive temperature 

The drive supervises the IGBT temperature. There are two supervision limits: Alarm 

limit and fault trip limit. 

� Short circuit 

If a short circuit occurs, the drive will not start and a fault indication is given. 

� Internal fault 

If the drive detects an internal fault, the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given. 

Operation limits 

The drive has adjustable limits for speed, current (maximum), torque (maximum) and 

DC voltage. 

� Settings 

Parameter group 20 LIMITS


Power limit 

Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit. 

If the maximum allowed power is exceeded, the drive torque is automatically limited. 

Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware. 

For specific values, see chapter Technical data on page 357. 

Automatic resets 

The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, 

external and “analog input below a minimum” faults. The Automatic resets must be 

activated by the user. 

� Settings 


Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic reset settings 


Alarm Additional information 

AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm 

Supervisions 

The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the userdefined 

limits. The user may set limits for speed, current etc. The supervision status 

can be indicated through relay or digital output. 

The supervision functions operate on a 2 ms time level. 

� Settings 

Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION 



1401 Supervision status through RO 1 

1402/1403/1410 Supervision status through RO 2…4. With option 

MREL-01 only. 

1805 Supervision status through DO 

8425, 8426 / 8435, 8436 /…/8495, Sequence programming state change according to 

8496 

supervision functions

Parameter lock 


The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock. 

� Settings 

Parameters 1602 PARAMETER LOCK and 1603 PASS CODE 

PID control 

There are two built-in PID controllers in the drive: 

• Process PID (PID1) and 

• External/Trim PID (PID2). 

The PID controller can be used when the motor speed needs to be controlled based 

on process variables such as pressure, flow or temperature. 

When the PID control is activated, a process reference (setpoint) is connected to the 

drive instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process feedback) is also 

brought back to the drive. The drive compares the reference and the actual values, 

and automatically adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process 

quantity (actual value) at the desired level (reference). 

The control operates on a 2 ms time level. 

� Process controller PID1 

PID1 has two separate sets of parameters (40 PROCESS PID SET 1, 41 PROCESS 

PID SET 2). Selection between parameter sets 1 and 2 is defined by a parameter. 

In most cases when there is only one transducer signal wired to the drive, only 

parameter set 1 is needed. Two different parameter sets (1 and 2) are used eg when 

the load of the motor changes considerably in time. 

� External/Trim controller PID2 

PID2 (42 EXT / TRIM PID) can be used in two different ways: 

• External controller: Instead of using additional PID controller hardware, the user 

can connect PID2 output through drive analog output or fieldbus controller to 

control a field instrument like a damper or a valve. 

• Trim controller: PID2 can be used to trim or fine tune the reference of the drive. 

See section Reference trimming on page 129.


� Block diagrams 

The figure below shows an application example: The controller adjusts the speed of a 

pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure 

reference. 

Example: 

Pressure boost pump 

! 

Drive 

) + 6 2 ) 4 . 7 � + , 4 18 - 

� � + 

4 - � 

- � 6 - 4 

4 - 5 - 6 

4 - . 

! 

) + 5 $ 

�� > = H 

" �� ) 

PID control block diagram 

%ref 

4014 

4021 

AI1 

AI2 

IMOT 

. 

. 

Actual values 

4001 

4002 

4003 

4004 

4005 

PIDmax 

PIDmin 

… 

ref 

k 

ti 

td 

i 

dFiltT 

errVInv 

oh1 

ol1 

PID 

%ref = 4010 

Switch 

9904 = 0 

Frequency 

reference 

Speed 

reference


The following figure presents the speed/scalar control block diagram for process 

controller PID1. 

Switch 

PID act 

selection 

Panel ref2 

PID1 

controller 

PID ACT 

value 

n 

PID1 Out 

Local ref 

switch 

4014…4021/ 

4141…4121* 

AI 

Current 

Torque 

Power 

COMM ACT 

1106 

Group 

40/41* 

Limiter 

LOC 

LOC/REM 

switch 

Panel ref1 

Panel ref2 

Alarm 

speed 

500% 

-500% 

Speed 

REM ref 

1101 

EXT1 ref 

select 

Group 30 

Limiter 

Constant 

speed 

Control panel 

n 

Panel ref1 

AI 

… 

Average speed 

Const speed 7 

Group 12 

1103 

AI2+SEQ 

1104 

Constant 

speed 

EXT2 ref 

select 

n 

Panel ref2 

AI 

… 

EXT1/EXT2 

switch 

Group 12 

1106 

AI2+SEQ 

Limiter 

Switch 

PID act 

selection 

PID1 

controller 

PID ACT 

value 

n 

1102 

1107 

PID1 Out 

4014…4021/ 

4114…4121* 

AI 

Current 

Torque 

Power 

COMM ACT 

1106 

Group 

40/41* 

Limiter 

PID1 ref 

select 

n 

*Parameter 4027 selects between PID parameter set 1 and 2, ie group 40 and 41. 

Panel ref2 

AI 

… 

4012,4013/ 

4112,4113* 

4010/4110* 

SEQ PROG


� Settings 


1101 Local control mode reference type selection 

1102 EXT1/EXT2 selection 

1106 PID1 activation 

1107 REF2 minimum limit 

1501 PID2 output (external controller) connection to AO 

9902 PID control macro selection 

Groups 40 PROCESS PID SET 

1…41 PROCESS PID SET 2 

PID1 settings 

Group 42 EXT / TRIM PID PID2 settings 



0126/0127 PID 1/2 output value 

0128/0129 PID 1/2 setpoint value 

0130/0131 PID 1/2 feedback value 

0132/0133 PID 1/2 deviation 

0170 AO value defined by Sequence programming

Sleep function for the process PID (PID1) control 

The sleep function operates on a 2 ms time level. 


The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable/disable logic. The sleep 

function can be put into use only when the PID control is active. 

Output 

frequency 

Motor 

speed 

0132 

4025 

Switch 

Compare 

Select 

1 NOT SEL 

4023 

9904 

MOTOR CTRL 

MODE 

12 

2 

NOT SEL 

INTERNAL 

DI1 . 

Select 

%refActive 

PIDCtrlActive 

modulating 

5320 (B1) 

5320 (B2) 

Delay 

4022 4026 

Delay 

1) 1 = Activate sleeping 

0 = Deactivate sleeping 

Motor speed: Actual speed of the motor 

%refActive: The % reference (EXT REF2) is in use. See parameter 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL. 

PIDCtrlActive: Parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO = PID CONTROL. 

modulating: Drive IGBT control is operating. 

t 

Or 


� Example 

The time scheme below visualizes the operation of the sleep function. 

Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump (when parameter 4022 

SLEEP SELECTION is set to INTERNAL): The water consumption falls at night. As a 

consequence, the PID process controller decreases the motor speed. However, due 

to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low 

speeds, the motor does not stop but keeps rotating. The sleep function detects the 

slow rotation, and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed. 

The drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the pressure. The pumping restarts 

when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum level and the wake-up delay has 

passed. 

� Settings 

Motor speed 


9902 PID control activation 

4022…4026, 4122…4126 Sleep function settings 


Sleep level 

(4023) 

Actual value 

t d = Sleep delay (4024) 

t


Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O 

This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive 

I/O terminals are used as the connection interface. 

Motor temperature can be measured using PT100 or PTC sensors connected to 

analog input and output. 

One sensor Three sensors 

Motor 

T 

3.3 nF 

AI1 

GND 

AO 

GND 

WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature 

sensor requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and 

the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm 

(400/500 V AC equipment). 

If the assembly does not fulfill the requirement, the I/O board terminals must be 

protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment, or the 

temperature sensor must be isolated from the I/O terminals. 

T 

Motor 

T 

T 

3.3 nF 

AI1 

GND 

AO 

GND


It is also possible to monitor motor temperature by connecting a PTC sensor and 

a thermistor relay between the +24 V DC voltage supply offered by the drive and a 

digital input. The figure below displays the connection. 

WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor thermistor to 

the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live 

parts and the thermistor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping 

distance of 8 mm (400/500 V AC equipment). 

If the thermistor assembly does not fulfill the requirement, the other I/O terminals of 

the drive must be protected against contact, or a thermistor relay must be used to 

isolate the thermistor from the digital input. 

� Settings 


Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input settings 

Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Analog output settings 

Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Motor temperature measurement settings 

Other 

At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through, eg a 3.3 nF capacitor. If this is not 

possible, the shield is to be left unconnected. 


Thermistor 

relay 

T 

Motor 

Par. 3501 = THERM(0) or THERM(1) 

DI1…5 

+24 V DC 


0145 Motor temperature 

Alarm/Fault Additional information 

MOTOR TEMP/MOT OVERTEMP Excessive motor temp

Control of a mechanical brake 


The mechanical brake is used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero 

speed when the drive is stopped, or not powered. 

� Example 

The figure below shows a brake control application example. 

WARNING! Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake 

control function is integrated fulfills the personnel safety regulations. Note that 

the frequency converter (a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module, as 

defined in IEC 61800-2), is not considered a safety device mentioned in the 

European Machinery Directive and related harmonized standards. Thus, the 

personnel safety of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific 

frequency converter feature (such as the brake control function), but it has to be 

implemented as defined in the application specific regulations. 

Brake control logic is integrated 

in the drive application 

program. The user has to take 

care of the power supply and 

wiring. 

Brake on/off control is through 

relay output RO. 

Emergency 

brake 

M 

Motor 

Power supply 

230 VAC 

Mechanical brake 

X1B 

17 ROCOM 

18 RONC 

19 RONO


� Operation time scheme 

The time scheme below illustrates the operation of the brake control function. See 

also section State shifts on page 159. 

Start command 

External speed 

reference 

Inverter modulating 

Motor magnetized 

Open brake command 

(RO/DO) 

Internal speed 

reference (actual 

motor speed) 

I output / Torque 

1 

t md 

2 

I s/T s 

t od 

3 

4 

n cs 

I mem/T mem 

Is/Ts Brake open current/torque (parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL or 

current/torque from parameter 0179 BRAKE TORQUE MEM) 

Imem/Tmem Brake close current/torque (saved in parameter 0179 BRAKE TORQUE MEM) 

tmd Motor magnetizing delay (parameter 4305 BRAKE MAGN DELAY) 

tod Brake open delay (parameter 4301 BRAKE OPEN DLY) 

ncs Brake close speed (parameter 4303 BRAKE CLOSE LVL) 

Mechanical brake close delay 

t cd 

7 

t cd 

t

� State shifts 

From any state 

1) 

NO 

MODULATION 

2) 

OPEN 

BRAKE 

3) 

RELEASE RFG 

INPUT 

8) 

4) 

RFG INPUT 

TO ZERO 

7) 

CLOSE 

BRAKE 

9) 

(rising edge) 

0/0/1 

1/1/0 

1/1/0 

1/1/1 

0/1/1 

A 

A 

5) 

6) 


RFG = Ramp function 

generator in the speed control 

loop (reference handling). 

State (Symbol NN X/Y/Z ) 

- NN: State name 

- X/Y/Z: State outputs/operations 

X = 1 Open the brake. The relay output set to brake on/off control energizes. 

Y = 1 Forced start. The function keeps the internal Start on until the brake is closed in 

spite of the status of the external Start signal. 

Z = 1 Ramp in zero. Forces the used speed reference (internal) to zero along a ramp. 

State change conditions (Symbol ) 

1) Brake control active 0 -> 1 OR Inverter is modulating = 0 

2) Motor magnetised = 1 AND Drive running = 1 

3) Brake is open AND Brake open delay passed AND Start = 1 

4) Start = 0 

5) Start = 0 

6) Start = 1 

7) Actual motor speed < Brake close speed AND Start = 0 

8) Start = 1 

9) Brake is closed AND Brake close delay passed = 1 AND Start = 0


� Settings 


1401/1805 Mechanical brake activation through RO 1 / DO 

1402/1403/1410 Mechanical brake activation through RO 2…4. With 

option MREL-01 only. 

2112 Zero speed delay 

Group 43 MECH BRK CONTROL Brake function settings

Jogging 


The jogging function is typically used to control a cyclical movement of a machine 

section. One push button controls the drive through the whole cycle: When it is on, 

the drive starts, accelerates to a preset speed at a preset rate. When it is off, the drive 

decelerates to zero speed at a preset rate. 

The figure and table below describe the operation of the drive. They also represent 

how the drive shifts to normal operation (= jogging inactive) when the drive start 

command is switched on. Jog cmd = State of the jogging input, Start cmd = State of 

the drive start command. 

The function operates on a 2 ms time level 

Speed 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

Phase Jog 

cmd Start 

cmd Description 

1-2 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the 

jogging function. 

2-3 1 0 Drive runs at the jogging speed. 

3-4 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the 


4-5 0 0 Drive is stopped. 

5-6 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the 



7-8 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to the speed 

reference along the active acceleration ramp. 

8-9 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive follows the speed 

reference. 

9-10 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the active deceleration ramp. 

10-11 0 0 Drive is stopped. 

11-12 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to the speed 

reference along the active acceleration ramp. 

12-13 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive follows the speed 

reference. 

13-14 1 0 Drive decelerates to the jogging speed along the deceleration ramp of the 



15-16 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the 


x = state can be either 1 or 0 

Note: The jogging is not operational when the drive start command is on. 

t


Note: The jogging speed overrides the constant speeds. 

Note: The jogging uses ramp stop even if parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION 

selection is COAST. 

Note: The ramp shape time is set to zero during the jogging (ie linear ramp). 

Jogging function uses constant speed 7 as jogging speed and 

acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 2. 

It is also possible to activate jogging function 1 or 2 through fieldbus. Jogging 

function 1 uses constant speed 7 and jogging function 2 uses constant speed 6. Both 

functions use acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 2. 

� Settings 


1010 Jogging activation 

1208 Jogging speed 

1208/1207 Jogging speed for jogging function 1/2 activated through 

fieldbus 

2112 Zero speed delay 

2205, 2206 Acceleration and deceleration times 

2207 Acceleration and deceleration ramp shape time: Set to 

zero during the jogging (ie linear ramp). 



0302 Jogging 1/2 activation through fieldbus 

1401 Jogging function status through RO 1 

1402/1403/1410 Jogging function status through RO 2…4. With option 

MREL-01 only. 

1805 Jogging function status through DO

Timed functions 


A variety of drive functions can be time controlled, eg start/stop and EXT1/EXT2 

control. The drive offers 

• four start and stop times (START TIME 1…START TIME 4, STOP TIME 1…STOP 

TIME 4) 

• four start and stop days (START DAY 1…START DAY 4, STOP DAY 1…STOP 

DAY 4) 

• four timed functions for collecting the selected time periods 1…4 together (TIMED 

FUNC 1 SRC…TIMED FUNC 4 SRC) 

• booster time (an additional booster time connected to timed functions). 

A timed function can be connected to multiple time periods: 

Time period 1 

3602 START TIME 1 

3603 STOP TIME 1 

3604 START DAY 1 

3605 STOP DAY 1 

Time period 2 





Time period 3 





Time period 4 





Booster 

3622 BOOSTER SEL 

3623 BOOSTER TIME 

Timed function 1 

3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 






3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC


A parameter which is triggered by a timed function can be connected to only one 

timed function at a time. 





You can use the Timed functions assistant for easy configuring. For more information 

on the assistants, see section Assistants mode on page 98. 

� Example 



1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL 

1201 CONST SPEED SEL 

1209 TIMED MODE SEL 

1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 

1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2, 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3, 

1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 (with option MREL-01 only) 

1805 DO SIGNAL 

4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 

4228 ACTIVATE 

8402 SEQ PROG START 

8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1 

8425/35/45/55/65/75/85/95 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 … 

ST8 TRIG TO ST 2 

8426/36/46/56/66/76/86/96 ST1 TRIG TO ST N … 

ST8 TRIG TO ST N 

Air conditioning is active on weekdays from 8:00 to 15:30 (8 a.m to 3:30 p.m) and on 

Sundays from 12:00 to 15:00 (12 to 3 p.m). By pressing the extension time switch, 

the air-conditioning is on for an extra hour. 

Parameter Setting 

3601 TIMERS ENABLE DI1 

3602 START TIME 1 08:00:00 

3603 STOP TIME 1 15:30:00 

3604 START DAY 1 MONDAY 

3605 STOP DAY 1 FRIDAY 

3606 START TIME 2 12:00:00 

3607 STOP TIME 2 15:00:00 

3608 START DAY 2 SUNDAY 

3609 STOP DAY 2 SUNDAY 

3622 BOOSTER SEL DI5 (cannot be the same as parameter 3601 value) 

3623 BOOSTER TIME 01:00:00 

3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC T1+T2+B

� Settings 

Timer 

Drive start and stop can be controlled with timer functions. 

� Settings 


Counter 



36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Timed functions settings 

1001, 1002 Timed start/stop control 

1102 Timed EXT1/EXT2 selection 

1201 Timed constant speed 1 activation 

1209 Timed speed selection 

1401 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 1 

1402/1403/1410 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 2…4. 

With option MREL-01 only. 

1805 Timed function status indicated through digital output DO 

4027 Timed PID1 parameter set 1/2 selection 

4228 Timed external PID2 activation 

8402 Timed Sequence programming activation 

8425/8435/…/8495 

Sequence programming state change trigger with timed 

8426/8436/…/8496 

function 


1001, 1002 Start/stop signal sources 

Group 19 TIMER & COUNTER Timer for start and stop 


0165 Start/stop control time count 

Drive start and stop can be controlled with counter functions. The counter function 

can also be used as state change trigger signal in Sequence programming. See 

section Sequence programming on page 166. 

� Settings 


1001, 1002 Start/Stop signal sources 

Group 19 TIMER & COUNTER Timer for start and stop 

8425, 8426 / 8435, 8436 /…/8495, Counter signal as state change trigger in Sequence 

8496 

programming




0166 Start/stop control pulse count 

Sequence programming 

The drive can be programmed to perform a sequence where the drive shifts typically 

through 1…8 states. User defines the operation rules for the whole sequence and for 

each state. The rules of a particular state are effective when the Sequence program is 

active and the program has entered the state. The rules to be defined for each state 

are: 

• Run, stop and direction commands for the drive (forward/reverse/stop) 

• Acceleration and deceleration ramp time for the drive 

• Source for the drive reference value 

• State duration 

• RO/DO/AO status 

• Signal source for triggering the shift to the next state 

• Signal source for triggering the shift to any state (1…8). 

Every state can also activate drive outputs to give an indication to external devices. 

Sequence programming allows state transitions either to the next state or to a 

selected state. State change can be activated with eg timed functions, digital inputs 

and supervision functions. 

Sequence programming can be applied in simple mixer applications as well as in 

more complicated traverse applications. 

The programming can be done with control panel or with a PC tool. The drive is 

supported by version 2.91 or later of the DriveWindow Light 2 PC tool which includes 

a graphical Sequence programming tool. 

Note: By default all Sequence programming parameters can be changed even when 

the Sequence programming is active. It is recommended that after the Sequence 

programming parameters are set, parameters are locked with parameter 1602 

PARAMETER LOCK. 

� Settings 


1001/1002 Start, stop and direction commands for EXT1/EXT2 

1102 EXT1/EXT2 selection 

1106 REF2 source 

1201 Constant speed deactivation. Constant speed always 

overrides the Sequence programming reference. 

1401 Sequence programming output through RO 1




1402/1403/1410 Sequence programming output through relay output RO 2…4. 

With option MREL-01 only. 

1501 Sequence programming output through AO 

1601 Run enable activation/deactivation 

1805 Sequence programming output through DO 

Group 19 TIMER & COUNTER State change according to counter limit 

Group 32 SUPERVISION Timed state change 

2201…2207 Acceleration/deceleration and ramp time settings 

Group 32 SUPERVISION Supervision settings 

4010/4110/4210 Sequence programming output as PID reference signal 

Group 84 SEQUENCE PROG Sequence programming settings 


0167 Sequence programming status 

0168 Sequence programming active state 

0169 Current state time counter 

0170 Analog output PID reference control values 

0171 Executed sequence counter


� State shifts 

State N 

State N 

State N 

State N 

State N 

State N 

State N 

State N 

Go to state N (par 8426, 8427)* 








*State change to state N has a 

higher priority than state change to 

the next state. 

Sequence programming 

ENABLE 

STATE 1 

(par. 8420…8424) 

STATE 2 

(par. 8430…8434) 

STATE 3 

(par. 8440…8444) 

STATE 4 

(par. 8450…8454) 

STATE 5 

(par. 8460…8464) 

STATE 6 

(par. 8470…8474) 

STATE 7 

(par. 8480…8484) 

STATE 8 

(par. 8490…8494) 

Go to state 2 (par 8425)* 








NN X 

0167 bit 0 = 1 

0168 = 1 (State 1) 

0168 = 2 (State 2) 

0168 = 3 (State 3) 

0168 = 4 (State 4) 

0168 = 5 (State 5) 

0168 = 6 (State 6) 

0168 = 7 (State 7) 

0168 = 8 (State 8) 

NN = State 

X = Actual signal 

State change

� Example 1 

50 Hz 

0Hz 

-50 Hz 

DI1 

DI2 

Sequence programming is activated by digital input DI1. 


ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 ST3 

Seq. start 

State change trigger 

ST1: Drive is started in reverse direction with -50 Hz reference and 10 s ramp time. 

State 1 is active for 40 s. 

ST2: Drive is accelerated to 20 Hz with 60 s ramp time. State 2 is active for 120 s. 

ST3: Drive is accelerated to 25 Hz with 5 s ramp time. State 3 is active until the 

Sequence programming is disabled or until booster start is activated by DI2. 

ST4: Drive is accelerated to 50 Hz with 5 s ramp time. State 4 is active for 200 s and 

after that the state shifts back to state 3. 

Parameter Setting Additional information 

1002 EXT2 COMMANDS SEQ PROG Start, stop, direction commands for EXT2 

1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL EXT2 EXT2 activation 

1106 REF2 SELECT SEQ PROG Sequence programming output as REF2 

1601 RUN ENABLE NOT SEL Deactivation of Run enable 

2102 STOP FUNCTION RAMP Ramp stop 

2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL SEQ PROG Ramp as defined by parameter 8422/…/8452. 

8401 SEQ PROG ENABLE ALWAYS Sequence programming enabled 

8402 SEQ PROG START DI1 Sequence programming activation through 

digital input (DI1) 

8404 SEQ PROG RESET DI1(INV) Sequence programming reset (ie reset to state 

1, when DI1 signal is lost (1 -> 0)


ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 Additional 

information 

Par. Setting Par. Setting Par. Setting Par. Setting 

8420 ST1 REF 

SEL 

8421 ST1 

COMMANDS 

8422 ST1 

RAMP 

8424 ST1 

CHANGE DLY 

8425 ST1 TRIG 

TO ST 2 

8426 ST1 TRIG 

TO ST N 

8427 ST1 

STATE N 

� Example 2 

AI1 + 15% 

AI1 + 10% 

AI1 

AI1 - 10% 

AI1 - 15% 

DI1 

RO 

100% 8430 40% 8440 50% 8450 100% State 

reference 

START 

REV 

8431 START 

FRW 

8441 START 

FRW 

Drive is programmed for traverse control with 30 sequences. 

Sequence programming is activated by digital input DI1 

8451 START 

FRW 

Run, direction 

and stop 

command 

10 s 8432 60 s 8442 5 s 8452 5 s Ramp time 

40 s 8434 120 s 8444 8454 200 s State change 

delay 

CHANGE 

DLY 

8435 CHANGE 

DLY 

8445 DI2 8455 

NOT SEL 8436 NOT SEL 8446 NOT SEL 8456 CHANGE 

DLY 

- 8437 - 8447 - 8457 STATE 3 

ST2 (error: 

acceleration 

ST1 ST2 ST4 ST2 ST4 ST2 ST4 too slow) ST8 

ST3 ST3 ST3 

ST5 ST5 ST5 

Seq. start Error 

State change 

trigger 

ST8 

ERROR 

ST1: Drive is started in forward direction with AI1 (AI1 + 50% - 50%) reference and 

ramp pair 2. State shifts to the next state when reference is reached. All relay and 

analog outputs are cleared.


ST2: Drive is accelerated with AI1 + 15% (AI1 + 65% - 50%) reference and 1.5 s 

ramp time. State shifts to the next state when reference is reached. If reference is not 

reached within 2 s, state shifts to state 8 (error state). 

ST3: Drive is decelerated with AI1 + 10% (AI1 + 60% - 50%) reference and 0 s ramp 

time 1) . State shifts to the next state when reference is reached. If reference is not 

reached within 0.2 s, state shifts to state 8 (error state). 

ST4: Drive is decelerated with AI1 - 15% (AI1 + 35% -50%) reference and 1.5 s ramp 

time. State shifts to the next state when reference is reached. If reference is not 

reached within 2 s, state shifts to state 8 (error state). 2) 

ST5: Drive is accelerated with AI1 -10% (AI1 + 40% -50%) reference and 0 s ramp 

time 1) . State shifts to the next state when reference is reached. Sequence counter 

value is increased by 1. If sequence counter elapses, state shifts to state 7 (sequence 

completed). 

ST6: Drive reference and ramp times are the same as in state 2. Drive state shifts 

immediately to state 2 (delay time is 0 s). 

ST7 (sequence completed): Drive is stopped with ramp pair 1. Digital output DO is 

activated. If Sequence programming is deactivated by the falling edge of digital input 

DI1, state machine is reset to state 1. New start command can be activated by digital 

input DI1 or by digital inputs DI4 and DI5 (both inputs DI4 and DI5 must be 

simultaneously active). 

ST8 (error state): Drive is stopped with ramp pair 1. Relay output RO is activated. If 

Sequence programming is deactivated by the falling edge of digital input DI1, state 

machine is reset to state 1. New start command can be activated by digital input DI1 

or by digital inputs DI4 and DI5 (both inputs DI4 and DI5 must be simultaneously 

active). 

1) 0 second ramp time = drive is accelerated/decelerated as rapidly as possible. 

2) State reference must be between 0…100%, ie scaled AI1 value must be between 

15…85%. If AI1 = 0, reference = 0% + 35% -50% = -15% < 0%.


Parameter Setting Additional information 

1002 EXT2 COMMANDS SEQ PROG Start, stop, direction commands for EXT2 

1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL EXT2 EXT2 activation 

1106 REF2 SELECT AI1+SEQ 

PROG 

Sequence programming output as REF2 

1201 CONST SPEED SEL NOT SEL Deactivation of constant speeds 

1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 SEQ PROG Relay output RO 1 control as defined by 

parameter 8423/…/8493 

1601 RUN ENABLE NOT SEL Deactivation of Run enable 

1805 DO SIGNAL SEQ PROG Digital output DO control as defined by 

parameter 8423/…/8493 

2102 STOP FUNCTION RAMP Ramp stop 

2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL SEQ PROG Ramp as defined by parameter 8422/…/8452. 

2202 ACCELER TIME 1 1 s Acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 1 

2203 DECELER TIME 1 0s 

2205 ACCELER TIME 2 20 s Acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 2 

2206 DECELER TIME 2 20 s 

2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 5 s Shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp 2 

3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 171 Sequence counter (signal 0171 SEQ CYCLE 

CNTR) supervision 

3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO 30 Supervision low limit 

3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI 30 Supervision high limit 

8401 SEQ PROG ENABLE EXT2 Sequence programming enabled 

8402 SEQ PROG START DI1 Sequence programming activation through 

digital input (DI1) 

8404 SEQ PROG RESET DI1(INV) Sequence programming reset (ie reset to 

state 1, when DI1 signal is lost (1 -> 0) 

8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1 DI4 Logic value 1 

8407 SEQ LOGIC OPER 1 AND Operation between logic value 1 and 2 

8408 SEQ LOGIC VAL 2 DI5 Logic value 2 

8415 CYCLE CNT LOC ST5 TO NEXT Sequence counter activation, ie sequence 

count increases every time the state changes 

from state 5 to state 6. 

8416 CYCLE CNT RST STATE 1 Sequence counter reset during state transition 

to state 1



information 


8420 ST1 REF 

SEL 

8421 ST1 

COMMANDS 

8422 ST1 

RAMP 

8423 ST1 OUT 

CONTROL 

8424 ST1 

CHANGE DLY 

8425 ST1 TRIG 

TO ST 2 

8426 ST1 TRIG 

TO ST N 

8427 ST1 

STATE N 

50% 8430 65% 8440 60% 8450 35% State 

reference 

START 

FRW 

-0.2 

(ramp 

pair 2) 

R=0,D=0, 

AO=0 

8431 START 

FRW 

8441 START 

FRW 

8451 START 

FRW 


and stop 

commands 

8432 1.5 s 8442 0 s 8452 1.5 s Acceleration/ 

deceleration 

ramp time 

8433 AO=0 8443 AO=0 8453 AO=0 Relay, digital 

and analog 

output control 

0 s 8434 2 s 8444 0.2 s 8454 2 s State change 

delay 

ENTER 

SETPNT 

8435 ENTER 

SETPNT 

NOT SEL 8436 CHANGE 

DLY 

8445 ENTER 

SETPNT 

8446 CHANGE 

DLY 

8455 ENTER 

SETPNT 

8456 CHANGE 

DLY 

STATE 1 8437 STATE 8 8447 STATE 8 8457 STATE 8 

State change 

trigger 


information 


8460 ST5 REF 

SEL 

8461 ST5 

COMMANDS 

8462 ST5 

RAMP 

8463 ST5 OUT 

CONTROL 

8464 ST5 

CHANGE DLY 

8465 ST5 TRIG 

TO ST6 

8466 ST5 TRIG 

TO ST N 

8467 ST5 

STATE N 

40% 8470 65% 8480 0% 8490 0% State 

reference 

START 

FRW 

8471 START 

FRW 

8481 DRIVE 

STOP 

0s 8472 1.5 s 8482 -0.1 

(ramp 

pair 1) 

8491 DRIVE 

STOP 

8492 -0.1 

(ramp 

pair 1) 


and stop 

commands 

Acceleration/ 

deceleration 

ramp time 

AO=0 8473 AO=0 8483 DO=1 8493 RO=1 Relay, digital 

and analog 

output control 

0.2 s 8474 0 s 8484 0 s 8494 0 s State change 

delay 

ENTER 

SETPNT 

SUPRV1 

OVER 

8475 NOT SEL 8485 NOT SEL 8495 LOGIC 

VAL 

8476 CHANGE 

DLY 

8486 LOGIC 

VAL 

8496 NOT SEL 

STATE 7 8477 STATE 2 8487 STATE 1 8497 STATE 1 

State change 

trigger


Safe torque off (STO) function 

See Appendix: Safe torque off (STO) on page 399.

Actual signals and parameters 175 

Actual signals and parameters 


The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus 

equivalent values for each signal/parameter. It also contains a table of the default 

values for the different macros. 

Terms and abbreviations 

Term Definition 

Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the user. 

No user setting possible. Groups 01…04 contain actual signals. 

Def Parameter default value 

Parameter A user-adjustable operation instruction of the drive. Groups 10…99 contain 

parameters. 

Note: Parameter selections are shown on the basic control panel as integer 

values. Eg parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS selection COMM is shown as 

value 10 (which is equal to the fieldbus equivalent FbEq). 

FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value and the integer used in 

serial communication. 

E Refers to types 01E- and 03E- with European parametrization 

U Refers to types 01U- and 03U- with US parametrization 

Fieldbus addresses 

For FCAN-01 CANopen adapter, FDNA-01 DeviceNet adapter, FECA-01 EtherCAT 

adapter, FENA-01 Ethernet adapter, FMBA-01 Modbus adapter, FLON-01 

LonWorks® adapter, and FPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP adapter, see the user’s manual of 

the adapter.

176 Actual signals and parameters 

Fieldbus equivalent 

Example: If 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 (see page 217) is set from an external control 

system, an integer value of 1000 corresponds to 100.0%. All the read and sent values 

are limited to 16 bits (-32768…32767). 

Default values with different macros 

When application macro is changed (parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO), the software 

updates the parameter values to their default values. The table below shows the 

parameter default values for different macros. For other parameters, the default 

values are the same for all macros (shown in the parameter list starting on page 185). 

Index Name/ ABB 3-WIRE ALTERNA MOTOR HAND/ PID TORQUE 

Selection STANDARD 

TE POT AUTO CONTROL CONTROL 

9902 APPLIC 1 = 2 = 3= 4 = 5 = 6 = 7 = 

MACRO ABB 3-WIRE ALTERNAT MOTOR HAND/AUT PID TORQUE 

STANDARD 

E POT O CONTROL CTRL 

1001 EXT1 2 = DI1,2 4 = 9 = DI1F,2R 2 = DI1,2 2 = DI1,2 1 = DI1 2 = DI1,2 

COMMANDS 

DI1P,2P,3 

1002 EXT2 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 21 = DI5,4 20 = DI5 2 = DI1,2 

COMMANDS SEL SEL SEL SEL 

1003 DIRECTION 3 = 3 = 3 = 3 = 3 = 1 = 3 = 

REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST FORWARD REQUEST 

1102 EXT1/EXT2 

SEL 

0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 3 = DI3 2 = DI2 3 = DI3 

1103 REF1 SELECT 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 12 = 

DI3U,4D(N 

C) 

1 = AI1 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 

1106 REF2 SELECT 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 19 = 

PID1OUT 

2 = AI2 

1201 CONST 9 = DI3,4 10 = DI4,5 9 = DI3,4 5 = DI5 0 = NOT 3 = DI3 4 = DI4 

SPEED SEL 

SEL 

1304 MINIMUM AI2 1.0% 1.0% 1.0% 1.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 

1501 AO1 

CONTENT SEL 

103 102 102 102 102 102 102 

1601 RUN ENABLE 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 4 = DI4 0 = NOT 

SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL 

SEL 

2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 5 = DI5 0 = NOT 5 = DI5 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 5 = DI5 

SEL 

SEL 

SEL SEL SEL 

3201 SUPERV 1 

PARAM 

103 102 102 102 102 102 102 

3401 SIGNAL1 

PARAM 

103 102 102 102 102 102 102 

9904 MOTOR CTRL 3 = 1 = 1 = 1 = 1 = 1 = 2 = 

MODE SCALAR: VECTOR: VECTOR: VECTOR: VECTOR: VECTOR: VECTOR: 

FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED TORQ 

Note: It is possible to control several functions with one input (DI or AI), and there is a 

chance of mismatch between these functions. In some cases it is desired to control 

several functions with one input. 

For example in the ABB standard macro, DI3 and DI4 are set to control constant 

speeds. On the other hand, it is possible to select value 6 (DI3U,4D) for parameter


1103 REF1 SELECT. That would mean a mismatched duplicate functionality for DI3 

and DI4: either constant speed or acceleration and deceleration. The function that is 

not required must be disabled. In this case the constant speed selection must be 

disabled by setting parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL to NOT SEL or to values 

not related to DI3 and DI4. 

Remember to also check the default values of the selected macro when configuring 

the drive inputs.




No. Name/Value Description FbEq 

01 OPERATING 

DATA 

Basic signals for monitoring the drive (read-only) 

0101 SPEED & DIR Calculated motor speed in rpm. A negative value indicates 

reverse direction. 

1 = 1 rpm 

0102 SPEED Calculated motor speed in rpm 1 = 1 rpm 

0103 OUTPUT Calculated drive output frequency in Hz. (Shown by default 1 = 0.1 Hz 

FREQ on the panel Output mode display.) 

0104 CURRENT Measured motor current in A. (Shown by default on the 

panel Output mode display.) 

1 = 0.1 A 

0105 TORQUE Calculated motor torque in percent of the motor nominal 

torque 

1 = 0.1% 

0106 POWER Measured motor power in kW 1 = 0.1 

kW 

0107 DC BUS 

VOLTAGE 

Measured intermediate circuit voltage in V DC 1 = 1 V 

0109 OUTPUT 

VOLTAGE 

Calculated motor voltage in V AC 1 = 1 V 

0110 DRIVE TEMP Measured IGBT temperature in °C 1 = 0.1 °C 

0111 EXTERNAL External reference REF1 in rpm or Hz. Unit depends on 1 = 0.1 Hz 

REF 1 parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting. 

/ 1 rpm 

0112 EXTERNAL 

REF 2 

External reference REF2 in percent. Depending on the use, 1 = 0.1% 

100% equals the maximum motor speed, nominal motor 

torque, or maximum process reference. 

0113 CTRL 

LOCATION 

Active control location. (0) LOCAL; (1) EXT1; (2) EXT2. See 

section Local control vs. external control on page 125. 

0114 RUN TIME (R) Elapsed drive running time counter (hours). Runs when the 

drive is modulating. The counter can be reset by pressing 

the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control 

panel is in the Parameter mode. 

0115 KWH 

COUNTER (R) 

kWh counter. The counter value is accumulated till it 

reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts 

again from 0. The counter can be reset by pressing UP and 

DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the 

Parameter mode. 

1 = 1 

1 = 1 h 

1 = 1 kWh 

0120 AI 1 Relative value of analog input AI1 in percent 1 = 0.1% 

0121 AI 2 Relative value of analog input AI2 in percent 1 = 0.1% 

0124 AO 1 Value of analog output AO in mA 1 = 0.1 

mA 

0126 PID 1 OUTPUT Output value of the process PID1 controller in percent 1 = 0.1% 

0127 PID 2 OUTPUT Output value of the PID2 controller in percent 1 = 0.1% 

0128 PID 1 SETPNT Setpoint signal (reference) for the process PID1 controller. 

Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNITS, 4007 UNIT 

SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings. 

-




0129 PID 2 SETPNT Setpoint signal (reference) for the PID2 controller. Unit 

depends on parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE 

settings. 

0130 PID 1 FBK Feedback signal for the process PID1 controller. Unit 

depends on parameter 4006 UNITS, 4007 UNIT SCALE 

and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings. 

0131 PID 2 FBK Feedback signal for the PID2 controller. Unit depends on 

parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings. 

0132 PID 1 

DEVIATION 

0133 PID 2 

DEVIATION 

0134 COMM RO 

WORD 

0135 COMM VALUE 

1 

0136 COMM VALUE 

2 

0137 PROCESS 

VAR 1 

0138 PROCESS 

VAR 2 

0139 PROCESS 

VAR 3 

Deviation of the process PID1 controller, ie the difference 

between the reference value and the actual value. Unit 

depends on parameter 4006 UNITS, 4007 UNIT SCALE 

and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings. 

Deviation of the PID2 controller, ie the difference between 

the reference value and the actual value. Unit depends on 

parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings. 

Relay output Control word through fieldbus (decimal). See 

parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1. 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1 = 1 

Data received from fieldbus 1 = 1 

Data received from fieldbus 1 = 1 

Process variable 1 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL 

DISPLAY 


DISPLAY 


DISPLAY 

0140 RUN TIME Elapsed drive running time counter (thousands of hours). 

Runs when the drive is modulating. Counter cannot be 

reset. 

0141 MWH 

COUNTER 

0142 REVOLUTION 

CNTR 

0143 DRIVE ON 

TIME HI 

0144 DRIVE ON 

TIME LO 

MWH counter. The counter value is accumulated till it 

reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts 

again from 0. Cannot be reset. 

Motor revolution counter (millions of revolutions). The 

counter can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys 

simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter 

mode. 

Drive control board power-on time in days. Counter cannot 

be reset. 

Drive control board power-on time in 2 second ticks (30 

ticks = 60 seconds). Counter cannot be reset. 

0145 MOTOR TEMP Measured motor temperature. Unit depends on the sensor 

type selected by group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 

parameters. 

- 

- 

- 

1 = 0.01 

kh 

1 = 1 

MWh 

1 = 1 

Mrev 

1 = 1 

days 

1 = 2 s 

1 = 1 

0146 MECH ANGLE Calculated mechanical angle 1 = 1




0147 MECH REVS Mechanical revolutions, ie the motor shaft revolutions 

calculated by the encoder 

1 = 1 

0148 Z PLS 

DETECTED 

Encoder zero pulse detector. 0 = not detected, 1 = detected. 1 = 1 

0150 CB TEMP Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius 

(0.0…150.0 °C). 

1 = 0.1 °C 

0158 PID COMM 

VALUE 1 

Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PID1 and PID2) 1 = 1 

0159 PID COMM 

VALUE 2 

Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PID1 and PID2) 1 = 1 

0160 DI 1-5 STATUS Status of digital inputs. 

Example: 10000 = DI1 is on, DI2…DI5 are off. 

0161 PULSE INPUT 

FREQ 

Value of frequency input in Hz 1 = 1 Hz 

0162 RO STATUS Status of relay output 1. 1 = RO is energized, 0 = RO is deenergized. 

1 = 1 

0163 TO STATUS Status of transistor output, when transistor output is used as 1 = 1 

a digital output. 

0164 TO 

FREQUENCY 

Transistor output frequency, when transistor output is used 

as a frequency output. 

0165 TIMER VALUE Timer value of timed start/stop. See parameter group 19 

TIMER & COUNTER. 

0166 COUNTER 

VALUE 

0167 SEQ PROG 

STS 

0168 SEQ PROG 

STATE 

0169 SEQ PROG 

TIMER 

0170 SEQ PROG AO 

VAL 

0171 SEQ CYCLE 

CNTR 

Pulse counter value of counter start/stop. See parameter 

group 19 TIMER & COUNTER. 

Status word of the Sequence programming: 

Bit 0 = ENABLED (1 = enabled) 

Bit 1 = STARTED 

Bit 2 = PAUSED 

Bit 3 = LOGIC VALUE (logic operation defined by 

parameters 8406…8410). 

Active state of the Sequence programming. 1…8 = state 

1…8. 

1 = 1 Hz 

1 = 0.01 s 

1 = 1 

1 = 1 

1 = 1 

Current state time counter of the Sequence programming 1 = 2 s 

Analog output control values defined by the Sequence 

programming. See parameter 8423 ST1 OUT CONTROL. 

Executed sequence counter of the Sequence programming. 

See parameters 8415 CYCLE CNT LOC and 8416 CYCLE 

CNT RST. 

0172 ABS TORQUE Calculated absolute value of the motor torque in percent of 

the motor nominal torque 

1 = 0.1% 

1 = 1 

1 = 0.1%


0173 RO 2-4 

STATUS 

0179 BRAKE 

TORQUE MEM 

0180 ENC 

SYNCHRONIZ 

ED 

03 FB ACTUAL 

SIGNALS 

0301 FB CMD 

WORD 1 

0302 FB CMD 

WORD 2 

0303 FB STS WORD 

1 

0304 FB STS WORD 

2 

0305 FAULT WORD 

1 



Status of the relays in the MREL-01 relay output extension 

module. See MREL-01 relay output extension module 

user's manual (3AUA0000035974 [English]). 

Example: 100 = RO 2 is on, RO 3 and RO 4 are off. 

Vector control: Torque value (0…180% of the motor nominal 

torque) saved before the mechanical brake is taken in use. 

Scalar control: Current value (0…180% of the motor 

nominal current) saved before the mechanical brake is 

taken in use. 

This torque or current is applied when the drive is started. 

See parameter 4307 BRK OPEN LVL SEL. 

Monitors the synchronization of the measured position with 

the estimated position for permanent magnet motors. 0 = 

NOT SYNC, 1 = SYNC. 

Data words for monitoring the fieldbus communication 

(read-only). Each signal is a 16-bit data word. 

Data words are displayed on the panel in hexadecimal 

format. 

A 16-bit data word. See section DCU communication profile 

on page 320. 


on page 320 


on page 320. 


on page 320 

A 16-bit data word. For the possible causes and remedies 

and fieldbus equivalents, see chapter Fault tracing on page 

335. 

Bit 0 = OVERCURRENT 

Bit 1 = DC OVERVOLT 

Bit 2 = DEV OVERTEMP 

Bit 3 = SHORT CIRC 

Bit 4 = Reserved 

Bit 5 = DC UNDERVOLT 

Bit 6 = AI1 LOSS 


Bit 8 = MOT OVERTEMP 

Bit 9 = PANEL LOSS 

Bit 10 = ID RUN FAIL 

Bit 11 = MOTOR STALL 

Bit 12 = CB OVERTEMP 

Bit 13 = EXT FAULT 1 

1 = 0.1% 

1 = 1





2 


3 

0308 ALARM WORD 

1 

Bit 14 = EXT FAULT 2 

Bit 15 = EARTH FAULT 



335. 

Bit 0 = UNDERLOAD 

Bit 1 = THERM FAIL 

Bit 2…3 = Reserved 

Bit 4 = CURR MEAS 

Bit 5 = SUPPLY PHASE 

Bit 6 = ENCODER ERR 

Bit 7 = OVERSPEED 


Bit 10 = CONFIG FILE 

Bit 11 = SERIAL 1 ERR 

Bit 12 = EFB CON FILE. Configuration file reading error. 

Bit 13 = FORCE TRIP 

Bit 14 = MOTOR PHASE 

Bit 15 = OUTP WIRING 



335. 

Bit 0…2 Reserved 

Bit 3 = INCOMPATIBLE SW 

Bit 4 = SAFE TORQUE OFF 

Bit 5 = STO1 LOST 

Bit 6 = STO2 LOST 

Bit 7…10 Reserved 

Bit 11 = CB ID ERROR 

Bit 12 = DSP STACK ERROR 

Bit 13 = DSP T1 OVERLOAD…DSP T3 OVERLOAD 

Bit 14 = SERF CORRUPT / SERF MACRO 

Bit 15 = PAR PCU 1 / PAR PCU 2 / PAR HZRPM / PAR AI 

SCALE / PAR AO SCALE / PAR FBUSMISS / PAR 

CUSTOM U/F 



335. 

An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word: 

Write zero to the word. 

Bit 0 = OVERCURRENT 

Bit 1 = OVERVOLTAGE

0309 ALARM WORD 

2 

Bit 2 = UNDERVOLTAGE 

Bit 3 = DIR LOCK 

Bit 4 = IO COMM 



Bit 7 = PANEL LOSS 

Bit 8 = DEVICE OVERTEMP 

Bit 9 = MOTOR TEMP 

Bit 10 = UNDERLOAD 

Bit 11 = MOTOR STALL 

Bit 12 = AUTORESET 







335. 

An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word: 

Write zero to the word. 


Bit 1 = PID SLEEP 

Bit 2 = ID RUN 


Bit 4 = START ENABLE 1 MISSING 

Bit 5 = START ENABLE 2 MISSING 

Bit 6 = EMERGENCY STOP 

Bit 7 = ENCODER ERROR 

Bit 8 = FIRST START 

Bit 9 = INPUT PHASE LOSS 


Bit 12 = MOTOR BACK EMF 

Bit 13 = SAFE TORQUE OFF 


04 FAULT HISTORY Fault history (read-only) 

0401 LAST FAULT Code of the latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing on page 

335 for the codes. 0 = Fault history is clear (on panel display 

= NO RECORD). 

1 = 1 

0402 FAULT TIME 1 Day on which the latest fault occurred. 

Format: Date if the real time clock is operating. / The 

number of days elapsed after the power-on if the real time 

clock is not used, or was not set. 

1 = 1 

days




0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time at which the latest fault occurred. 

Format on the assistant control panel: Real time (hh:mm:ss) 

if the real time clock is operating. / Time elapsed after the 

power-on (hh:mm:ss minus the whole days stated by signal 

0402 FAULT TIME 1) if real time clock is not used, or was 

not set. 

Format on the basic control panel: Time elapsed after 

power-on in 2 second ticks (minus the whole days stated by 

signal 0402 FAULT TIME 1). 30 ticks = 60 seconds. Eg 

value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds (= 514/30). 

1 = 2 s 

0404 SPEED AT FLT Motor speed in rpm at the time the latest fault occurred 1 = 1 rpm 

0405 FREQ AT FLT Frequency in Hz at the time the latest fault occurred 1 = 0.1 Hz 

0406 VOLTAGE AT Intermediate circuit voltage in V DC at the time the latest 1 = 0.1 V 

FLT 

fault occurred 

0407 CURRENT AT 

FLT 

Motor current in A at the time the latest fault occurred 1 = 0.1 A 

0408 TORQUE AT Motor torque in percent of the motor nominal torque at the 1 = 0.1% 

FLT 

time the latest fault occurred 

0409 STATUS AT Drive status in hexadecimal format at the time the latest 

FLT 

fault occurred 

0412 PREVIOUS Fault code of the 2nd latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing 1 = 1 

FAULT 1 on page 335 for the codes. 

0413 PREVIOUS Fault code of the 3rd latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing 1 = 1 

FAULT 2 on page 335 for the codes. 

0414 DI 1-5 AT FLT Status of digital inputs DI1…5 at the time the latest fault 

occurred (binary). 

Example: 10000 = DI1 is on, DI2…DI5 are off.

Parameters 

All parameters 


No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq 

10 START/STOP/DIR The sources for external start, stop and direction control 

1001 EXT1 

COMMANDS 

Defines the connections and the source for the start, stop 

and direction commands for external control location 1 

(EXT1). 

Note: Start signal must be reset if the drive has been 

stopped through STO (Safe torque off) input (see parameter 

3025 STO OPERATION) or emergency stop selection (see 

parameter 2109 EMERG STOP SEL). 

NOT SEL No start, stop and direction command source 0 

DI1 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop, 1 = start. 

Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION 

(setting REQUEST = FORWARD). 

1 

DI1,2 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop, 1 = start. 

Direction through digital input DI2. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. 

To control direction, parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting 

must be REQUEST. 

DI1P,2P Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. (In order to 

start the drive, digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the 

pulse fed to DI1.) 

Pulse stop through digital input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction 

of rotation is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION 


Note: When the stop input (DI2) is deactivated (no input), 

the control panel start and stop keys are disabled. 

DI1P,2P,3 Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. (In order to 

start the drive, digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the 

pulse fed to DI1.) 

Pulse stop through digital input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction 

through digital input DI3. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control 

direction, parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be 

REQUEST. 



DI1P,2P,3P Pulse start forward through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start 

forward. Pulse start reverse through digital input DI2. 0 -> 1: 

Start reverse. (In order to start the drive, digital input DI3 

must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1/DI2). Pulse 

stop through digital input DI3. 1 -> 0: Stop. To control the 

direction, parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be 

REQUEST. 



DI1,2 

2 

3 

4 

5




KEYPAD Start, stop and direction commands through control panel 

when EXT1 is active. To control the direction, parameter 

1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST. 

DI1F,2R Start, stop and direction commands through digital inputs 

DI1 and DI2. 

DI1 DI2 Operation 

0 0 Stop 

1 0 Start forward 

0 1 Start reverse 

1 1 Stop 

Parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST. 

COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the start and stop 

commands, ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 

0…1. The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller 

through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus 

(Modbus) to the drive. For the control word bits, see section 

DCU communication profile on page 320. 

TIMED FUNC 1 Timed start/stop control. Timed function 1 active = start, 

timed function 1 inactive = stop. See parameter group 36 

TIMED FUNCTIONS. 

TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1. 12 



DI5 Start and stop through digital input DI5. 0 = stop, 1 = start. 

Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION 


20 

DI5,4 Start and stop through digital input DI5. 0 = stop, 1 = start. 

Direction through digital input DI4. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. 

To control direction, parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be 

REQUEST. 

TIMER STOP Stop when timer delay defined by parameter 1901 TIMER 

DELAY has passed. Start with timer start signal. Source for 

the signal is selected by parameter 1902 TIMER START. 

TIMER START Start when timer delay defined by parameter 1901 TIMER 

DELAY has passed. Stop when timer is reset by parameter 

1903 TIMER RESET. 

COUNTER 

STOP 

COUNTER 

START 

Stop when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 

COUNTER LIMIT has been exceeded. Start with counter 

start signal. Source for the signal is selected by parameter 

1911 CNTR S/S COMMAND. 

Start when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 

COUNTER LIMIT has been exceeded. Stop with counter 

stop signal. Source for the signal is selected by parameter 

1911 CNTR S/S COMMAND. 

8 

9 

10 

11 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25




SEQ PROG Start, stop and direction commands through Sequence 

programming. See parameter group 84 SEQUENCE 

PROG. 

1002 EXT2 

COMMANDS 

Defines the connections and the source for the start, stop 

and direction commands for external control location 2 

(EXT2). 

26 

NOT SEL 

1003 DIRECTION 

See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS. 

Enables the control of rotation direction of the motor, or fixes REQUES 

the direction. 

T 

FORWARD Fixed to forward 1 

REVERSE Fixed to reverse 2 

REQUEST Control of rotation direction allowed 3 

1010 JOGGING SEL Defines the signal that activates the jogging function. See 

section Control of a mechanical brake on page 157. 

NOT SEL 

DI1 Digital input DI1. 0 = jogging inactive, 1 = jogging active. 1 

DI2 See selection DI1. 2 




COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for jogging 1 or 2 

activation, ie control word 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bits 20 

and 21. The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller 

through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus 

(Modbus) to the drive. For the control word bits, see section 

DCU communication profile on page 320. 

6 

NOT SEL Not selected 0 

DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 1 = jogging inactive, 0 = jogging 

active. 

-1 

DI2(INV) See selection DI1(INV). -2 




11 REFERENCE Panel reference type, external control location selection and 

SELECT 

external reference sources and limits 

1101 KEYPAD REF 

SEL 

Selects the type of the reference in local control mode. REF1(Hz/ 

rpm) 

REF1(Hz/rpm) Frequency reference in rpm. Frequency reference (Hz) if 

parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: 

FREQ. 

1 

REF2(%) %-reference 2 


SEL 

Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal 

that selects between the two external control locations, 

EXT1 or EXT2. 

EXT1




EXT1 EXT1 active. The control signal sources are defined by 

parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1103 REF1 

SELECT. 

DI1 Digital input DI1. 0 = EXT1, 1 = EXT2. 1 





EXT2 EXT2 active. The control signal sources are defined by 

parameters 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1106 REF2 

SELECT. 

7 

COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for EXT1/EXT2 selection, 

ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5 (with ABB 

drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 11). The control word is 

sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter 

or embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the drive. For the control 

word bits, see sections DCU communication profile on page 

320 and ABB drives communication profile on page 315. 

TIMED FUNC 1 Timed EXT1/EXT2 control selection. Timed function 1 active 

= EXT2, timed function 1 inactive = EXT1. See parameter 

group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS. 




DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 1 = EXT1, 0 = EXT2. -1 





1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1. See 

section Block diagram: Reference source for EXT1 on page 

127. 

AI1 

KEYPAD Control panel 0 

AI1 Analog input AI1 1 


0 

8 

9




AI1/JOYST Analog input AI1 as joystick. The minimum input signal runs 

the motor at the maximum reference in the reverse 

direction, the maximum input at the maximum reference in 

the forward direction. Minimum and maximum references 

are defined by parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1105 REF1 

MAX. 

Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 

REQUEST. 

Speed ref 

(REF1) 

1105 

1104 

0 

-1104 

-1105 

par. 1301 = 20%, par 1302 = 100% 

1104 -2% 

-1104 

WARNING! If parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 is set to 

0 V and analog input signal is lost (ie 0 V), the 

rotation of the motor is reversed to the maximum reference. 

Set the following parameters to activate a fault when analog 

input signal is lost: 

Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 to 20% (2 V or 4 mA). 

Set parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT to 5% or higher. 

Set parameter 3001 AI




DI3U,4D(RNC) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 

Reference decrease. Stop command resets the reference to 

zero. 

The reference is not saved if the control source is changed 

(from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to 

REM). Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate 

of the reference change. 

11 

DI3U,4D(NC) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 

Reference decrease. 

The program stores the active speed reference (not reset by 

a stop command). The reference is not saved if the control 

source is changed (from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 

or from LOC to REM). When the drive is restarted, the motor 

ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored 

reference. Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the 

rate of the reference change. 

12 

AI1+AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 

REF = AI1(%) + AI2(%) - 50% 

14 

AI1*AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 

REF = AI1(%) · (AI2(%) / 50%) 

15 

AI1-AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 

REF = AI1(%) + 50% - AI2(%) 

16 

AI1/AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 

REF = AI1(%) · (50% / AI2 (%)) 

17 

KEYPAD(RNC) Defines the control panel as the reference source. Stop 

command resets the reference to zero (the R stands for 

reset). The reference is not saved if the control source is 

changed (from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1). 

20 

KEYPAD(NC) Defines the control panel as the reference source. Stop 

command does not reset the reference to zero. The 

reference is stored. The reference is not saved if the control 

source is changed (from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to 

EXT1). 

21 

DI4U,5D See selection DI3U,4D. 30 

DI4U,5D(NC) See selection DI3U,4D(NC). 31 

FREQ INPUT Frequency input 32 

SEQ PROG Sequence programming output. See parameter 8420 ST1 

REF SEL. 

33 

AI1+SEQ Addition of analog input AI1 and Sequence programming 34 

PROG output 

AI2+SEQ Addition of analog input AI2 and Sequence programming 35 

PROG output 

1104 REF1 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF1. 0.0 Hz / 

Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source 

signal. 

1rpm


0.0…500.0 Hz / 

0…30000 rpm 



Minimum value in rpm. Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 


Example: Analog input AI1 is selected as the reference 

source (value of parameter 1103 is AI1). The reference 

minimum and maximum correspond to the 1301 MINIMUM 

AI1 and 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 settings as follows: 

1105 REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1. 

Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source 

signal. 

0.0…500.0 Hz / 

0…30000 rpm 

REF1 MAX 

(1105) 

REF1 MIN 

(1104) 

-REF1 MIN 

(1104) 

-REF1 MAX 

(1105) 

REF (Hz/rpm) 

1302 1301 

AI1 signal (%) 

1301 1302 

Maximum value in rpm. Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR 

CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ. See the example 

for parameter 1104 REF1 MIN. 

1106 REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2. AI2 

KEYPAD See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 0 

AI1 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 1 

AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 2 

AI1/JOYST See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 3 

AI2/JOYST See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 4 

DI3U,4D(R) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 5 

DI3U,4D See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 6 

COMM See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 8 

COMM+AI1 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 9 

COMM*AI1 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 10 

DI3U,4D(RNC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 11 

DI3U,4D(NC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 12 

AI1+AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 14 

AI1*AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 15 

AI1-AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 16 

AI1/AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 17 

PID1OUT PID controller 1 output. See parameter groups 

40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and 41 PROCESS PID SET 2. 

19 

1 = 0.1 Hz 

/ 1 rpm 

E: 50.0 Hz 

U: 60.0 Hz 

1 = 0.1 Hz 

/ 1 rpm




KEYPAD(RNC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 20 

KEYPAD(NC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 21 

DI4U,5D See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 30 

DI4U,5D(NC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 31 

FREQ INPUT See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 32 

SEQ PROG See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 33 

AI1+SEQ 

PROG 

See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 34 

AI2+SEQ 

PROG 

See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 35 

1107 REF2 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2. 

Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source 

signal. 

0.0% 

0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the maximum frequency / maximum 

speed / nominal torque. See the example for parameter 

1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal 

limits. 

1108 REF2 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2. 

Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source 

signal. 

0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the maximum frequency / maximum 

speed / nominal torque. See the example for parameter 

1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal 

limits. 

12 CONSTANT 

SPEEDS 

1201 CONST 

SPEED SEL 

Constant speed selection and values. See section Constant 

speeds on page 140. 

Activates the constant speeds or selects the activation 

signal. 

NOT SEL No constant speed in use 0 

DI1 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 

activated through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 

1 



2 



3 



4 



5 

1 = 0.1% 

100.0% 

1 = 0.1% 

DI3,4




DI1,2 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1 and 

DI2.1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive. 


0 0 No constant speed 

1 0 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST SPEED 1 



DI2,3 See selection DI1,2. 8 



DI1,2,3 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1, DI2 and 12 

DI3. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive. 

DI DI2 DI3 Operation 

0 0 0 No constant speed 

1 0 0 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST SPEED 1 







DI3,4,5 See selection DI1,2,3. 13 

TIMED FUNC 1 External speed reference, speed defined by parameter 

1202 CONST SPEED 1 or speed defined by parameter 

1203 CONST SPEED 2 is used, depending on the selection 

of parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL and the state of 

timed function 1. See parameter group 36 TIMED 

FUNCTIONS. 

15 




TIMED External speed reference or speed defined by parameter 19 

FUN1&2 1202 CONST SPEED 1 … 1205 CONST SPEED 4 is used, 

depending on the selection of parameter 1209 TIMED 

MODE SEL and the state of timed functions 1 and 2. See 

parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS. 

DI1(INV) Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 

activated through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = 

inactive. 



inactive. 

7 

-1 

-2






inactive. 



inactive. 



inactive. 

DI1,2(INV) Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1 

and DI2. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive. 

DI2,3(INV) See selection DI1,2(INV). -8 



DI1,2,3(INV) Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1, -12 

DI2 and DI3. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive. 

DI3,4,5(INV) See selection DI1,2,3(INV). -13 

1202 CONST 

SPEED 1 

Defines constant speed (or drive output frequency) 1. E: 5.0 Hz 

U: 6.0 Hz 

0.0…500.0 Hz Speed in rpm. Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 

MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ. 

1203 CONST 

SPEED 2 

0.0…500.0 Hz / 

0…30000 rpm 

1204 CONST 

SPEED 3 

0.0…500.0 Hz / 

0…30000 rpm 


1 1 No constant speed 




DI DI2 DI3 Operation 

1 1 1 No constant speed 








-3 

-4 

-5 

-7 

1 = 0.1 Hz 

/ 1 rpm 


U: 12.0 Hz 

Speed in rpm. Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 


1 = 0.1 Hz 

/ 1 rpm 


U: 18.0 Hz 



1 = 0.1 Hz 

/ 1 rpm

1205 CONST 

SPEED 4 

0.0…500.0 Hz / 

0…30000 rpm 

1206 CONST 

SPEED 5 




0.0…500.0 Hz / 

0…30000 rpm 

1207 CONST 

SPEED 6 

0.0…500.0 Hz / 

0…30000 rpm 

1208 CONST 

SPEED 7 

0.0…500.0 Hz / 

0…30000 rpm 


U: 24.0 Hz 



1 = 0.1 Hz 

/ 1 rpm 


U: 30.0 Hz 



1 = 0.1 Hz 

/ 1 rpm 


U: 48.0 Hz 


MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ. Constant 

speed 6 is used also as jogging speed. See section Control 

of a mechanical brake on page 157. 

Defines constant speed (or drive output frequency) 7. 

Constant speed 7 is used also as jogging speed (see 

section Control of a mechanical brake on page 157) or with 

fault functions (3001 AI




1209 TIMED MODE 

SEL 

Selects timed function activated speed. Timed function can 

be used to change between the external reference and 

constant speeds when parameter 1201 CONST SPEED 

SEL selection is TIMED FUNC 1 … TIMED FUNC 4 or 

TIMED FUN1&2. 

EXT/CS1/2/3 When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL = TIMED 

FUNC 1 … TIMED FUNC 4, this timed function selects an 

external speed reference or constant speed. 1 = timed 

function active, 0 = timed function inactive. 

Timed function 1…4 Operation 

0 External reference 

1 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST 

SPEED 1 

When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL = TIMED 

FUN1&2, timed functions 1 and 2 select an external speed 

reference or constant speed. 1 = timed function active, 0 = 

timed function inactive. 

Timed Timed Operation 

function 1 function 2 

0 0 External reference 

1 0 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST 

SPEED 1 


SPEED 2 


SPEED 3 

CS1/2/3/4 

1




CS1/2/3/4 When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL = TIMED 

FUNC 1 … TIMED FUNC 4, this timed function selects a 

constant speed. 1 = timed function active, 0 = timed 

function inactive. 

Timed function 1…4 Operation 

0 Speed defined by parameter 1202 

CONST SPEED 1 

1 Speed defined by parameter 1203 

CONST SPEED 2 

When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL = TIMED 

FUN1&2, timed functions 1 and 2 select a constant speed. 

1 = timed function active, 0 = timed function inactive. 

Timed Timed Operation 

function 1 function 2 

0 0 Speed defined by parameter 1202 

CONST SPEED 1 


CONST SPEED 2 


CONST SPEED 3 


CONST SPEED 4 

13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input signal processing 

1301 MINIMUM AI1 Defines the minimum %-value that corresponds to minimum 

mA/(V) signal for analog input AI1. When used as a 

reference, the value corresponds to the reference minimum 

setting. 

0…20 mA = 0…100% 

4…20 mA = 20…100% 

-10…10 mA = 

-50…50% 

Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external 

reference REF1, this value corresponds to the value of 

parameter 1104 REF1 MIN. 

Note: MINIMUM AI1 value must not exceed MAXIMUM AI1 

value. 

-100.0…100.0% Value in percent of the full signal range. 

Example: If the minimum value for analog input is 4 mA, the 

percent value for 0…20 mA range is: 

(4 mA / 20 mA) · 100% = 20% 

2 

1.0% 

1 = 0.1%




1302 MAXIMUM AI1 Defines the maximum %-value that corresponds to 

maximum mA/(V) signal for analog input AI1. When used as 

a reference, the value corresponds to the reference 

maximum setting. 

0…20 mA = 0…100% 

4…20 mA = 20…100% 

-10…10 mA = -50…50% 

Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external 

reference REF1, this value corresponds to the value of 

parameter 1105 REF1 MAX. 

-100.0…100.0% Value in percent of the full signal range. 

Example: If the maximum value for analog input is 10 mA, 

the percent value for 0…20 mA range is: 

(10 mA / 20 mA) · 100% = 50% 

1303 FILTER AI1 Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI1, ie the 

time within which 63% of a step change is reached. 

% 

Unfiltered signal 

100 

63 

Time constant 

Filtered signal 

100.0% 

1 = 0.1% 

0.1 s 

0.0…10.0 s Filter time constant 1 = 0.1 s 

1304 MINIMUM AI2 Defines the minimum %-value that corresponds to minimum 1.0% 

mA/(V) signal for analog input AI2. See parameter 1301 

MINIMUM AI1. 

-100.0…100.0% See parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1. 1 = 0.1% 

1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Defines the maximum %-value that corresponds to 

maximum mA/(V) signal for analog input AI2. See 

parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1. 

100.0% 

-100.0…100.0% See parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1. 1 = 0.1% 

1306 FILTER AI2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI2. See 

parameter 1303 FILTER AI1. 

0.1 s 


t




14 RELAY OUTPUTS Status information indicated through relay output, and relay 

operating delays. 

Note: Relay outputs 2…4 are available only if the MREL-01 

relay output extension module is connected to the drive. 

See MREL-01 relay output extension module user's manual 

(3AUA0000035974 [English]). 

1401 RELAY 

OUTPUT 1 

Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO 1. 

The relay energizes when the status meets the setting. 

NOT SEL Not used 0 

READY Ready to function: Run enable signal on, no fault, supply 

voltage within acceptable range and emergency stop signal 

off. 

1 

RUN Running: Start signal on, Run enable signal on, no active 

fault. 

2 

FAULT(-1) Inverted fault. Relay is de-energized on a fault trip. 3 

FAULT Fault 4 

ALARM Alarm 5 

REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction. 6 

STARTED The drive has received start command. Relay is energized 

even if Run enable signal is off. Relay is de-energized when 

drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs. 

7 

SUPRV1 

OVER 

SUPRV1 

UNDER 

SUPRV2 

OVER 

SUPRV2 

UNDER 

SUPRV3 

OVER 

SUPRV3 

UNDER 

Status according to supervision parameters 3201…3203. 

See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION. 

See selection SUPRV1 OVER. 9 







AT SET POINT Output frequency is equal to the reference frequency. 14 

FAULT(RST) Fault. Automatic reset after the autoreset delay. See 

parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET. 

15 

FLT/ALARM Fault or alarm 16 

EXT CTRL Drive is under external control. 17 

REF 2 SEL External reference REF 2 is in use. 18 

CONST FREQ A constant speed is in use. See parameter group 12 

CONSTANT SPEEDS. 

19 

REF LOSS Reference or active control location is lost. 20 

OVERCURRE 

NT 

Alarm/Fault by overcurrent protection function 21 

FAULT(-1) 

8 

10 

12




OVERVOLTAG 

E 

Alarm/Fault by overvoltage protection function 22 

DRIVE TEMP Alarm/Fault by drive overtemperature protection function 23 

UNDERVOLTA 

GE 

Alarm/Fault by undervoltage protection function 24 

AI1 LOSS Analog input AI1 signal is lost. 25 

AI2 LOSS Analog input AI2 signal is lost. 26 

MOTOR TEMP Alarm/Fault by motor overtemperature protection function. 

See parameter 3005 MOT THERM PROT. 

27 

STALL Alarm/Fault by stall protection function. See parameter 3010 28 

STALL FUNCTION. 

UNDERLOAD Alarm/Fault by underload protection function. See 

parameter 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNC. 

29 

PID SLEEP PID sleep function. See parameter group 40 PROCESS PID 30 

SET 1 / 41 PROCESS PID SET 2. 

FLUX READY Motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque. 33 

USER MACRO User macro 2 is active. 

2 

34 

COMM Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD. 0 = deenergize 

output, 1 = energize output. 

35 

0134 Binary RO4 RO3 RO2 DO RO1 

value (MREL) (MREL) (MREL) 

0 00000 0 0 0 0 0 

1 00001 0 0 0 0 1 

2 00010 0 0 0 1 0 

3 00011 0 0 0 1 1 

4 00100 0 0 1 0 0 

5…30 … … … … … … 

31 11111 1 1 1 1 1 

COMM(-1) Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD. 0 = deenergize 

output, 1 = energize output. 

0134 Binary RO4 RO3 RO2 DO RO1 

value (MREL) (MREL) (MREL) 

0 00000 1 1 1 1 1 

1 00001 1 1 1 1 0 

2 00010 1 1 1 0 1 

3 00011 1 1 1 0 0 

4 00100 1 1 0 1 1 

5…30 … … … … … … 

31 11111 0 0 0 0 0 

TIMED FUNC 1 Timed function 1 is active. See parameter group 36 TIMED 

FUNCTIONS. 


FUNCTIONS. 

36 

37 

38





FUNCTIONS. 

39 


FUNCTIONS. 

40 

M.TRIG FAN Cooling fan running time counter is triggered. See 

parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG. 

41 

M.TRIG REV Revolutions counter is triggered. See parameter group 29 

MAINTENANCE TRIG. 

42 

M.TRIG RUN Run time counter is triggered. See parameter group 29 


43 

M.TRIG MWH MWh counter is triggered. See parameter group 29 


44 

SEQ PROG Relay output control with Sequence programming. See 

parameter 8423 ST1 OUT CONTROL. 

50 

MBRK On/Off control of a mechanical brake. See parameter group 51 

43 MECH BRK CONTROL. 

JOG ACTIVE Jogging function active. See parameter 1010 JOGGING 

SEL. 

52 

STO STO (Safe torque off) has been triggered. 57 

STO(-1) STO (Safe torque off) is inactive and the drive operates 

normally. 

58 

1402 RELAY 

OUTPUT 2 

1403 RELAY 

OUTPUT 3 

See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1. Available only if 

the MREL-01 relay output extension module is connected to 

the drive. 



the drive. 

NOT SEL 

NOT SEL 

1404 RO 1 ON 

DELAY 

Defines the operation delay for relay output RO 1. 0.0 s 

0.0…3600.0 s Delay time. The figure below illustrates the operation (on) 

and release (off) delays for relay output RO. 

1 = 0.1 s 

Control event 

Relay status 

1404 On delay 1405 Off delay 

1405 RO 1 OFF 

DELAY 

Defines the release delay for relay output RO 1. 0.0 s 

0.0…3600.0 s Delay time. See the figure for parameter 1404 RO 1 ON 

DELAY. 

1 = 0.1 s




1406 RO 2 ON 

DELAY 

1407 RO 2 OFF 

DELAY 

1408 RO 3 ON 

DELAY 

1409 RO 3 OFF 

DELAY 

1410 RELAY 

OUTPUT 4 

1413 RO 4 ON 

DELAY 

1414 RO 4 OFF 

DELAY 

15 ANALOG 

OUTPUTS 

See parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY. 0.0 s 

See parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY. 0.0 s 





the drive. 

NOT SEL 



Selection of the actual signals to be indicated through 

analog output and output signal processing. 

1501 AO1 

Connects a drive signal to analog output AO. 

CONTENT SEL 

103 

x…x Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. Eg 102 = 

0102 SPEED. 

1502 AO1 

CONTENT MIN 

Defines the minimum value for the signal selected with 

parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL. 

AO minimum and maximum correspond to the 1504 

MINIMUM AO1 and 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 settings as 

follows: 

x…x Setting range depends on the parameter 1501 AO1 

CONTENT SEL setting. 

1503 AO1 

CONTENT 

MAX 

1505 

1504 

AO (mA) AO (mA) 

1505 

1502 1503 

AO 

content 

1504 

1503 1502 AO 

content 

Defines the maximum value for the signal selected with 

parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL. See the figure for 

parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN. 

x…x Setting range depends on the parameter 1501 AO1 

CONTENT SEL setting. 

- 

1504 MINIMUM AO1 Defines the minimum value for the analog output signal AO. 0.0 mA 

See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN. 

0.0…20.0 mA Minimum value 1 = 

0.1 mA 

- 

- 

-


1505 MAXIMUM 

AO1 



Defines the maximum value for the analog output signal AO. 

See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN. 

20.0 mA 

0.0…20.0 mA Maximum value 1 = 

0.1 mA 

1506 FILTER AO1 Defines the filter time constant for analog output AO, ie the 

time within which 63% of a step change is reached. See the 

figure for parameter 1303 FILTER AI1. 

0.1 s 


16 SYSTEM 

CONTROLS 

Parameter view, Run enable, parameter lock etc. 

1601 RUN ENABLE Selects a source for the external Run enable signal. NOT SEL 

NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external Run enable 

signal. 

0 

DI1 External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = Run 

enable. If Run enable signal is switched off, the drive will not 

start or coasts to stop if it is running. 

1 





COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for inverted Run enable 

signal (Run disable), ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 

1 bit 6 (with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 3). The 

control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the 

fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the 

drive. For the control word bits, see sections DCU 

communication profile on page 320 and ABB drives 

communication profile on page 315. 

7 

DI1(INV) External signal required through inverted digital input DI1. 0 -1 

= Run enable. If Run enable signal is switched on, the drive 

will not start or coasts to stop if it is running. 





1602 PARAMETER Selects the state of the parameter lock. The lock prevents OPEN 

LOCK parameter changing from the control panel. 

LOCKED Parameter values cannot be changed from the control 

panel. The lock can be opened by entering the valid code to 

parameter 1603 PASS CODE. 

The lock does not prevent parameter changes made by 

macros or fieldbus. 

0 

OPEN The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed. 1




NOT SAVED Parameter changes from the control panel are not stored 

into the permanent memory. To store changed parameter 

values, set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE value to 

SAVE…. 

1603 PASS CODE Selects the pass code for the parameter lock (see 

parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK). 

0…65535 Pass code. Setting 358 opens the lock. The value reverts 

back to 0 automatically. 

1604 FAULT RESET 

SEL 

Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal 

resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no 

longer exists. 

KEYPAD Fault reset only from the control panel 0 

DI1 Reset through digital input DI1 (reset on the rising edge of 

DI1) or from the control panel 

1 





START/STOP Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital 

input, or from the control panel. 

Note: Do not use this option when start, stop and direction 

commands are received through fieldbus communication. 

7 

COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the fault reset signal, ie 

control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 (with ABB drives 

profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 7). The control word is sent by 

the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter or 

embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the drive. For the control 

word bits, see sections DCU communication profile on page 

320 and ABB drives communication profile on page 315. 

DI1(INV) Reset through inverted digital input DI1 (reset on the falling 

edge of DI1) or from the control panel 

-1 





2 

0 

1 = 1 

KEYPAD 

8


1605 USER PAR 

SET CHG 



Enables the change of the User parameter set through a 

digital input. See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO. The 

change is only allowed when the drive is stopped. During 

the change, the drive will not start. 

Note: Always save the User parameter set with parameter 

9902 after changing any parameter setting, or reperforming 

the motor identification. The last settings saved by the user 

are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and 

on again or the parameter 9902 setting is changed. Any 

unsaved changes will be lost. 

Note: The value of this parameter is not included in the 

User parameter sets. A setting once made remains despite 

User parameter set change. 

Note: Selection of User parameter set 2 can be supervised 

through relay outputs RO 1…4 and digital output DO. See 

parameters 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 … 1403 RELAY 

OUTPUT 3, 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 and 1805 DO 

SIGNAL. 

NOT SEL User parameter set change is not possible through a digital 

input. Parameter sets can be changed only from the control 

panel. 

DI1 User parameter set control through digital input DI1. Falling 

edge of digital input DI1: User parameter set 1 is loaded into 

use. Rising edge of digital input DI1: User parameter set 2 is 

loaded into use. 





DI1,2 User parameter set selection through digital inputs DI1 and 

DI2. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive. 

7 

DI1 DI2 User parameter set 

0 0 User parameter set 1 






DI1(INV) User parameter set control through inverted digital input 

DI1. Falling edge of inverted digital input DI1: User 

parameter set 2 is loaded into use. Rising edge of inverted 

digital input DI1: User parameter set 1 is loaded into use. 

-1 



NOT SEL 

0 

1





DI1,2(INV) User parameter set selection through inverted digital inputs 

DI1 and DI2. 1 = DI inactive, 0 =DI active. 

-7 

DI1 DI2 User parameter set 




DI2,3(INV) See selection DI1,2. -8 



1606 LOCAL LOCK Disables entering local control mode or selects the source 

for the local control mode lock signal. When local lock is 

active, entering the local control mode is disabled 

(LOC/REM key of the panel). 

NOT SEL 

NOT SEL Local control is allowed. 0 

DI1 Local control mode lock signal through digital input DI1. 

Rising edge of digital input DI1: Local control disabled. 

Falling edge of digital input DI1: Local control allowed. 

1 





ON Local control is disabled. 7 

COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the local lock, ie control 8 

word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 14. The control word is 

sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter 

or embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the drive. For the control 

word bits, see section DCU communication profile on page 

320. 

Note: This setting applies only for the DCU profile. 

DI1(INV) Local lock through inverted digital input DI1. Rising edge of 

inverted digital input DI1: Local control allowed. Falling edge 

of inverted digital input DI1: Local control disabled. 





1607 PARAM SAVE Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent 

memory. 

Note: A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved 

automatically when changed from the panel but not when 

altered through a fieldbus connection. 

DONE 

DONE Saving completed 0 

-1




SAVE… Saving in progress 1 

1608 START 

ENABLE 1 

Selects the source for the Start enable 1 signal. 

Note: Functionality of the Start enable signal is different 

from the Run enable signal. 

Example: External damper control application using Start 

enable and Run enable. Motor can start only after the 

damper is fully open. 

Relay 

deenergized 

Damper 

closed 

Drive started 

Motor 

speed 

Relay energized 

Damper 

opening 

time 

Damper open 

Start enable 

signals 

(1608 and 1609) 

Damper 

closed 

Damper 

closing 

time 

Acceleration 

time (2202) Deceleration 

time (2203) 

Start/Stop 

command 

(group 10) 

Started 

output status 

(group 14) 

Damper 

status 

Run enable signal 

from the damper end 

switch when the 

damper is fully 

opened. (1601) 

Motor 

status 

NOT SEL Start enable signal is on. 0 

DI1 External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = Start 

enable. If Start enable signal is switched off, the drive will 

not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and alarm START 

ENABLE 1 MISSING (2021) is activated 

1 





NOT SEL




COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the inverted Start 

enable (Start disable) signal, ie control word 0302 FB CMD 

WORD 2 bit 18 (bit 19 for Start enable 2). The control word 

is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus 

adapter or embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the drive. For 

the control word bits, see section DCU communication 

profile on page 320. 


7 

DI1(INV) External signal required through inverted digital input DI1. 0 

= Start enable. If Start enable signal is switched off, the 

drive will not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and 

alarm START ENABLE 1 MISSING (2021) is activated. 

-1 





1609 START Selects the source for the Start enable 2 signal. See NOT SEL 

ENABLE 2 parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1. 

See parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1. 

1610 DISPLAY 

ALARMS 

Activates/deactivates alarms OVERCURRENT (2001), 

OVERVOLTAGE (2002), UNDERVOLTAGE (2003) and 

DEVICE OVERTEMP (2009). For more information, see 

chapter Fault tracing on page 335. 

NO 

NO Alarms are inactive. 0 

YES Alarms are active. 1 

1611 PARAMETER Selects the parameter view, ie which parameters are shown. DEFAULT 

VIEW 

Note: This parameter is visible only when it is activated by 

the optional FlashDrop device. FlashDrop is designed for 

fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives. It allows for 

easy customization of the parameter list, eg selected 

parameters can be hidden. For more information, see 

MFDT-01 FlashDrop user’s manual (3AFE68591074 

[English]). 

FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting 

parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 31 (LOAD FD SET). 

DEFAULT Complete long and short parameter lists 0 

FLASHDROP FlashDrop parameter list. Does not include short parameter 1 

list. Parameters which are hidden by the FlashDrop device 

are not visible. 

1612 FAN 

CONTROL 

Selects the fan to be switched on and off automatically or 

keeps the fan on all the time. 

When the drive is used in ambient temperatures of 35 °C 

and above, it is recommended to have the cooling fan 

always on (selection ON). 

AUTO




AUTO Automatic fan control. The fan is switched on when the drive 0 

is modulating. After the drive has stopped, the fan stays on 

until the temperature of the drive has dropped below 55 °C. 

The fan then remains switched off until either the drive is 

started or the temperature increases above 65 °C. 

If the control board is powered from an external 24 V power 

supply, the fan is switched off. 

ON Fan always on 1 

18 FREQ IN & TRAN 

OUT 

Frequency input and transistor output signal processing. 

1801 FREQ INPUT Defines the minimum input value when DI5 is used as a 0Hz 

MIN 

frequency input. See section Frequency input on page 133. 

0…16000 Hz Minimum frequency 1 = 1 Hz 

1802 FREQ INPUT Defines the maximum input value when DI5 is used as a 1000 Hz 

MAX 

frequency input. See section Frequency input on page 133. 

0…16000 Hz Maximum frequency 1 = 1 Hz 

1803 FILTER FREQ 

IN 

Defines the filter time constant for frequency input, ie the 

time within which 63% of a step change is reached. See 

section Frequency input on page 133. 

0.1 s 


1804 TO MODE Selects the operation mode for the transistor output TO. 

See section Transistor output on page 134. 

DIGITAL 

DIGITAL Transistor output is used as a digital output DO. 0 

FREQUENCY Transistor output is used as a frequency output FO. 1 

1805 DO SIGNAL Selects a drive status indicated through digital output DO. 

See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1. 

FAULT(-1) 

1806 DO ON DELAY Defines the operation delay for digital output DO. 0.0 s 

0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s 

1807 DO OFF 

DELAY 

Defines the release delay for digital output DO. 0.0 s 

0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s 

1808 FO CONTENT Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output 104 

SEL 

FO. 


0102 SPEED.




1809 FO CONTENT 

MIN 

Defines the minimum frequency output FO signal value. 

Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL. 

FO minimum and maximum correspond to 1811 MINIMUM 

FO and 1812 MAXIMUM FO settings as follows: 

x…x Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT 

SEL setting. 

1810 FO CONTENT 

MAX 

1812 

1811 

FO FO 

1812 

1809 1810 

FO 

content 

1811 

1809 1810 FO 

content 

Defines the maximum frequency output FO signal value. 

Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL. 

See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN. 

x…x Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT 

SEL setting. 

- 

1811 MINIMUM FO Defines the minimum value for frequency output FO. 10 Hz 

10…16000 Hz Minimum frequency. See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT 

MIN. 

1 = 1 Hz 

1812 MAXIMUM FO Defines the maximum value for frequency output FO. 1000 Hz 

10…16000 Hz Maximum frequency. See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT 

MIN. 

1 = 1 Hz 

1813 FILTER FO Defines the filter time constant for frequency output FO, ie 

the time within which 63% of a step change is reached. 

0.1 s 


19 TIMER & 

COUNTER 

Timer and counter for start and stop control 

1901 TIMER DELAY Defines the time delay for the timer. 10.00 s 

0.01…120.00 s Delay time 1 = 0.01 s 

1902 TIMER START Selects the source for the timer start signal. NOT SEL 

DI1(INV) Timer start through inverted digital input DI1. Timer start on 

the falling edge of digital input DI1. 

Note: Timer start is not possible when reset is active 

(parameter 1903 TIMER RESET). 

-1 





NOT SEL No start signal 0 

- 

- 

-




DI1 Timer start through digital input DI1. Timer start on the rising 

edge of digital input DI1. 

Note: Timer start is not possible when reset is active 

(parameter 1903 TIMER RESET). 





START External start signal, eg start signal through fieldbus 6 

1903 TIMER RESET Selects the source for the timer reset signal. NOT SEL 

DI1(INV) Timer reset through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = -1 

inactive. 





NOT SEL No reset signal 0 

DI1 Timer reset through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1 





START Timer reset at start. Start signal source is selected by 

parameter 1902 TIMER START. 

6 

START (INV) Time reset at start (inverted), ie timer is reset when start 

signal is deactivated. Start signal source is selected by 

parameter 1902 TIMER START. 

7 

RESET External reset, eg reset through fieldbus 8 

1904 COUNTER 

ENABLE 

Selects the source for the counter enable signal. DISABLE 

D 

DI1(INV) Counter enable signal through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = 

active, 1 = inactive. 

-1 





DISABLED No counter enable 0 

DI1 Counter enable signal through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 1 

= inactive. 




1





ENABLED Counter enabled 6 

1905 COUNTER 

LIMIT 

Defines the counter limit. 1000 

0…65535 Limit value 1 = 1 

1906 COUNTER Selects the input signal source for the counter. PLS IN(DI 

INPUT 

5) 

PLS IN(DI 5) Digital input DI5 pulses. When a pulse is detected, the 

counter value increases by 1. 

1 

ENC W/O DIR Encoder pulse edges. When a rising or a falling edge is 

detected, the counter value increases by 1. 

2 

ENC WITH DIR Encoder pulse edges. The direction of rotation is taken into 

account. When a rising or a falling edge is detected and the 

direction of rotation is forward, the counter value increases 

by 1. When the direction of rotation is reverse, the counter 

value decreases by 1. 

3 

FILTERED DI5 Filtered digital input DI5 pulses. When a pulse is detected, 

the counter value increases by 1. 

Note: Due to filtering, the maximum input signal frequency 

is 50 Hz. 

1907 COUNTER 

RESET 

Selects the source for the counter reset signal. NOT SEL 

DI1(INV) Counter reset through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 -1 

= inactive. 






DI1 Counter reset through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = 

inactive. 

1 





AT LIMIT Reset at the limit defined by parameter 1905 COUNTER 

LIMIT 

6 

STRT/STP 

CMD 

Counter reset at start/stop command. Source for the 

start/stop is selected by parameter 1911 CNTR S/S 

COMMAND. 

S/S CMD(INV) Counter reset at start/stop command (inverted), ie counter is 

reset when start/stop command is deactivated. Start signal 

source is selected by parameter 1902 TIMER START. 

4 

7 

8


RESET Reset enabled 9 

1908 COUNTER 

RES VAL 

Defines the value for the counter after reset. 0 

0…65535 Counter value 1 = 1 

1909 COUNT 

DIVIDER 

Defines the divider for the pulse counter. 0 

0…12 Pulse counter divider N. Every 2N All parameters 


bit is counted. 1 = 1 

1910 COUNT 

DIRECTION 

Defines the source for the counter direction selection. UP 

DI1(INV) Counter direction selection through inverted digital input 

DI1. 1 = counts up, 0 = counts down. 

-1 





UP Counts up 0 

DI1 Counter direction selection through digital input DI1. 0 = 

counts up, 1 = counts down. 

1 





DOWN Counts down 6 

1911 CNTR S/S 

COMMAND 

Selects the source for the drive start/stop command when 

parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS value is set to 

COUNTER START / COUNTER STOP. 

NOT SEL 

DI1(INV) Start/stop command through inverted digital input DI1. 

When parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS value is 

COUNTER STOP: 0 = start. Stop when counter limit defined 

by parameter 1905 COUNTER LIMIT has been exceeded. 

When parameter 1001 value is COUNTER START: 0 = 

stop. Start when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 

has been exceeded. 





NOT SEL Not start/stop command source 0 

-1




DI1 Start/stop command through digital input DI1. 

When parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS value is 

COUNTER STOP: 1 = start. Stop when counter limit defined 

by parameter 1905 COUNTER LIMIT has been exceeded. 

When parameter 1001 value is COUNTER START: 1 = 

stop. Start when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 

has been exceeded. 





ACTIVATE External start/stop command, eg through fieldbus 6 

20 LIMITS Drive operation limits. 

Speed values are used in vector control and frequency 

values are used in scalar control. The control mode is 

selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE. 

2001 MINIMUM 

SPEED 

-30000… 

30000 rpm 

2002 MAXIMUM 

SPEED 

Defines the allowed minimum speed. 

A positive (or zero) minimum speed value defines two 

ranges, one positive and one negative. 

A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range. 

Speed 

2002 

0 

2001 

2001 value is < 0 

Allowed 

speed range 

Speed 

2002 

2001 value is > 0 

Allowed 

speed range 

t 

2001 

0 

t 

-(2001) 

-(2002) 

Allowed 

speed range 

1 

0rpm 

Minimum speed 1 = 1 rpm 

Defines the allowed maximum speed. See parameter 2001 

MINIMUM SPEED. 

E: 1500 rpm 

/ 

U: 1800 rpm 

0…30000 rpm Maximum speed 1 = 1 rpm 

2003 MAX 

CURRENT 

Defines the allowed maximum motor current. 1.8 · I2N A 

0.0…1.8 · I2N A Current 1 = 0.1 A


2005 OVERVOLT 

CTRL 



Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the 

intermediate DC link. 

Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise 

to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage 

from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller 

automatically decreases the braking torque. 

Note: If a brake chopper and resistor are connected to the 

drive, the controller must be off (selection DISABLE) to 

allow chopper operation. 

ENABLE 

DISABLE Overvoltage control deactivated 0 

ENABLE Overvoltage control activated 1 

2006 UNDERVOLT 

CTRL 

Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the 

intermediate DC link. 

If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the 

undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the 

motor speed in order to keep the voltage above the lower 

limit. By decreasing the motor speed, the inertia of the load 

will cause regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC 

link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the 

motor coasts to stop. This will act as a power-loss ridethrough 

functionality in systems with a high inertia, such as 

a centrifuge or a fan. See section Motor identification on 

page 135. 

ENABLE( 

TIME) 

DISABLE Undervoltage control deactivated 0 

ENABLE(TIME) Undervoltage control activated. The undervoltage control is 

active for 500 ms. 

1 

ENABLE Undervoltage control activated. No operation time limit. 2 

2007 MINIMUM Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency. 0.0 Hz 

FREQ A positive (or zero) minimum frequency value defines two 

ranges, one positive and one negative. 

A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed 

range. 

Note: MINIMUM FREQ < MAXIMUM FREQ. 

f 

f 

2008 value is < 0 

2008 

Allowed 

2008 

2007 value is > 0 

Allowed 

frequency range 

0 


t 

2007 

0 

t 

-(2007) 

Allowed 

2007 


-(2008) 

-500.0…500.0 Hz Minimum frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz




2008 MAXIMUM 

FREQ 

Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency. E: 50.0 Hz 

U: 60.0 Hz 

0.0…600.0 Hz Maximum frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz 

2013 MIN TORQUE 

SEL 

Selects the minimum torque limit for the drive. MIN 

TORQUE 

1 

MIN TORQUE 

1 

Value defined by parameter 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 0 

DI1 Digital input DI1. 0 = parameter 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 

value. 1 = parameter 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 value. 

1 





COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the torque limit 1/2 

selection, ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 15. 

The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through 

the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the 

drive. For the control word bits, see section DCU 


Minimum torque limit 1 is defined by parameter 2015 MIN 

TORQUE 1 and minimum torque limit 2 is defined by 

parameter 2016 MIN TORQUE 2. 


7 

DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 1 = value of parameter 2015 MIN 

TORQUE 1 1. 0 = value of parameter 2016 MIN TORQUE 

2. 

-1 





2014 MAX TORQUE Selects the maximum torque limit for the drive. MAX 

SEL 

TORQUE 

1 

MAX TORQUE 

1 

Value of parameter 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 

DI1 Digital input DI1. 0 = parameter 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 

value. 1 = parameter 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 value. 

1 




DI5 See selection DI1. 5




COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the torque limit 1/2 

selection, ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 15. 

The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through 

the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the 

drive. For the control word bits, see section DCU 


Maximum torque limit 1 is defined by parameter 2017 MAX 

TORQUE 1 and maximum torque limit 2 is defined by 

parameter 2018 MAX TORQUE 2. 


7 

EXT2 Value of signal 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 11 

DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 1 = parameter 2017 MAX 

TORQUE 1 value. 0 = parameter 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 

value. 

-1 





2015 MIN TORQUE Defines minimum torque limit 1 for the drive. See parameter -300% 

1 

2013 MIN TORQUE SEL. 

-600.0…0.0% Value in percent of the motor nominal torque 1 = 0.1% 

2016 MIN TORQUE Defines minimum torque limit 2 for the drive. See parameter -300% 

2 

2013 MIN TORQUE SEL. 

-600.0…0.0% Value in percent of the motor nominal torque 1 = 0.1% 

2017 MAX TORQUE Defines maximum torque limit 1 for the drive. See 

300% 

1 

parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL. 

0.0…600.0% Value in percent of the motor nominal torque 1 = 0.1% 

2018 MAX TORQUE Defines maximum torque limit 2 for the drive. See 

300% 

2 

parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL. 

0.0…600.0% Value in percent of the motor nominal torque 1 = 0.1% 

2020 BRAKE 

CHOPPER 

Selects the brake chopper control. 

When using the drive in a Common DC bus system, the 

parameter must be set to EXTERNAL. When in Common 

DC, the drive cannot feed or receive more power than PN. INBUILT 

INBUILT Internal brake chopper control. 

Note: Ensure the brake resistor(s) is installed and the 

overvoltage control is switched off by setting parameter 

2005 OVERVOLT CTRL to selection DISABLE. 

EXTERNAL External brake chopper control. 

Note: The drive is compatible only with ABB ACS-BRK-X 

brake units. 

Note: Ensure the brake unit is installed and the overvoltage 

control is switched off by setting parameter 2005 

OVERVOLT CTRL to selection DISABLE. 

0 

1




2021 MAX SPEED 

SEL 

Maximum speed source for torque control PAR 2002 

PAR 2002 Value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 0 

EXT REF 1 Value of signal 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 1 

21 START/STOP Start and stop modes of the motor 

2101 START 

FUNCTION 

Selects the motor starting method. AUTO 

AUTO The drive starts the motor instantly from zero frequency if 

parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: 

FREQ. If flying start is required use selection SCAN START. 

If parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE value is VECTOR: 

SPEED or VECTOR: TORQ, the drive pre-magnetizes the 

motor with DC current before the start. The pre-magnetizing 

time is defined by parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME. See 

selection DC MAGN. 

For permanent magnet motors, flying start is used if the 

motor is rotating. 

1 

DC MAGN The drive pre-magnetizes the motor with DC current before 

the start. The pre-magnetizing time is defined by parameter 

2103 DC MAGN TIME. 

If parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE value is VECTOR: 

SPEED or VECTOR: TORQ, DC magnetizing guarantees 

the highest possible break-away torque when the premagnetizing 

is set long enough. 

Note: Starting the drive connected to a rotating motor is not 

possible when DC MAGN is selected. When a permanent 

magnet motor is used, alarm MOTOR BACK EMF (2029) is 

generated. 

WARNING! The drive will start after the set premagnetizing 

time has passed even if the motor 

magnetization is not completed. In applications where a full 

break-away torque is essential, always ensure that the 

constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow 

generation of full magnetization and torque. 

2




TORQ BOOST Torque boost should be selected if a high break-away 

torque is required. Used only when parameter 9904 


The drive pre-magnetizes the motor with DC current before 

the start. The pre-magnetizing time is defined by parameter 

2103 DC MAGN TIME. 

Torque boost is applied at start. Torque boost is stopped 

when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when it is equal to 

the reference value. See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST 

CURR. 

Note: Starting the drive connected to a rotating motor is not 

possible when TORQ BOOST is selected. 

WARNING! The drive will start after the set premagnetizing 

time has passed although the motor 

magnetization is not completed. In applications where a full 

break-away torque is essential, always ensure that the 

constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow 

generation of full magnetization and torque. 

SCAN START Frequency scanning flying start (starting the drive 

connected to a rotating motor). Based on frequency 

scanning (interval 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ…2007 MINIMUM 

FREQ) to identify the frequency. If frequency identification 

fails, DC magnetization is used (see selection DC MAGN). 

SCAN + 

BOOST 

Combines scanning start (starting the drive connected to a 

rotating motor) and torque boost. See selections SCAN 

START and TORQ BOOST. If frequency identification fails, 

torque boost is used. 

Used only when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 

setting is SCALAR: FREQ. 

2102 STOP 

FUNCTION 

Selects the motor stop function. COAST 

COAST Stop by cutting off the motor power supply. The motor 

coasts to stop. 

1 

RAMP Stop along a ramp. See parameter group 22 

ACCEL/DECEL. 

2 

SPEED COMP Speed compensation is used for constant distance braking. 

Speed difference (between used speed and maximum 

speed) is compensated by running the drive with current 

speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp. See 

section Acceleration and deceleration ramps on page 139. 

3 

4 

6 

7




SPEED COMP 

FWD 

SPEED COMP 

REV 

2103 DC MAGN 

TIME 

Speed compensation is used for constant distance braking if 

the direction of rotation is forward. Speed difference 

(between used speed and maximum speed) is 

compensated by running the drive with current speed before 

the motor is stopped along a ramp. See section 

Acceleration and deceleration ramps on page 139. 

If the direction of rotation is reverse, the drive is stopped 

along a ramp. 

Speed compensation is used for constant distance braking if 

the direction of rotation is reverse. Speed difference 

(between used speed and maximum speed) is 

compensated by running the drive with current speed before 

the motor is stopped along a ramp. See section 

Acceleration and deceleration ramps on page 139. 

If the direction of rotation is forward, the drive is stopped 

along a ramp. 

Defines the pre-magnetizing time. See parameter 2101 

START FUNCTION. After the start command, the drive 

automatically pre-magnetizes the motor for the defined time. 

0.00…10.00 s Magnetizing time. Set this value long enough to allow full 

motor magnetization. Too long a time heats the motor 

excessively. 

4 

5 

0.30 s 

1 = 0.01 s 

2104 DC HOLD CTL Activates the DC hold or DC braking function. NOT SEL 

NOT SEL Inactive 0




DC HOLD DC hold function active. DC hold is not possible if parameter 

9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ. 

When both the reference and the motor speed drop below 

the value of parameter 2105 DC HOLD SPEED, the drive 

will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC 

into the motor. The current is set by parameter 2106 DC 

CURR REF. When the reference speed exceeds parameter 

2105 value, normal drive operation continues. 

Note: DC hold has no effect if the start signal is switched 

off. 

Note: Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor 

to heat up. In applications where long DC hold times are 

required, externally ventilated motors should be used. If the 

DC hold period is long, the DC hold cannot prevent the 

motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the 

motor. 

DC BRAKING DC current braking function active. 

If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is set to COAST, DC 

braking is applied after the start command is removed. 

If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is set to RAMP, DC 

braking is applied after the ramp. 

2105 DC HOLD 

SPEED 

DC hold speed 

Motor speed 

Ref 

DC hold 

Defines the DC hold speed. See parameter 2104 DC HOLD 

CTL. 

1 

2 

5rpm 

0…360 rpm Speed 1 = 1 rpm 

2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC hold current. See parameter 2104 DC 

HOLD CTL. 

30% 

0…100% Value in percent of the motor nominal current (parameter 

9906 MOTOR NOM CURR) 

1 = 1% 

2107 DC BRAKE 

TIME 

Defines the DC brake time. 0.0 s 

0.0…250.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s 

t 

t




2108 START INHIBIT Sets the Start inhibit function on or off. If the drive is not 

actively started and running, the Start inhibit function 

ignores a pending start command in any of the following 

situations and a new start command is required: 

• a fault is reset. 

• Run enable signal activates while the start command is 

active. See parameter 1601 RUN ENABLE. 

• control mode changes from local to remote. 

• external control mode switches from EXT1 to EXT2 or 

from EXT2 to EXT1. 

OFF 

OFF Disabled 0 

ON Enabled 1 

2109 EMERG STOP 

SEL 

Selects the source for the external emergency stop 

command. 

The drive cannot be restarted before the emergency stop 

command is reset. 

Note: The installation must include emergency stop devices 

and any other safety equipment that may be needed. 

Pressing the stop key on the drive’s control panel does 

NOT: 

• generate an emergency stop of the motor 

• separate the drive from dangerous potential. 

NOT SEL 

NOT SEL Emergency stop function is not selected 0 

DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = stop along the emergency stop ramp. 

See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME. 0 = emergency 

stop command reset. 

1 





DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI. 0 = stop along the emergency stop 

ramp. See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME. 1 = 

emergency stop command reset 

-1 





2110 TORQ BOOST Defines the maximum supplied current during torque boost. 100% 

CURR See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION. 

15…300% Value in percent 1 = 1% 

2111 STOP SIGNAL Defines the stop signal delay time when parameter 2102 0ms 

DLY 

STOP FUNCTION is set to SPEED COMP. 

0…10000 ms Delay time 1 = 1 ms


2112 ZERO SPEED 

DELAY 

0.0 = NOT SEL 

0.0…60.0 s 



Defines the delay for the Zero speed delay function. The 

function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick 

restarting is essential. During the delay the drive knows 

accurately the rotor position. 

No Zero speed delay 

The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along 

a ramp. When the motor actual speed falls below an internal 

limit (called Zero speed), the speed controller is switched 

off. The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts 

to standstill. 

With Zero speed delay 

The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along 

a ramp. When the actual motor speed falls below an internal 

limit (called Zero speed), the zero speed delay function 

activates. During the delay the functions keeps the speed 

controller live: The inverter modulates, motor is magnetized 

and the drive is ready for a quick restart. 

Delay time. If parameter value is set to zero, Zero speed 

delay function is disabled. 

22 ACCEL/DECEL Acceleration and deceleration times 

2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 

SEL 

No Zero speed delay With Zero speed delay 

Speed Speed 

Speed controller 

switched off: Motor 


Zero speed 

Speed controller 

remains live. Motor is 

decelerated to true 0 

speed. 

Zero speed 

t t 

Delay 


that selects between the two ramp pairs, 

acceleration/deceleration pair 1 and 2. 

Ramp pair 1 is defined by parameters 2202…2204. 

Ramp pair 2 is defined by parameters 2205…2207. 

NOT SEL Ramp pair 1 is used. 0 

DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = ramp pair 2, 0 = ramp pair 1. 1 





0.0 = 

NOT SEL 

1 = 0.1 s 

DI5




COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for ramp pair 1/2 selection, 

ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 10. The control 

word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus 


the control word bits, see section DCU communication 

profile on page 320. 


SEQ PROG Sequence programming ramp defined by parameter 8422 

ST1 RAMP (or 8423/…/8492) 

10 

DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = ramp pair 2, 1 = ramp pair 1. -1 





2202 ACCELER 

TIME 1 

Defines the acceleration time 1, ie the time required for the 

speed to change from zero to the speed defined by 

parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ (in scalar control) / 2002 

MAXIMUM SPEED (in vector control). The control mode is 


• If the speed reference increases faster than the set 

acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the 

acceleration rate. 

• If the speed reference increases slower than the set 

acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the 

reference signal. 

• If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will 

automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to 

exceed the drive operating limits. 

Actual acceleration time depends on parameter 2204 RAMP 

SHAPE 1 setting. 

7 

5.0 s 

0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s


2203 DECELER 

TIME 1 



Defines the deceleration time 1, ie the time required for the 

speed to change from the value defined by parameter 2008 

MAXIMUM FREQ (in scalar control) / 2002 MAXIMUM 

SPEED (in vector control) to zero. The control mode is 


• If the speed reference decreases slower than the set 

deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the 

reference signal. 

• If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration 

rate, the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate. 

• If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive will 

automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to 

exceed drive operating limits. 

If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia 

application, the drive should be equipped with a brake 

resistor. 

Actual deceleration time depends on parameter 2204 

RAMP SHAPE 1 setting. 

5.0 s 

0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s 

2204 RAMP SHAPE 

1 

0.0 = LINEAR 

0.1…1000.0 s 

Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp 1. 

The function is deactivated during emergency stop and 

jogging. 

0.0: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or 

deceleration and for slow ramps. 

0.1…1000.0 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for 

conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where 

a smooth transition is required when changing from one 

speed to another. The S-curve consists of symmetrical 

curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in 

between. 

A rule of thumb: 

A suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the 

acceleration ramp time is 1/5. 

Speed 

Max 

Linear ramp: Par. 2204 = 0 s 

Par. 2202 

Par. 2204 

S-curve ramp: 

Par. 2204 > 0 s 

t 

0.0 = 

LINEAR 

1 = 0.1 s




2205 ACCELER 

TIME 2 

Defines the acceleration time 2, ie the time required for the 

speed to change from zero to the speed defined by 

parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ (in scalar control) / 2002 

MAXIMUM SPEED (in vector control). The control mode is 


See parameter 2202 ACCELER TIME 1. 

Acceleration time 2 is used also as jogging acceleration 

time. See parameter 1010 JOGGING SEL. 

60.0 s 

0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s 

2206 DECELER 

TIME 2 

Defines the deceleration time 2, ie the time required for the 

speed to change from the value defined by parameter 2008 

MAXIMUM FREQ (in scalar control) / 2002 MAXIMUM 

SPEED (in vector control) to zero. The control mode is 


See parameter 2203 DECELER TIME 1. 

Deceleration time 2 is used also as jogging deceleration 

time. See parameter 1010 JOGGING SEL. 

60.0 s 

0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s 

2207 RAMP SHAPE 

2 

0.0 = LINEAR 

0.1…1000.0 s 

2208 EMERG DEC 

TIME 

Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp 2. 

The function is deactivated during emergency stop. 

During jogging, parameter value is set to zero (ie linear 

ramp). See 1010 JOGGING SEL. 

0.0 = 

LINEAR 

See parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1. 1 = 0.1 s 

Defines the time within which the drive is stopped if an 

emergency stop is activated. See parameter 2109 EMERG 

STOP SEL. 

1.0 s 

0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s 

2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines the source for forcing the ramp input to zero. NOT SEL 


DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = ramp input is forced to zero. Ramp 

output will ramp to zero according to the used ramp time. 

1 





COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for forcing ramp input to 

zero, ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 13 (with 

ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 6). The control 

word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus 


the control word bits, see sections DCU communication 

profile on page 320 and ABB drives communication profile 

on page 315. 

7




DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = ramp input is forced to zero. 

Ramp output will ramp to zero according to the used ramp 

time. 

-1 





23 SPEED 

Speed controller variables. See section Speed controller 

CONTROL 

tuning on page 142. 

Note: These parameters do not affect drive operation in 

scalar control, ie when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 


2301 PROP GAIN Defines a relative gain for the speed controller. High gain 

may cause speed oscillation. 

The figure below shows the speed controller output after an 

error step when the error remains constant. 

Controller 

output = 

K p ·e 

% 

Error 

value 

Gain = K p = 1 

T I = Integration time = 0 

T D= Derivation time = 0 

Controller output 

e = Error 

value 

Note: For automatic setting of the gain, use autotune run 

(parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN). 

5.00 

0.00…200.00 Gain 1 = 0.01 

t




2302 INTEGRATION 

TIME 

Defines an integration time for the speed controller. The 

integration time defines the rate at which the controller 

output changes when the error value is constant. The 

shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error 

value is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the 

control unstable. 



K p ·e 

K p ·e 

% 

Controller output 

T I 


T I = Integration time > 0 

T D= Derivation time = 0 

e = Error value 

Note: For automatic setting of the integration time, use 

autotune run (parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN). 

0.50 s 

0.00…600.00 s Time 1 = 0.01 s 

t


2303 DERIVATION 

TIME 



Defines the derivation time for the speed controller. 

Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error 

value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the 

speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the 

derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI 

controller, otherwise as a PID controller. 

The derivation makes the control more responsive for 

disturbances. 



K p · T D · Δe 

T s 

K p ·e 

K p ·e 

% 

e = Error value 


T I = Integration time > 0 

T D= Derivation time > 0 

T s= Sample time period = 2 ms 

Δe = Error value change between two samples 

Controller 

output 

0ms 

0.…10000 ms Time 1 = 1 ms 

T I 

Error value 

t




2304 ACC 

COMPENSATI 

ON 

Defines the derivation time for acceleration/(deceleration) 

compensation. In order to compensate inertia during 

acceleration, a derivative of the reference is added to the 

output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative 

action is described for parameter 2303 DERIVATION TIME. 

Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value 

between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time 

constants of the motor and the driven machine. (The speed 

controller Autotune run does this automatically, see 

parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN.) 

The figure below shows the speed responses when a high 

inertia load is accelerated along a ramp. 

No acceleration 

compensation 

% % 


Actual speed 

0.00 s 

0.00…600.00 s Time 1 = 0.01 s 

2305 AUTOTUNE 

RUN 

Start automatic tuning of the speed controller. Instructions: 

• Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40% of the 

rated speed. 

• Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON. 

Note: The motor load must be connected to the motor. 

OFF 

OFF No autotuning 0 

ON Activates the speed controller autotuning. The drive 

• accelerates the motor 

• calculates values for proportional gain, integration time 

and acceleration compensation (parameter 2301 PROP 

GAIN, 2302 INTEGRATION TIME and 2304 ACC 

COMPENSATION values). 

Setting is automatically reverted to OFF. 

1 

24 TORQUE 

CONTROL 

Torque control variables 

2401 TORQ RAMP Defines the torque reference ramp up time, ie the minimum 0.00 s 

UP 

time for the reference to increase from zero to the nominal 

motor torque. 

0.00…120.00 s Time 1 = 0.01 s 

t 

Acceleration 

compensation 

t

2402 TORQ RAMP 

DOWN 




Defines the torque reference ramp down time, ie the 

minimum time for the reference to decrease from the 

nominal motor torque to zero. 

0.00 s 

0.00…120.00 s Time 1 = 0.01 s 

25 CRITICAL 

SPEEDS 

2501 CRIT SPEED 

SEL 

Speed bands within which the drive is not allowed to 

operate. 

Activates/deactivates the critical speeds function. The 

critical speed function avoids specific speed ranges. 

Example: A fan has vibrations in the range of 18 to 23 Hz 

and 46 to 52 Hz. To make the drive to jump over the 

vibration speed ranges: 

• Activate the critical speeds function. 

• Set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below. 

f output (Hz) 

52 

46 

23 

18 

1 2 3 4 

1 Par. 2502 = 18 Hz 

2 Par. 2503 = 23 Hz 

3 Par. 2504 = 46 Hz 

4 Par. 2505 = 52 Hz 

f reference (Hz) 

OFF Inactive 0 

ON Active 1 

2502 CRIT SPEED 1 Defines the minimum limit for critical speed/frequency range 0.0 Hz / 

LO 

1. 

1rpm 

0.0…500.0 Hz / Limit in rpm. Limit in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 1 = 0.1 Hz 

0…30000 rpm MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ. The value cannot be 

above the maximum (parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI). 

/ 1 rpm 

2503 CRIT SPEED 1 Defines the maximum limit for critical speed/frequency 0.0 Hz / 

HI 

range 1. 

1rpm 

0.0…500.0 Hz / Limit in rpm. Limit in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 1 = 0.1 Hz 

0…30000 rpm MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ. The value cannot be 

below the minimum (parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO). 

/ 1 rpm 

2504 CRIT SPEED 2 See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO. 0.0 Hz / 

LO 

1rpm 

0.0…500.0 Hz / See parameter 2502. 1 = 0.1 Hz 

0…30000 rpm 

/ 1 rpm 

2505 CRIT SPEED 2 See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI. 0.0 Hz / 

HI 

1rpm 

0.0…500.0 Hz / See parameter 2503. 1 = 0.1 Hz 

0…30000 rpm 

/ 1 rpm 

OFF




2506 CRIT SPEED 3 

LO 

0.0…500.0 Hz / 

0…30000 rpm 

2507 CRIT SPEED 3 

HI 

0.0…500.0 Hz / 

0…30000 rpm 

26 MOTOR 

CONTROL 

2601 FLUX OPT 

ENABLE 

See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO. 0.0 Hz / 

1rpm 

See parameter 2502. 1 = 0.1 Hz 

/ 1 rpm 

See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI. 0.0 Hz / 

1rpm 

See parameter 2503. 1 = 0.1 Hz 

/ 1 rpm 

Motor control variables 

Activates/deactivates the flux optimization function. Flux 

optimization reduces the total energy consumption and 

motor noise level when the drive operates below the 

nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and the drive) can 

be improved by 1% to 10%, depending on the load torque 

and speed. The disadvantage of this function is that the 

dynamic performance of the drive is weakened. 

OFF 


ON Active 1 

2602 FLUX Activates/deactivates the Flux braking function. See section OFF 

BRAKING Flux braking on page 138. 


ON Active 1


2603 IR COMP 

VOLT 



Defines the output voltage boost at zero speed (IR 

compensation). The function is useful in applications with a 

high break-away torque when vector control cannot be 

applied. 

To prevent overheating, set IR compensation voltage as low 

as possible. 

Note: The function can be used only when parameter 9904 


The figure below illustrates the IR compensation. 

Type 

dependent 

0.0…100.0 V Voltage boost 1 = 0.1 V 

2604 IR COMP 

FREQ 

Defines the frequency at which the IR compensation is 0 V. 

See the figure for parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT 

Note: If parameter 2605 U/F RATIO is set to USER 

DEFINED, this parameter is not active. The IR 

compensation frequency is set by parameter 2610 USER 

DEFINED U1. 

0…100% Value in percent of the motor frequency 1 = 1% 

2605 U/F RATIO Selects the voltage to frequency (U/f) ratio below the field 

weakening point. For scalar control only. 

LINEAR 

LINEAR Linear ratio for constant torque applications. 1 

SQUARED Squared ratio for centrifugal pump and fan applications. 

With squared U/f ratio the noise level is lower for most 

operating frequencies. Not recommended for permanent 

magnet motors. 

2 

USER 

DEFINED 

2603 

Typical IR compensation values: 

P N (kW) 0.37 0.75 2.2 4.0 7.5 

200…240 V units 

IR comp (V) 8.4 7.7 5.6 8.4 N/A 

380…480 V units 

IR comp (V) 14 14 5.6 8.4 7 

Motor 

voltage 

A 

B 

2604 

A = IR compensated 

B = No compensation 

f (Hz) 

Custom ratio defined by parameters 2610…2618. See 

section Custom U/f ratio on page 141. 

80% 

3




2606 SWITCHING 

FREQ 

Defines the switching frequency of the drive. Higher 

switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise. 

In multimotor systems, do not change the switching 

frequency from the default value. 

See also parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and 

section Switching frequency derating, I2N on page 360. 

4kHz 

4 kHz 

8 kHz 

12 kHz 

16 kHz 

1 = 1 kHz 

2607 SWITCH FREQ Selects the control method for the switching frequency. ON 

CTRL Selection has no effect if parameter 2606 SWITCHING 

FREQ is 4 kHz. 

(LOAD) 

ON Drive maximum current is automatically derated according 

to the selected switching frequency (see parameter 2607 

SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching frequency 

derating, I2N on page 360) and adapted according to the 

drive temperature. 

It is recommended to use this selection when a specific 

switching frequency is required with maximum performance. 

fsw limit 

1 

16 kHz 

4kHz 

Drive 

temperature 

80…100 °C * 100…120 °C * T 

* Temperature depends on the drive output frequency.




ON (LOAD) The drive is started with 4 kHz switching frequency to gain 

maximum output during the start. After start-up, the 

switching frequency is controlled towards the selected value 

(parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL) if the output 

current or the temperature allows. 

This selection provides adaptive switching frequency 

control. Adaptation decreases the output performance in 

some cases. 

fsw limit 

2608 SLIP COMP 

RATIO 

Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation 

control. 100% means full slip compensation, 0% means no 

slip compensation. Other values can be used if a static 

speed error is detected despite the full slip compensation. 

Can be used only in scalar control (ie when parameter 9904 

MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ). 

Example: 35 Hz constant speed reference is given to the 

drive. Despite the full slip compensation (SLIP COMP 

RATIO = 100%), a manual tachometer measurement from 

the motor axis gives a speed value of 34 Hz. The static 

speed error is 35 Hz - 34 Hz = 1 Hz. To compensate the 

error, the slip gain should be increased. 

0…200% Slip gain 1 = 1% 

2609 NOISE 

SMOOTHING 

16 kHz 

4kHz 

Drive current I 2N 

Drive 

temperature 

80…100 °C * 100…120 °C * T 

50% ** 100% ** 

* Temperature depends on the drive output frequency. 

** Short term overloading is allowed with each switching 

frequency depending on actual loading. 

Enables the noise smoothing function. Noise smoothing 

distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of 

frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in 

lower peak noise intensity. A random component with an 

average of 0 Hz is added to the switching frequency set by 

parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ. 

Note: Parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 

SWITCHING FREQ is set to 16 kHz. 

DISABLE Disabled 0 

ENABLE Enabled 1 

2 

0% 

DISABLE




2610 USER 

DEFINED U1 

Defines the first voltage point of the custom U/f curve at the 

frequency defined by parameter 2611 USER DEFINED F1. 

See section Custom U/f ratio on page 141. 

19% of 

U N 

0…120% of UN V Voltage 1 = 1 V 

2611 USER 

DEFINED F1 

Defines the first frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 10.0 Hz 

0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz 

2612 USER Defines the second voltage point of the custom U/f curve at 38% of 

DEFINED U2 the frequency defined by parameter 2613 USER DEFINED 

F2. See section Custom U/f ratio on page 141. 

UN 0…120% of UN V Voltage 1 = 1 V 

2613 USER 

DEFINED F2 

Defines the second frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 20.0 Hz 


2614 USER 

DEFINED U3 

Defines the third voltage point of the custom U/f curve at the 47.5% of 

frequency defined by parameter 2615 USER DEFINED F3. UN See section Custom U/f ratio on page 141. 

0…120% of UN V Voltage 1 = 1 V 

2615 USER 

DEFINED F3 

Defines the third frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 25.0 Hz 


2616 USER 

DEFINED U4 

Defines the fourth voltage point of the custom U/f curve at 

the frequency defined by parameter 2617 USER DEFINED 

F4. See section Custom U/f ratio on page 141. 

76% of 


2617 USER 

DEFINED F4 

Defines the fourth frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 40.0 Hz 


2618 FW VOLTAGE Defines the voltage of the U/f curve when frequency is equal 95% of 

to or exceeds the motor nominal frequency (9907 MOTOR 

NOM FREQ). See section Custom U/f ratio on page 141. 


2619 DC 

Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer. The DC DISABLE 

STABILIZER stabilizer is used to prevent possible voltage oscillations in 

the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply 

network. In case of voltage variation, the drive tunes the 

frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and 

therefore the load torque oscillation. 


ENABLE Enabled 1

2621 SMOOTH 

START 




Selects the forced current vector rotation mode at low 

speeds. When the smooth start mode is selected, the rate of 

acceleration is limited by the acceleration and deceleration 

ramp times (parameters 2202 and 2203). If the process 

driven by the permanent magnet motor has high inertia, 

slow ramp times are recommended. 

Can be used for permanent magnet motors only. 

NO Disabled 0 

YES Enabled 1 

2622 SMOOTH 

START CUR 

Current used in the current vector rotation at low speeds. 

Increase the smooth start current if the application requires 

high pull-up torque. Decrease the smooth start current if 

motor shaft swinging needs to be minimized. Note that 

accurate torque control is not possible in the current vector 

rotation mode. 


50% 

10…100% Value in percent of the motor nominal current 1 = 1% 

2623 SMOOTH 

START FRQ 

Output frequency up to which the current vector rotation is 

used. 


2…100% Value in percent of the motor nominal frequency 1 = 1% 

29 MAINTENANCE 

TRIG 

Maintenance triggers 

2901 COOLING FAN 

TRIG 

Defines the trigger point for the drive cooling fan run time 

counter. Value is compared to parameter 2902 COOLING 

FAN ACT value. 

0.0 kh 

0.0…6553.5 kh Time. If parameter value is set to zero, the trigger is 

disabled. 

2902 COOLING FAN 

ACT 

Defines the actual value for the cooling fan run time counter. 

When parameter 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG has been set 

to a non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual 

value of the counter exceeds the value defined by 

parameter 2901, a maintenance notice is displayed on the 

panel. 

NO 

10% 

1 = 0.1 kh 

0.0 kh 

0.0…6553.5 kh Time. Parameter is reset by setting it to zero. 1 = 0.1 kh 


TRIG 

Defines the trigger point for the motor revolution counter. 

Value is compared to parameter 2904 REVOLUTION ACT 

value. 

0…65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions. If parameter value is set to zero, the 

trigger is disabled. 

0Mrev 

1 = 

1Mrev





ACT 

Defines the actual value for the motor revolution counter. 

When parameter 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG has been set to 

a non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual value 

of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 

2903, a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel. 

0…65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions. Parameter is reset by setting it to 

zero. 

2905 RUN TIME 

TRIG 

Defines the trigger point for the drive run time counter. Value 

is compared to parameter 2906 RUN TIME ACT value. 

0.0…6553.5 kh Time. If parameter value is set to zero, the trigger is 

disabled. 

2906 RUN TIME 

ACT 

Defines the actual value for the drive run time counter. 

When parameter 2905 RUN TIME TRIG has been set to a 

non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual value of 

the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905, a 

maintenance notice is displayed on the panel. 

0Mrev 

1 = 

1Mrev 

0.0 kh 

1 = 0.1 kh 

0.0 kh 

0.0…6553.5 kh Time. Parameter is reset by setting it to zero. 1 = 0.1 kh 

2907 USER MWh 

TRIG 

0.0… 

6553.5 MWh 

2908 USER MWh 

ACT 

00.0… 

6553.5 MWh 

30 FAULT 

FUNCTIONS 

3001 AI




FAULT The drive trips on fault AI1 LOSS (0007) / AI2 LOSS (0008) 

and the motor coasts to stop. Fault limit is defined by 

parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT / 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT. 

CONST SP 7 The drive generates alarm AI1 LOSS (2006) / AI2 LOSS 

(2007) and sets the speed to the value defined by 

parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7. Alarm limit is defined by 

parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT / 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT. 

WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue 

operation in case the analog input signal is lost. 

LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm AI1 LOSS (2006) / AI2 LOSS 

(2007) and freezes the speed to the level the drive was 

operating at. The speed is determined by the average 

speed over the previous 10 seconds. Alarm limit is defined 

by parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT / 3022 AI2 FAULT 

LIMIT. 


operation in case the analog input signal is lost. 

3002 PANEL COMM 

ERR 

Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel 

communication break. 

Note: When either of the two external control locations are 

active, and start, stop and/or direction are through the 

control panel – 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS / 1002 EXT2 

COMMANDS = 8 (KEYPAD) – the drive follows the speed 

reference according to the configuration of the external 

control locations, instead of the value of the last speed or 

parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7. 

FAULT Drive trips on fault PANEL LOSS (0010) and the motor 


CONST SP 7 The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS (2008) and sets 

the speed to the speed defined by parameter 1208 CONST 

SPEED 7. 


operation in case of a panel communication break. 

LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS (2008) and 

freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at. 

The speed is determined by the average speed over the 

previous 10 seconds. 


operation in case of a panel communication break. 

1 

2 

3 

FAULT 

3003 EXTERNAL 

FAULT 1 

Selects an interface for an external fault 1 signal. NOT SEL 


DI1 External fault indication through digital input DI1. 1: Fault 

trip on EXT FAULT 1 (0014). Motor coasts to stop. 0: No 

external fault. 

1 

1 

2 

3








DI1(INV) External fault indication through inverted digital input DI1. 0: -1 

Fault trip on EXT FAULT 1 (0014). Motor coasts to stop. 1: 

No external fault. 





3004 EXTERNAL 

FAULT 2 

Selects an interface for an external fault 2 signal. 

See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1. 

NOT SEL 

3005 MOT THERM Selects how the drive reacts when the motor 

FAULT 

PROT overtemperature is detected. 

NOT SEL Protection is inactive. 0 

FAULT The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP (0009) when the 

temperature exceeds 110 °C, and the motor coasts to stop. 

1 

ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMP (2010) when the 

motor temperature exceeds 90 °C. 

2 

3006 MOT THERM 

TIME 

Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal 

model, ie the time within which the motor temperature has 

reached 63% of the nominal temperature with steady load. 

For thermal protection according to UL requirements for 

NEMA class motors, use the rule of thumb: Motor thermal 

time = 35 · t6. t6 (in seconds) is specified by the motor 

manufacturer as the time the motor can safely operate at six 

times its rated current. 

Thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s, for a Class 

20 trip curve 700 s, and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s. 

500 s 

Motor load 

Temp. rise 

100% 

63% 

Par. 3006 

256…9999 s Time constant 1 = 1 s 

} 

t 

t


3007 MOT LOAD 

CURVE 



Defines the load curve together with parameters 3008 

ZERO SPEED LOAD and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ. 

With the default value 100%, motor overload protection is 

functioning when the constant current exceeds 127% of the 

parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR value. 

The default overloadability is at the same level as what 

motor manufacturers typically allow below 30 °C (86 °F) 

ambient temperature and below 1000 m (3300 ft) altitude. 

When the ambient temperature exceeds 30 °C (86 °F) or 

the installation altitude is over 1000 m (3300 ft), decrease 

the parameter 3007 value according to the motor 

manufacturer’s recommendation. 

Example: If the constant protection level needs to be 115% 

of the motor nominal current, set parameter 3007 value to 

91% (= 115/127·100%). 

50.…150% Allowed continuous motor load relative to the nominal motor 

current 

3008 ZERO SPEED 

LOAD 

Par. 3007 

Par. 3008 

150 

100 = 

127% 

50 

Output current relative (%) to 

9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 

Par. 3009 

Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 

LOAD CURVE and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ. 

25.…150% Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of 

the nominal motor current 

f 

100% 

1 = 1% 

70% 

1 = 1%




3009 BREAK POINT 

FREQ 

Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 

LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD. 

Example: Thermal protection trip times when parameters 

3006…3008 have default values. 

I O/I N 

3.5 

3.0 

2.5 

2.0 

1.5 

1.0 

0.5 

0 

I O = Output current 

I N = Nominal motor current 

f O = Output frequency 

f BRK = Break point frequency 

A = Trip time 

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 

35 Hz 

1…250 Hz Drive output frequency at 100% load 1 = 1 Hz 

A 

60 s 

90 s 

180 s 

300 s 

600 s 

∞ 

f O/f BRK


3010 STALL 

FUNCTION 



Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. The 

protection wakes up if the drive has operated in a stall 

region (see the figure below) longer than the time set by 

parameter 3012 STALL TIME. 

In vector control the user defined limit = 2017 MAX 

TORQUE 1 / 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 (applies for positive 

and negative torques). 

In scalar control the user defined limit = 2003 MAX 

CURRENT. 

The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR 

CTRL MODE. 

Torque (%) / 

Current (A) 

0.95 · User defined limit 

Stall region 

Par. 3011 

NOT SEL 


FAULT The drive trips on fault MOTOR STALL (0012) and the 

motor coasts to stop. 

1 

ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR STALL (2012). 2 

3011 STALL Defines the frequency limit for the stall function. See 20.0 Hz 

FREQUENCY parameter 3010 STALL FUNCTION. 


3012 STALL TIME Defines the time for the stall function. See parameter 3010 

STALL FUNCTION. 

20 s 

10…400 s Time 1 = 1 s 

3013 UNDERLOAD Selects how the drive reacts to underload. The protection NOT SEL 

FUNC wakes up if: 

• the motor torque falls below the curve selected by 

parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE, 

• output frequency is higher than 10% of the nominal motor 

frequency and 

• the above conditions have been valid longer than the time 

set by parameter 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME. 


f




FAULT The drive trips on fault UNDERLOAD (0017) and the motor 


Note: Set parameter value to FAULT only after the drive ID 

run is performed! If FAULT is selected, the drive may 

generate an UNDERLOAD fault during ID run. 

ALARM The drive generates alarm UNDERLOAD (2011). 2 

3014 UNDERLOAD 

TIME 

Defines the time limit for the underload function. See 


1 

20 s 

10…400 s Time limit 1 = 1 s 


CURVE 

Selects the load curve for the underload function. See 


1…5 Number of the load curve type in the figure 1 = 1 

3016 SUPPLY 

PHASE 

T M 

(%) 

80 

60 

40 

20 

0 

T M = nominal torque of the motor 

ƒ N = nominal frequency of the motor (9907) 

Underload curve types 

Selects how the drive reacts to supply phase loss, ie when 

DC voltage ripple is excessive. 

FAULT The drive trips on fault SUPPLY PHASE (0022) and the 

motor coasts to stop when the DC voltage ripple exceeds 

14% of the nominal DC voltage. 

LIMIT/ALARM Drive output current is limited and alarm INPUT PHASE 

LOSS (2026) is generated when the DC voltage ripple 

exceeds 14% of the nominal DC voltage. 

There is a 10 s delay between the activation of the alarm 

and the output current limitation. The current is limited until 

the ripple drops under the minimum limit, 0.3 · Ihd. ALARM The drive generates alarm INPUT PHASE LOSS (2026) 

when the DC ripple exceeds 14% of the nominal DC 

voltage. 

f N 

2 

3 

1 5 

4 

2.4 · f N 

70% 

50% 

30% 

f 

1 

FAULT 

0 

1 

2




3017 EARTH FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when an earth (ground) fault is 

detected in the motor or the motor cable. 

Note: Disabling earth (ground) fault may void the warranty. 

DISABLE No action 0 

ENABLE The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT (0016) when the 

earth fault is detected during run. 

1 

START ONLY The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT (0016) when the 

earth fault is detected before run. 

2 

3018 COMM FAULT 

FUNC 

Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication 

break. The time delay is defined by parameter 3019 COMM 

FAULT TIME. 


FAULT Protection is active. The drive trips on fault SERIAL 1 ERR 

(0028) and coasts to stop. 

1 

CONST SP 7 Protection is active. The drive generates alarm IO COMM 

(2005) and sets the speed to the value defined by 

parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7. 


operation in case of a communication break. 

2 

LAST SPEED Protection is active. The drive generates alarm IO COMM 

(2005) and freezes the speed to the level the drive was 

operating at. The speed is determined by the average 

speed over the previous 10 seconds. 


operation in case of a communication break. 


TIME 

Defines the time delay for the fieldbus communication break 

supervision. See parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC. 

ENABLE 

NOT SEL 

3 

3.0 s 

0.0…600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s 

3021 AI1 FAULT 

LIMIT 

Defines a fault level for analog input AI1. If parameter 3001 

AI




3023 WIRING FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when incorrect input power and 

motor cable connection is detected (ie the input power cable 

is connected to the motor connection of the drive). 

Note: Disabling wiring fault (ground fault) may void the 

warranty. 

ENABLE 

DISABLE No action 0 

ENABLE The drive trips on fault OUTP WIRING (0035). 1 

3025 STO 

Selects how the drive reacts when the drive detects that the ONLY 

OPERATION STO (Safe torque off) function is active. 

ALARM 

ONLY FAULT The drive trips on fault SAFE TORQUE OFF (0044). 1 

ALARM&FAUL The drive generates alarm SAFE TORQUE OFF (2035) 2 

T 

when stopped and trips on fault SAFE TORQUE OFF 

(0044) when running. 

NO & FAULT The drive gives no indication to the user when stopped and 

trips on fault SAFE TORQUE OFF (0044) when running. 

ONLY ALARM The drive generates alarm SAFE TORQUE OFF (2035). 

Note: The start signal must be reset (toggled to 0) if STO 

(Safe torque off) has been used while the drive has been 

running. 

3026 POWER FAIL 

START 

Selects how the drive reacts when the control board is 

externally powered by the MPOW-01 option module (see 

Appendix: Extension modules on page 393) and start is 

requested by the user. 

ALARM The drive generates alarm UNDERVOLTAGE (2003). 1 

FAULT The drive trips on fault DC UNDERVOLT (0006). 2 

NO The drive gives no indication to the user. 3 

31 AUTOMATIC Automatic fault reset. Automatic resets are possible only for 

RESET 

certain fault types and when the automatic reset function is 

activated for that fault type. 

3101 NR OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive 

performs within the time defined by parameter 3102 TRIAL 

TIME. 

If the number of automatic resets exceeds the set number 

(within the trial time), the drive prevents additional automatic 

resets and remains stopped. The drive must be reset from 

the control panel or from a source selected by parameter 

1604 FAULT RESET SEL. 

Example: Three faults have occurred during the trial time 

defined by parameter 3102. Last fault is reset only if the 

number defined by parameter 3101 is 3 or more. 

0 

Trial time 

X X X 

t 

X = Automatic reset 

3 

4 

ALARM




0…5 Number of the automatic resets 1 = 1 

3102 TRIAL TIME Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See 

parameter 3101 NR OF TRIALS. 

30.0 s 

1.0…600.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s 

3103 DELAY TIME Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before 

attempting an automatic reset. See parameter 3101 NR OF 

TRIALS. If delay time is set to zero, the drive resets 

immediately. 

0.0 s 

0.0…120.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s 

3104 AR 

OVERCURRE 

NT 

Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the 

overcurrent fault. Automatically resets fault 

OVERCURRENT (0001) after the delay set by parameter 

3103 DELAY TIME. 

DISABLE 

DISABLE Inactive 0 

ENABLE Active 1 

3105 AR 


DISABLE 

OVERVOLTAG 

E 

intermediate link overvoltage fault. Automatically resets fault 

DC OVERVOLT (0002) after the delay set by parameter 

3103 DELAY TIME. 



3106 AR 


DISABLE 

UNDERVOLTA 

GE 

intermediate link undervoltage fault. Automatically resets 

fault DC UNDERVOLT (0006) after the delay set by 

parameter 3103 DELAY TIME. 



3107 AR AI




32 SUPERVISION Signal supervision. Supervision status can be monitored 

with relay or transistor output. See parameter groups 14 

RELAY OUTPUTS and 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT. 

3201 SUPERV 1 

PARAM 

Selects the first supervised signal. Supervision limits are 

defined by parameters 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO and 3203 

SUPERV 1 LIM HI. 

Example 1: If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO < 3203 SUPERV 1 

LIM HI 

Case A = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 

OVER. Relay energizes when value of the signal selected 

with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM exceeds the supervision limit 

defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI. The relay remains 

active until the supervised value drops below the low limit 

defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO. 

Case B = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 

UNDER. Relay energizes when value of the signal selected 

with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM drops below the supervision 

limit defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO. The relay remains 

active until the supervised value rises above the high limit 

defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI. 

HI par. 3203 

LO par. 3202 

Case A 

Energized (1) 

0 

Case B 

Energized (1) 

0 

Value of supervised parameter 

t 

t 

t 

103




Example 2: If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO > 3203 SUPERV 1 

LIM HI 

The lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI remains active until 

the supervised signal exceeds the higher limit 3202 

SUPERV 1 LIM LO, making it the active limit. The new limit 

remains active until the supervised signal drops below the 

lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI, making it the active 

limit. 

Case A = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 

OVER. Relay is energized whenever the supervised signal 

exceeds the active limit. 

Case B = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 

UNDER. Relay is de-energized whenever the supervised 

signal drops below the active limit. 

0, x…x Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. Eg 102 = 

0102 SPEED. 0 = not selected. 

3202 SUPERV 1 LIM 

LO 

Defines the low limit for the first supervised signal selected 

by parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM. Supervision wakes 

up if the value is below the limit. 

x…x Setting range depends on parameter 3201 setting. - 


HI 

Defines the high limit for the first supervised signal selected 


up if the value is above the limit. 


3204 SUPERV 2 

PARAM 

Value of supervised parameter 

HI par. 3203 

LO par. 3202 

Case A 

Energized (1) 

0 

Case B 

Energized (1) 

0 

Active limit 

Selects the second supervised signal. Supervision limits are 


SUPERV 2 LIM HI. See parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 

PARAM. 


0102 SPEED. 

t 

t 

t 

1 = 1 

- 

- 

104 

1 = 1





LO 

Defines the low limit for the second supervised signal 

selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM. 

Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit. 



HI 

Defines the high limit for the second supervised signal 

selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM. 

Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit. 


3207 SUPERV 3 

PARAM 

Selects the third supervised signal. Supervision limits are 


SUPERV 3 LIM HI. See parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 

PARAM. 


0102 SPEED. 


LO 

Defines the low limit for the third supervised signal selected 


up if the value is below the limit. 



HI 

Defines the high limit for the third supervised signal selected 


up if the value is above the limit. 


33 INFORMATION Firmware package version, test date etc. 

3301 FIRMWARE Displays the version of the firmware package. 

0000…FFFF 

hex 

Eg 241A hex 

3302 LOADING 

PACKAGE 

2201…22FF 

hex 

- 

- 

105 

1 = 1 

Displays the version of the loading package. type 

dependent 

2201 hex = ACS355-0nE- 

2202 hex = ACS355-0nU- 

3303 TEST DATE Displays the test date. 

Date value in format YY.WW (year, week) 

00.00 

3304 DRIVE RATING Displays the drive current and voltage ratings. 0000 hex 

0000…FFFF Value in format XXXY hex: 

hex 

XXX = Nominal current of the drive in amperes. An “A” 

indicates decimal point. For example if XXX is 9A8, nominal 

current is 9.8 A. 

Y = Nominal voltage of the drive: 

1 = 1-phase 200…240 V 

2 = 3-phase 200…240 V 

4 = 3-phase 380…480 V 

3305 PARAMETER Displays the version of the parameter table used in the 

TABLE drive. 

- 

-


0000…FFFF 

hex 

Eg 400E hex 



34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of actual signals to be displayed on the panel 

3401 SIGNAL1 

PARAM 

0= NOT 

SELECTED 

101…180 

Selects the first signal to be displayed on the control panel 

in the Output mode. 

Assistant control panel 3404 3405 

0137 

0138 

0139 


Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. Eg 102 = 

0102 SPEED. If value is set to 0, no signal is selected. 

3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by 

parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM. 

Display 

value 

3407 

3406 

LOC 15.0Hz 

3402 

15. 0 Hz 

3. 7 A 

17. 3 % 

3403 

Source 

value 

Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 

OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT. 


3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by 

parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM. See the figure for 

parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN. 



- 


103 

1 = 1 

-




3404 OUTPUT1 DSP 

FORM 

Defines the format for the displayed signal (selected by 

parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM). 

+/-0 Signed/Unsigned value. Unit is selected by parameter 3405 0 

+/-0.0 OUTPUT1 UNIT. 

1 

+/-0.00 Example: PI (3.14159) 

2 

+/-0.000 3404 value Display Range 3 

+0 

+0.0 

+0.00 

+/-0 

+/-0.0 

+/-0.00 

+/-0.000 

+ 3 

+ 3.1 

+ 3.14 

+ 3.142 

-32768…+32767 4 

5 

6 

+0.000 +0 3 0…65535 7 

+0.0 3.1 

+0.00 3.14 

+0.000 3.142 

BAR METER Bar graph 8 

DIRECT Direct value. Decimal point location and units of measure 

are the same as for the source signal. 

Note: Parameters 3402, 3403 and 3405…3407 are not 

effective. 

9 

3405 OUTPUT1 

UNIT 

Selects the unit for the displayed signal selected by 




Note: Unit selection does not convert values. 

NO UNIT No unit selected 0 

A ampere 1 

V volt 2 

Hz hertz 3 

% percent 4 

s second 5 

h hour 6 

rpm revolutions per minute 7 

kh kilohour 8 

°C celsius 9 

lb ft pounds per foot 10 

mA milliampere 11 

mV millivolt 12 

kW kilowatt 13 

W watt 14 

kWh kilowatt hour 15 

°F fahrenheit 16 

hp horsepower 17 

DIRECT 

Hz




MWh megawatt hour 18 

m/s meters per second 19 

m3/h cubic meters per hour 20 

dm3/s cubic decimeters per second 21 

bar bar 22 

kPa kilopascal 23 

GPM gallons per minute 24 

PSI pounds per square inch 25 

CFM cubic feet per minute 26 

ft foot 27 

MGD millions of gallons per day 28 

inHg inches of mercury 29 

FPM feet per minute 30 

kb/s kilobytes per second 31 

kHz kilohertz 32 

ohm ohm 33 

ppm pulses per minute 34 

pps pulses per second 35 

l/s liters per second 36 

l/min liters per minute 37 

l/h liters per hour 38 

m3/s cubic meters per second 39 

m3/m cubic meters per minute 40 

kg/s kilograms per second 41 

kg/m kilograms per minute 42 

kg/h kilograms per hour 43 

mbar millibar 44 

Pa pascal 45 

GPS gallons per second 46 

gal/s gallons per second 47 

gal/m gallons per minute 48 

gal/h gallons per hour 49 

ft3/s cubic feet per second 50 

ft3/m cubic feet per minute 51 

ft3/h cubic feet per hour 52 

lb/s pounds per second 53 

lb/m pounds per minute 54 

lb/h pounds per hour 55 

FPS feet per second 56 

ft/s feet per second 57




inH2O inches of water 58 

in wg inches of water gauge 59 

ft wg feet on water gauge 60 

lbsi pounds per squared inch 61 

ms millisecond 62 

Mrev millions of revolutions 63 

d days 64 

inWC inches of water column 65 

m/min meters per minute 66 

Nm Newton meter 67 

Km3/h thousand cubic meters per hour 68 

%ref reference in percentage 117 

%act actual value in percentage 118 

%dev deviation in percentage 119 

% LD load in percentage 120 

% SP set point in percentage 121 

%FBK feedback in percentage 122 

Iout output current (in percentage) 123 

Vout output voltage 124 

Fout output frequency 125 

Tout output torque 126 

Vdc DC voltage 127 

3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by 

parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM. See parameter 3402 

SIGNAL1 MIN. 



- 


3407 OUTPUT1 

MAX 

Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by 


SIGNAL1 MIN. 




3408 SIGNAL2 

PARAM 

0= NOT 

SELECTED 

101…180 

Selects the second signal to be displayed on the control 

panel in the Output mode. See parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 

PARAM. 



- 

104 

1 = 1






SIGNAL1 MIN. 




SIGNAL1 MIN. 

- 



FORM 

3412 OUTPUT2 

UNIT 

Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by 


DIRECT 

See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM. - 



- 

See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT. - 



SIGNAL1 MIN. 


3414 OUTPUT2 

MAX 



SIGNAL1 MIN. 


3415 SIGNAL3 

PARAM 

0= NOT 

SELECTED 

101…180 

Selects the third signal to be displayed on the control panel 

in the Output mode. See parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 

PARAM. 




parameter 3415. See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN. 

x…x Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 

PARAM setting. 



SIGNAL1 MIN. 




FORM 

3419 OUTPUT3 

UNIT 

- 

- 

- 

105 

1 = 1 

Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by 


DIRECT 

See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM. - 



- 

See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT. - 

- 

- 

- 

-






SIGNAL1 MIN. 



3421 OUTPUT3 

MAX 



SIGNAL1 MIN. 


35 MOTOR TEMP 

MEAS 

3501 SENSOR 

TYPE 

Motor temperature measurement. See section Motor 

temperature measurement through the standard I/O on 

page 155. 

Activates the motor temperature measurement function and 

selects the sensor type. See also parameter group 15 

ANALOG OUTPUTS. 

NONE The function is inactive. 0 

1 x PT100 The function is active. The temperature is measured with 

one Pt 100 sensor. Analog output AO feeds constant current 

through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the 

motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the 

sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the 

voltage through analog input AI1/2 and converts it to 

degrees centigrade. 

1 

2 x PT100 The function is active. Temperature is measured using two 

Pt 100 sensors. See selection 1 x PT100. 

3 x PT100 The function is active. Temperature is measured using three 

Pt 100 sensors. See selection 1 x PT100. 

- 

- 

- 

NONE 

2 

3




PTC The function is active. The temperature is supervised using 

one PTC sensor. Analog output AO feeds constant current 

through the sensor. The resistance of the sensor increases 

sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC 

reference temperature (Tref), as does the voltage over the 

resistor. The temperature measurement function reads the 

voltage through analog input AI1/2 and converts it into 

ohms. The figure below shows typical PTC sensor 

resistance values as a function of the motor operating 

temperature. 

THERM(0) The function is active. Motor temperature is monitored using 

a PTC sensor (see selection PTC) connected to drive 

through a normally closed thermistor relay connected to a 

digital input. 0 = motor overtemperature. 

THERM(1) The function is active. Motor temperature is monitored using 

a PTC sensor (see selection PTC) connected to drive 

through a normally open thermistor relay connected to a 

digital input. 1 = motor overtemperature. 

3502 INPUT 

SELECTION 

Temperature Resistance 

Normal 0…1.5 kohm 

Excessive > 4 kohm 

ohm 

4000 

1330 

550 

100 

Selects the source for the motor temperature measurement 

signal. 

AI1 Analog input AI1. Used when PT100 or PTC sensor is 

selected for the temperature measurement. 

AI2 Analog input AI2. Used when PT100 or PTC sensor is 

selected for the temperature measurement 

DI1 Digital input DI1. Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR 

TYPE value is set to THERM(0)/THERM(1). 



T 

4 

5 

6 

AI1 

1 

2 

3 

4










3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement. 

Alarm MOTOR TEMP (2010) indication is given when the 

limit is exceeded. When parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE 

value is set to THERM(0)/THERM(1): 1 = alarm. 

x…x Alarm limit - 

3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault trip limit for motor temperature 

measurement. The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP 

(0009) when the limit is exceeded. When parameter 3501 

SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERM(0)/THERM(1): 1 = 

fault. 

0 

x…x Fault limit - 

3505 AO 

EXCITATION 

Enables current feed from analog output AO. Parameter 

setting overrides parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS 

settings. 

With PTC the output current is 1.6 mA. 

With Pt 100 the output current is 9.1 mA. 



36 TIMED 

Time periods 1 to 4 and booster signal. See section Timed 

FUNCTIONS functions on page 163. 

5 

6 

7 

0 

DISABLE 

3601 TIMERS 

ENABLE 

Selects the source for the timed function enable signal. NOT SEL 

NOT SEL Timed function is not selected. 0 

DI1 Digital input DI. Timed function enable on the rising edge of 

DI1. 

1 





ACTIVE Timed function is always enabled. 7 

DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. Timed function enable on the 

falling edge of DI1. 

-1 




DI5(INV) See selection DI1(INV). -5




3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 1. The time can be changed in 

2-second steps. 

00:00:00… 

23:59:58 

hours:minutes:seconds. 

Example: If parameter value is set to 07:00:00, timed 

function 1 is activated at 7:00 (7 a.m). 

3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the daily stop time 1. The time can be changed in 

2-second steps. 

00:00:00 

00:00:00 

00:00:00… hours:minutes:seconds. 

23:59:58 Example: If parameter value is set to 18:00:00, timed 

function 1 is deactivated at 18:00 (6 p.m). 

3604 START DAY 1 Defines the start day 1. MONDAY 

MONDAY 

1 

TUESDAY Example: If parameter value is set to MONDAY, timed 2 

WEDNESDAY 

function 1 is active from Monday midnight (00:00:00). 

3 

THURSDAY 4 

FRIDAY 5 

SATURDAY 6 

SUNDAY 7 

3605 STOP DAY 1 Defines the stop day 1. 

See parameter 3604 START DAY 1. 

Example: If parameter is set to FRIDAY, timed function 1 is 

deactivated on Friday midnight (23:59:58). 

MONDAY 

3606 START TIME 2 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1. 

See parameter 3602 START TIME 1. 

3607 STOP TIME 2 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1. 

See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1. 

3608 START DAY 2 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1. 


3609 STOP DAY 2 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1. 

See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1. 



3611 STOP TIME 3 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1. 








3615 STOP TIME 4 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1.



No. Name/Value Description 


Def/FbEq 





3622 BOOSTER 

SEL 

Selects the source for the booster activation signal. NOT SEL 

NOT SEL No booster activation signal 0 

DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1 





DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = inactive. -1 





3623 BOOSTER Defines the time inside which the booster is deactivated 00:00:00 

TIME 

after the booster activation signal is switched off. 

00:00:00… hours:minutes:seconds 

23:59:58 Example: If parameter 3622 BOOSTER SEL is set to DI1 

and 3623 BOOSTER TIME is set to 01:30:00, the booster is 

active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after digital input DI is 

deactivated. 

3626 TIMED FUNC 1 

SRC 

Booster active 

DI 

Booster time 

Selects the time periods for TIMED FUNC 1 SRC. Timed 

function can consist of 0…4 time periods and a booster. 

NOT SEL No time periods selected 0 

T1 Time period 1 1 


T1+T2 Time periods 1 and 2 3 




T1+T2+T3 Time periods 1, 2 and 3 7 

NOT SEL











T1+T2+T3+T4 Time periods 1, 2, 3 and 4 15 

BOOSTER Booster 16 

T1+B Booster and time period 1 17 


T1+T2+B Booster and time periods 1 and 2 19 




T1+T2+T3+B Booster and time periods 1, 2 and 3 23 








T1+2+3+4+B Booster and time periods 1, 2, 3 and 4 31 


SRC 

See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC. 



SRC 




SRC 



40 PROCESS PID Process PID (PID1) control parameter set 1. See section 

SET 1 

PID control on page 149. 

4001 GAIN Defines the gain for the process PID controller. High gain 

may cause speed oscillation. 

0.1…100.0 Gain. When value is set to 0.1, the PID controller output 

changes one-tenth as much as the error value. When value 

is set to 100, the PID controller output changes one hundred 

times as much as the error value. 

1.0 

1 = 0.1




4002 INTEGRATION 

TIME 

0.0 = NOT SEL 

0.1…3600.0 s 

Defines the integration time for the process PID1 controller. 

The integration time defines the rate at which the controller 

output changes when the error value is constant. The 

shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error 

value is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the 

control unstable. 

A = Error 

B = Error value step 

C = Controller output with gain = 1 

D = Controller output with gain = 10 

B 

D (4001 = 10) 

C (4001 = 1) 

Integration time. If parameter value is set to zero, integration 

(I-part of the PID controller) is disabled. 

A 

4002 

t 

60.0 s 

1 = 0.1 s


4003 DERIVATION 

TIME 



Defines the derivation time for the process PID controller. 

Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error 

value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the 

speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the 

derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI 

controller, otherwise as a PID controller. 

The derivation makes the control more responsive for 

disturbances. 

The derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter. Filter time 

constant is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER. 

0.0…10.0 s Derivation time. If parameter value is set to zero, the 

derivative part of the PID controller is disabled. 

4004 PID DERIV 

FILTER 

Defines the filter time constant for the derivative part of the 

process PID controller. Increasing the filter time smooths 

the derivative and reduces noise. 

0.0…10.0 s Filter time constant. If parameter value is set to zero, the 

derivative filter is disabled. 

4005 ERROR 

VALUE INV 

Error Process error value 

100% 

0% 

PID output 

Gain 

4001 

D-part of controller output 

4003 

Selects the relationship between the feedback signal and 

drive speed. 

NO Normal: A decrease in feedback signal increases drive 

speed. Error = Reference - Feedback 

0 

YES Inverted: A decrease in feedback signal decreases drive 

speed. Error = Feedback - Reference 

1 

4006 UNITS Selects the unit for PID controller actual values. % 

0…68 See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT selections in the 

given range. 

4007 UNIT SCALE Defines the decimal point location for PID controller actual 

values. 

1 

t 

t 

0.0 s 

1 = 0.1 s 

1.0 s 

1 = 0.1 s 

NO




0…4 Example: PI (3.141593) 1 = 1 

4008 0% VALUE Defines together with parameter 4009 100% VALUE the 

scaling applied to the PID controller’s actual values. 

x…x Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by 

parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE. 

4009 100% VALUE Defines together with parameter 4008 0% VALUE the 

scaling applied to the PID controller’s actual values. 



4010 SET POINT 

SEL 

4007 value Entry Display 

0 00003 3 

1 00031 3.1 

2 00314 3.14 

3 03142 3.142 

4 31416 3.1416 

Units (4006) 

Scale (4007) 

4009 

4008 

-1000% 

0% 

100% 

+1000% 

Internal 

scale (%) 

Selects the source for the process PID controller reference 

signal. 

KEYPAD Control panel 0 



COMM Fieldbus reference REF2 8 

COMM+AI1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input 

AI1. See section Reference selection and correction on 

page 308. 

9 

COMM*AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input 

AI1. See section Reference selection and correction on 

page 308. 

DI3U,4D(RNC) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 

Reference decrease. Stop command resets the reference to 

zero. The reference is not saved if the control source is 

changed from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 or from 

LOC to REM. 

0.0 

100.0 

AI1 

10 

11




DI3U,4D(NC) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 

Reference decrease. The program stores the active 

reference (not reset by a stop command). The reference is 

not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to 

EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM. 


REF = AI1(%) + AI2(%) - 50% 

14 


REF = AI1(%) · (AI2(%) / 50%) 

15 


REF = AI1(%) + 50% - AI2(%) 

16 


REF = AI1(%) · (50% / AI2 (%)) 

17 

INTERNAL A constant value defined by parameter 4011 INTERNAL 

SETPNT. 

19 

DI4U,5D(NC) See selection DI3U,4D(NC). 31 


SEQ PROG 

OUT 

4011 INTERNAL 

SETPNT 

Sequence programming output. See parameter group 84 

SEQUENCE PROG. 

Selects a constant value as process PID controller 

reference, when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is 

set to INTERNAL. 



4012 SETPOINT 

MIN 

Defines the minimum value for the selected PID reference 

signal source. See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL. 

-500.0…500.0% Value in percent. 

Example: Analog input AI1 is selected as the PID reference 

source (value of parameter 4010 is AI1). The reference 

minimum and maximum correspond to the 1301 MINIMUM 

AI1 and 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 settings as follows: 

4013 SETPOINT 

MAX 

4013 

(MAX) 

4012 

(MIN) 

Ref Ref 

MAX > MIN MIN > MAX 

4012 

(MIN) 

4013 

(MAX) 

1301 1302 AI1 (%) 1301 1302 

AI1 (%) 

Defines the maximum value for the selected PID reference 

signal source. See parameters 4010 SET POINT SEL and 

4012 SETPOINT MIN. 

12 

33 

40 

0.0% 

1 = 0.1% 

100.0% 

-500.0…500.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%




4014 FBK SEL Selects the process actual value (feedback signal) for the 

process PID controller: The sources for the variables ACT1 

and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 4016 ACT1 

INPUT and 4017 ACT2 INPUT. 

ACT1 

ACT1 ACT1 1 

ACT1-ACT2 Subtraction of ACT1 and ACT2 2 

ACT1+ACT2 Addition of ACT1 and ACT2 3 

ACT1*ACT2 Multiplication of ACT1 and ACT2 4 

ACT1/ACT2 Division of ACT1 and ACT2 5 

MIN(ACT1,2) Selects the smaller of ACT1 and ACT2 6 

MAX(ACT1,2) Selects the higher of ACT1 and ACT2 7 

sqrt(ACT1-2) Square root of the subtraction of ACT1 and ACT2 8 

sqA1+sqA2 Addition of the square root of ACT1 and the square root of 

ACT2 

9 

sqrt(ACT1) Square root of ACT1 10 

COMM FBK 1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 value 11 

COMM FBK 2 Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 value 12 

4015 FBK 

MULTIPLIER 

Defines an extra multiplier for the value defined by 

parameter 4014 FBK SEL. Parameter is used mainly in 

applications where feedback value is calculated from 

another variable (eg flow from pressure difference). 

0.000 

-32.768… 

32.767 

Multiplier. If parameter value is set to zero, no multiplier is 

used. 

4016 ACT1 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 1 (ACT1). See also 

parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM. 

AI2 

AI1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT1 1 

AI2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT1 2 

CURRENT Uses current for ACT1 3 

TORQUE Uses torque for ACT1 4 

POWER Uses power for ACT1 5 

COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 6 

COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 7 


4017 ACT2 INPUT Defines the source for actual value ACT2. See also 

parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM. 

See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT. 

AI2 

1 = 0.001


4018 ACT1 

MINIMUM 



Sets the minimum value for ACT1. 

Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 

(defined by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT). For parameter 

4016 values 6 (COMM ACT 1) and 7 (COMM ACT 2) 

scaling is not done. 

A = Normal; B = Inversion (ACT1 minimum > ACT1 

maximum) 

-1000…1000% Value in percent 1 = 1% 

4019 ACT1 

MAXIMUM 

Par 

4016 

Source Source min. Source max. 

1 Analog input 1 1301 MINIMUM AI1 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 

2 Analog input 2 1304 MINIMUM AI2 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 

3 Current 0 2 · nominal current 

4 Torque -2 · nominal torque 2 · nominal torque 

5 Power -2 · nominal power 2 · nominal power 

4019 

4018 

ACT1 (%) ACT1 (%) 

A 

Source min. Source max. 

Source signal 

Defines the maximum value for variable ACT1 if an analog 

input is selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 4016 

ACT1 INPUT. The minimum (4018 ACT1 MINIMUM) and 

maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current 

signal received from the measuring device is converted to a 

percentage value used by the process PID controller. 

See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM. 

0% 

100% 

-1000…1000% Value in percent 1 = 1% 

4020 ACT2 

MINIMUM 

See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM. 0% 

-1000…1000% See parameter 4018. 1 = 1% 

4021 ACT2 

MAXIMUM 

See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM. 100% 

-1000…1000% See parameter 4019. 1 = 1% 

4022 SLEEP Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the NOT SEL 

SELECTION activation input. See section Sleep function for the process 

PID (PID1) control on page 153. 

4018 

4019 

NOT SEL No sleep function selected 0 

B 

Source min. Source max. 

Source signal




DI1 The function is activated/deactivated through digital input 

DI1.1 = activation, 0 = deactivation. 

The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID 

SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE-UP DEV are not effective. 

The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP 

DELAY and 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY are effective. 





INTERNAL Activated and deactivated automatically as defined by 

parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE-UP 

DEV. 

7 

DI1(INV) The function is activated/deactivated through inverted digital 

input DI1. 1 = deactivation, 0 = activation. 

The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID 

SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE-UP DEV are not effective. 

The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP 

DELAY and 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY are effective. 





1 

-1


4023 PID SLEEP 

LEVEL 

0.0…500.0 Hz / 

0…30000 rpm 

4024 PID SLEEP 

DELAY 



Defines the start limit for the sleep function. If the motor 

speed is below a set level (4023) longer than the sleep 

delay (4024), the drive shifts to the sleeping mode: The 

motor is stopped and the control panel shows alarm 

message PID SLEEP (2018). 

Parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION must be set to 

INTERNAL. 

PID ref 

PID process feedback 

Wake-up level 

deviation (4025) 

PID output level 

Sleep level 

(4023) 

tsd = Sleep delay 

(4024) 

t < tsd t sd 

0.0 Hz / 

0rpm 

Sleep start level 1 = 0.1 Hz 

1rpm 

Defines the delay for the sleep start function. See parameter 

4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL. When the motor speed falls below 

the sleep level, the counter starts. When the motor speed 

exceeds the sleep level, the counter is reset. 

60.0 s 

0.0…3600.0 s Sleep start delay 1 = 0.1 s 

Stop 

Wake-up delay 

(4026) 

Control 

panel: 

PID SLEEP 

Start 

t 

t 

t




4025 WAKE-UP DEV Defines the wake-up deviation for the sleep function. The 

drive wakes up if the process actual value deviation from 

the PID reference value exceeds the set wake-up deviation 

(4025) longer than the wake-up delay (4026). Wake-up level 

depends on parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV settings. 

If parameter 4005 is set to 0: 

Wake-up level = PID reference (4010) - Wake-up deviation 

(4025). 

If parameter 4005 is set to 1: 

Wake-up level = PID reference (4010) + Wake-up deviation 

(4025) 

See also figures for parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL. 


parameters 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY and 4007 UNIT 

SCALE. 

4026 WAKE-UP 

DELAY 

Defines the wake-up delay for the sleep function. See 

parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL. 

0 

0.50 s 

0.00…60.00 s Wake-up delay 1 = 0.01 s 

4027 PID 1 PARAM 

SET 

PID reference 

4025 

4025 

Wake-up level 

when 4005 = 1 

Wake-up level 

when 4005 = 0 


that selects between PID parameter set 1 and 2. 

PID parameter set 1 is defined by parameters 4001…4026. 

PID parameter set 2 is defined by parameters 4101…4126. 

SET 1 PID SET 1 is active. 0 

DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = PID SET 2, 0 = PID SET 1. 1 





SET 2 PID SET 2 is active. 7 

TIMED FUNC 1 Timed PID SET 1/2 control. Timed function 1 inactive = PID 

SET 1, timed function 1 active = PID SET 2. See parameter 

group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS. 

8 




DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = PID SET 2, 1 = PID SET 1. -1 

t 

SET 1








41 PROCESS PID Process PID (PID1) control parameter set 2. See section 

SET 2 

PID control on page 149. 

4101 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN. 

4102 INTEGRATION See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME. 

TIME 

4103 DERIVATION See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME. 

TIME 

4104 PID DERIV See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER. 

FILTER 

4105 ERROR See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV. 

VALUE INV 

4106 UNITS See parameter 4006 UNITS. 

4107 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE. 

4108 0% VALUE See parameter 4008 0% VALUE. 


4110 SET POINT See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL. 

SEL 

4111 INTERNAL See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT. 

SETPNT 

4112 SETPOINT See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN. 

MIN 

4113 SETPOINT See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX. 

MAX 

4114 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL. 

4115 FBK 

See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER. 

MULTIPLIER 

4116 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT. 


4118 ACT1 See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM. 

MINIMUM 

4119 ACT1 See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM. 

MAXIMUM 


MINIMUM 


MAXIMUM 

4122 SLEEP See parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION. 

SELECTION 

4123 PID SLEEP See parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL. 

LEVEL 

4124 PID SLEEP See parameter 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY. 

DELAY




4125 WAKE-UP DEV See parameter 4025 WAKE-UP DEV. 

4126 WAKE-UP See parameter 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY. 

DELAY 

42 EXT / TRIM PID External/Trim PID (PID2) control. See section PID control 

on page 149. 

4201 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN. 

4202 INTEGRATION See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME. 

TIME 

4203 DERIVATION See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME. 

TIME 

4204 PID DERIV See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER. 

FILTER 

4205 ERROR See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV. 

VALUE INV 

4206 UNITS See parameter 4006 UNITS. 

4207 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE. 



4210 SET POINT See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL. 

SEL 

4211 INTERNAL See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT. 

SETPNT 

4212 SETPOINT See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN. 

MIN 

4213 SETPOINT See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX. 

MAX 

4214 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL. 

4215 FBK 

See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER. 

MULTIPLIER 




MINIMUM 


MAXIMUM 


MINIMUM 


MAXIMUM 

4228 ACTIVATE Selects the source for the external PID function activation 

signal. Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT 

SEL. 

NOT SEL No external PID control activation selected 0 

DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1 


NOT SEL







DRIVE RUN Activation at drive start. Start (drive running) = active. 7 

ON Activation at drive power-up. Power-up (drive powered) = 

active. 

8 

TIMED FUNC 1 Activation by a timed function. Timed function 1 active = PID 9 

control active. See parameter group 36 TIMED 

FUNCTIONS. 




DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = inactive. -1 





4229 OFFSET Defines the offset for the external PID controller output. 

When PID controller is activated, controller output starts 

from the offset value. When PID controller is deactivated, 

controller output is reset to the offset value. 

Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT SEL. 

0.0% 

0.0…100.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1% 

4230 TRIM MODE Activates the trim function and selects between the direct 

and proportional trimming. With trimming it is possible to 

combine a corrective factor to the drive reference. See 

section Reference trimming on page 129. 

NOT SEL 

NOT SEL No trim function selected 0 

PROPORTION 

AL 

Active. The trimming factor is proportional to the rpm/Hz 

reference before trimming (REF1). 

DIRECT Active. The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum 

limit used in the reference control loop (maximum speed, 

frequency or torque). 

4231 TRIM SCALE Defines the multiplier for the trimming function. See section 

Reference trimming on page 129. 

0.0% 

-100.0…100.0% Multiplier 1 = 0.1% 

4232 CORRECTION 

SRC 

Selects the trim reference. See section Reference trimming 

on page 129. 

PID2REF PID2 reference selected by parameter 4210 (ie signal 0129 1 

PID 2 SETPNT value) 

PID2OUTPUT PID2 output, ie signal 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT value 2 

1 

2 

PID2REF




4233 TRIM 

SELECTION 

Selects whether the trimming is used for correcting the 

speed or torque reference. See section Reference trimming 

on page 129. 

SPEED/FREQ Speed reference trimming 0 

TORQUE Torque reference trimming (only for REF2 (%)) 1 

43 MECH BRK Control of a mechanical brake. See section Control of a 

CONTROL 

mechanical brake on page 157. 

4301 BRAKE OPEN 

DLY 

Defines the brake open delay (= the delay between the 

internal open brake command and the release of the motor 

speed control). The delay counter starts when the motor 

current/torque/speed has risen to the level required at brake 

release (parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL or 4304 

FORCED OPEN LVL) and the motor has been magnetized. 

Simultaneously with the start of the counter, the brake 

function energizes the relay output controlling the brake and 

the brake starts opening. 

SPEED/F 

REQ 

0.20 s 

0.00…2.50 s Delay time 1 = 0.01 s 

4302 BRAKE OPEN 

LVL 

Defines the motor starting torque/current at brake release. 

After start the drive current/torque is frozen to the set value, 

until the motor is magnetized. 

0.0…180.0% Value in percent of the nominal torque TN (in vector control) 

or the nominal current I2N (in scalar control). 

The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR 

CTRL MODE. 

4303 BRAKE 

CLOSE LVL 

Defines the brake close speed. After stop the brake is 

closed when drive speed falls below the set value. 

0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the nominal speed (in vector control) or 

the nominal frequency (in scalar control). The control mode 

is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE. 

4304 FORCED 

OPEN LVL 

0.0 = NOT SEL 

0.0…100.0% 

4305 BRAKE MAGN 

DELAY 

Defines the speed at brake release. Parameter setting 

overrides parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL setting. After 

start, the drive speed is frozen to the set value, until the 

motor is magnetized. 

The purpose of this parameter is to generate enough start 

torque to prevent the motor rotating into the wrong direction 

because of the motor load. 

Value in percent of the maximum frequency (in scalar 

control) or the maximum speed (in vector control). If 

parameter value is set to zero, the function is disabled. The 

control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 

MODE. 

Defines motor magnetizing time. After start drive 

current/torque/speed is frozen to the value defined by 

parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL or 4304 FORCED 

OPEN LVL for the set time. 

100% 

1 = 0.1% 

4.0% 

1 = 0.1% 

0.0 = 

NOT SEL 

1 = 0.1% 

0 = NOT 

SEL

0 = NOT SEL 

0…10000 ms 

4306 RUNTIME 

FREQ LVL 

0.0 = NOT SEL 

0.0…100.0% 

4307 BRK OPEN 

LVL SEL 




magnetizing time. If parameter value is set to zero, the 

function is disabled. 

Defines the brake close speed. When frequency falls below 

the set level during run, the brake is closed. The brake is reopened 

when the requirements set by parameters 

4301…4305 are met. 

Value in percent of the maximum frequency (in scalar 

control) or the maximum speed (in vector control). If 

parameter value is set to zero, the function is disabled. The 

control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 

MODE. 

Selects the torque (in vector control) or current (in scalar 

control) applied at brake release. 

1 = 1 ms 

0.0 = 

NOT SEL 

1 = 0.1% 

PAR 4302 

PAR 4302 Value of parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL used. 1 

MEMORY Torque value (in vector control) or current value (in scalar 

control) saved in parameter 0179 BRAKE TORQUE MEM 

used. 

Useful in applications where initial torque is needed to 

prevent unintended movement when the mechanical brake 

is released. 

2 

50 ENCODER Encoder connection. 

For more information, see MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface 

module user’s manual (3AFE68591091 [English]). 

5001 PULSE NR States the number of encoder pulses per one revolution. 1024 ppr 

32…16384 ppr Pulse number in pulses per round (ppr) 1 = 1 ppr 

5002 ENCODER 

ENABLE 

Enables the encoder. DISABLE 



5003 ENCODER Defines the operation of the drive if a failure is detected in FAULT 

FAULT communication between the pulse encoder and the pulse 

encoder interface module, or between the module and the 

drive. 

FAULT The drive trips on fault ENCODER ERR (0023). 1 

ALARM The drive generates alarm ENCODER ERROR (2024). 2 

5010 Z PLS ENABLE Enables the encoder zero (Z) pulse. Zero pulse is used for 

position reset. 

DISABLE 



5011 POSITION 

RESET 

Enables the position reset. DISABLE 


ENABLE Enabled 1




51 EXT COMM 

MODULE 

The parameters need to be adjusted only when a fieldbus 

adapter module (optional) is installed and activated by 

parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL. For more details on the 

parameters, refer to the manual of the fieldbus module and 

chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 325. 

These parameter settings will remain the same even though 

the macro is changed. 

Note: In adapter module the parameter group number is 1. 

5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module. 

NOT DEFINED Fieldbus module is not found, or it is not properly 

connected, or parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL setting is 

not EXT FBA. 

0 

PROFIBUS-DP Profibus adapter module 1 

CANopen CANopen adapter module 32 

DEVICENET DeviceNet adapter module 37 

5102 FB PAR 2 These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more 

… … 

information, see the module manual. Note that not all of 

5126 FB PAR 26 

these parameters are necessarily visible. 

5127 FBA PAR Validates any changed adapter module configuration 

REFRESH parameter settings. After refreshing, the value reverts 

automatically to DONE. 

DONE Refreshing done 0 

REFRESH Refreshing 1 

5128 FILE CPI FW Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter 

REV 

module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive. 

Format is xyz where: 

• x = major revision number 

• y = minor revision number 

• x = correction letter. 

0000…FFFF 

hex 

Parameter table revision 1 = 1 

5129 FILE CONFIG Displays the drive type code of the fieldbus adapter module 

ID 

mapping file stored in the memory of the drive. 

0…65535 Drive type code of fieldbus adapter module mapping file 1 = 1 

5130 FILE CONFIG Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file revision 

REV 

stored in the memory of the drive in decimal format. 

Example: 1 = revision 1. 

0…65535 Mapping file revision 1 = 1 

5131 FBA STATUS Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter module 

communication. 

IDLE Adapter is not configured. 0 

EXECUT INIT Adapter is initializing. 1




TIME OUT A time-out has occurred in the communication between the 

adapter and the drive. 

CONFIG 

ERROR 

Adapter configuration error: The major or minor revision 

code of the common program revision in the fieldbus 

adapter module is not the revision required by the module 

(see parameter 5132 FBA CPI FW REV) or mapping file 

upload has failed more than three times. 

OFF-LINE Adapter is off-line. 4 

ON-LINE Adapter is on-line. 5 

RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset. 6 

5132 FBA CPI FW Displays the common program revision of the adapter 

REV 

module in format axyz, where: 

• a = major revision number 

• xy = minor revision numbers 

• z = correction letter. 

Example: 190A = revision 1.90A 

Common program revision of the adapter module 1 = 1 

5133 FBA APPL FW Displays the application program revision of the adapter 

REV 

module in format axyz, where: 

• a = major revision number 

• xy = minor revision numbers 

• z = correction letter. 

Example: 190A = revision 1.90A 

Application program revision of the adapter module 1 = 1 

52 PANEL COMM Communication settings for the control panel port on the 

drive 

5201 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive. Two units with the same 

address are not allowed on-line. 

1 

1…247 Address 1 = 1 

5202 BAUD RATE Defines the transfer rate of the link. 9.6 kb/s 

1.2 kb/s 1.2 kbit/s 1 = 

2.4 kb/s 2.4 kbit/s 

0.1 kbit/s 



19.2 kb/s 19.2 kbit/s 

38.4 kb/s 38.4 kbit/s 

57.6 kb/s 57.6 kbit/s 

115.2 kb/s 115.2 kbit/s 

5203 PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting 

must be used in all on-line stations. 

8 NONE 1 

8 NONE 1 8 data bits, no parity bit, one stop bit 0 

8 NONE 2 8 data bits, no parity bit, two stop bits 1 

2 

3




8 EVEN 1 8 data bits, even parity indication bit, one stop bit 2 

8 ODD 1 8 data bits, odd parity indication bit, one stop bit 3 

5204 OK 

Number of valid messages received by the drive. During 0 

MESSAGES normal operation, this number increases constantly. 

0…65535 Number of messages 1 = 1 

5205 PARITY Number of characters with a parity error received from the 0 

ERRORS Modbus link. If the number is high, check that the parity 

settings of the devices connected on the bus are the same. 

Note: High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors. 

0…65535 Number of characters 1 = 1 

5206 FRAME 

ERRORS 

Number of characters with a framing error received by the 

Modbus link. If the number is high, check that the 

communication speed settings of the devices connected on 

the bus are the same. 



5207 BUFFER 

OVERRUNS 

Number of characters which overflow the buffer, ie number 

of characters which exceed the maximum message length, 

128 bytes. 


5208 CRC ERRORS Number of messages with an CRC (cyclic redundancy 

check) error received by the drive. If the number is high, 

check CRC calculation for possible errors. 


0 


53 EFB PROTOCOL Embedded fieldbus link settings. See chapter Fieldbus 

control with embedded fieldbus on page 301. 

5302 EFB STATION 

ID 

Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same 

address are not allowed on-line. 

0…247 Address 1 = 1 

5303 EFB BAUD 

RATE 

Defines the transfer rate of the link. 9.6 kb/s 

1.2 kb/s 1.2 kbit/s 1 = 


0.1 kbit/s 



19.2 kb/s 19.2 kbit/s 

38.4 kb/s 38.4 kbit/s 

57.6 kb/s 57.6 kbit/s 

115.2 kb/s 115.2 kbit/s 

5304 EFB PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s) and the data length. 8 NONE 1 

The same setting must be used in all on-line stations. 

8 NONE 1 No parity bit, one stop bit, 8 data bits 0 

0 

0 

1




8 NONE 2 No parity bit, two stop bits, 8 data bits 1 

8 EVEN 1 Even parity indication bit, one stop bit, 8 data bits 2 

8 ODD 1 Odd parity indication bit, one stop bit, 8 data bits 3 

5305 EFB CTRL Selects the communication profile. See section 

ABB DRV 

PROFILE Communication profiles on page 315. 

LIM 

ABB DRV LIM ABB drives limited profile 0 

DCU PROFILE DCU profile 1 

ABB DRV 

FULL 

ABB drives profile 2 

5306 EFB OK Number of valid messages received by the drive. During 0 

MESSAGES normal operation, this number increases constantly. 


5307 EFB CRC 

ERRORS 

Number of messages with an CRC (cyclic redundancy 

check) error received by the drive. If the number is high, 

check CRC calculation for possible errors. 


0 


5310 EFB PAR 10 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 

40005. 

0 

0…65535 Parameter index 1 = 1 


40006. 

0 



40007. 

0 



40008. 

0 



40009. 

0 



40010. 

0 



40011. 

0 



40012. 

0 

0…65535 Parameter index 1 = 1




5318 EFB PAR 18 For Modbus: Sets an additional delay before the drive 

begins transmitting response to the master request. 

0 

0…65535 Delay in milliseconds 1 = 1 

5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB drives profile (ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL) 

Control word. Read only copy of the fieldbus Control word. 

0000 hex 

0000…FFFF 

hex 

Control word 

5320 EFB PAR 20 ABB drives profile (ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL) 

Status word. Read only copy of the fieldbus Status word. 

0000 hex 

0000…FFFF 

hex 

Status word 

54 FBA DATA IN Data from the drive to the fieldbus controller through a 

fieldbus adapter. See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus 

adapter on page 325. 


5401 FBA DATA IN 1 Selects data to be transferred from the drive to the fieldbus 

controller. 

0 Not in use 

1…6 Control and status data words 

101…9999 Parameter index 

5402 FBA DATA IN 2 See 5401 FBA DATA IN 1. 

… … … 

5410 FBA DATA IN 

10 

See 5401 FBA DATA IN 1. 

55 FBA DATA OUT Data from the fieldbus controller to the drive through a 

fieldbus adapter. See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus 



5501 FBA DATA 

OUT 1 

0 Not in use 

5401 setting Data word 

1 Control word 

2 REF1 

3 REF2 

4 Status word 

5 Actual value 1 


Selects data to be transferred from the fieldbus controller to 

the drive.


1…6 Control and status data words 

101…9999 Drive parameter 

5502 FBA DATA 

OUT 2 

See 5501 FBA DATA OUT 1. 

… … … 

5510 FBA DATA 

OUT 10 

See 5501 FBA DATA OUT 1. 

84 SEQUENCE Sequence programming. See section Sequence 

PROG 

programming on page 166. 

8401 SEQ PROG 

ENABLE 



5501 setting Data word 

1 Control word 

2 REF1 

3 REF2 

4 Status word 



Enables Sequence programming. 

If Sequence programming enable signal is lost, the 

Sequence programming is stopped, Sequence 

programming state (0168 SEQ PROG STATE) is set to 1 

and all timers and outputs (RO/TO/AO) are set to zero. 

DISABLED Disabled 0 

EXT2 Enabled in external control location 2 (EXT2) 1 

EXT1 Enabled in external control location 1 (EXT1) 2 

EXT1&EXT2 Enabled in external control locations 1 and 2 (EXT1 and 

EXT2) 

3 

ALWAYS Enabled in external control locations 1 and 2 (EXT1 and 

EXT2) and in local control (LOCAL) 

4 

DISABLE 

D




8402 SEQ PROG 

START 

Selects the source for the Sequence programming 

activation signal. 

When Sequence programming is activated, the 

programming starts from the previously used state. 

If Sequence programming activation signal is lost, the 

Sequence programming is stopped and all timers and 

outputs (RO/TO/AO) are set to zero. Sequence 

programming state (0168 SEQ PROG STATE) remains 

unchanged. 

If start from the first Sequence programming state is 

required, the Sequence programming must be reset by 

parameter 8404 SEQ PROG RESET. If start from the first 

Sequence programming state is always required, reset and 

start signal sources (8404 and 8402 SEQ PROG START) 

must be through the same digital input. 

Note: The drive will not start if no Run enable signal is 

received (1601 RUN ENABLE). 

DI1(INV) Sequence programming activation through inverted digital 

input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = inactive. 

-1 





NOT SEL No Sequence programming activation signal 0 

DI1 Sequence programming activation through digital input DI1. 1 

1 = active, 0 = inactive. 





DRIVE START Sequence programming activation at drive start 6 

TIMED FUNC 1 Sequence programming is activated by timed function 1. 

See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS. 

7 




RUNNING Sequence programming is always active. 11 

8403 SEQ PROG 

PAUSE 

Selects the source for the Sequence programming pause 

signal. When Sequence programming pause is activated, all 

timers and outputs (RO/TO/AO) are frozen. Sequence 

programming state transition is possible only by parameter 

8405 SEQ ST FORCE. 

NOT SEL 

NOT SEL




DI1(INV) Pause signal through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 -1 

= inactive. 





NOT SEL No pause signal 0 

DI1 Pause signal through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = 

inactive. 

1 





PAUSED Sequence programming pause enabled 6 

8404 SEQ PROG 

RESET 

Selects the source for the Sequence programming reset 

signal. Sequence programming state (0168 SEQ PROG 

STATE) is set to the first state and all timers and outputs 

(RO/TO/AO) are set to zero. 

Reset is possible only when Sequence programming is 

stopped. 

DI1(INV) Reset through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = 

inactive. 

-1 






DI1 Reset through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1 





RESET Reset. After reset parameter value is automatically set to 

NOT SEL. 

6 

8405 SEQ ST 

FORCE 

Forces the Sequence programming to a selected state. 

Note: State is changed only when Sequence programming 

is paused by parameter 8403 SEQ PROG PAUSE and this 

parameter is set to the selected state. 

STATE 1 State is forced to state 1. 1 




NOT SEL 

STATE 1








8406 SEQ LOGIC Defines the source for the logic value 1. Logic value 1 is NOT SEL 

VAL 1 compared to logic value 2 as defined by parameter 8407 

SEQ LOGIC OPER 1. 

Logic operation values are used in state transitions. See 

parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 / 8426 ST1 TRIG TO 

ST N selection LOGIC VAL. 

DI1(INV) Logic value 1 through inverted digital input DI1 -1 





NOT SEL No logic value 0 

DI1 Logic value 1 through digital input DI1 1 





SUPRV1 Logic value according to supervision parameters 

6 

OVER 3201…3203. See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION. 


7 



8 


SUPRV1 

UNDER 


SUPRV2 

UNDER 


SUPRV3 

UNDER 


TIMED FUNC 1 Logic value 1 is activated by timed function 1. See 

parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS. 1 = timed 

function active. 

12 




8407 SEQ LOGIC Selects the operation between logic value 1 and 2. Logic NOT SEL 

OPER 1 operation values are used in state transitions. See 

parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 / 8426 ST1 TRIG TO 

ST N selection LOGIC VAL.




NOT SEL Logic value 1 (no logic comparison) 0 

AND Logic function: AND 1 

OR Logic function: OR 2 

XOR Logic function: XOR 3 

8408 SEQ LOGIC 

VAL 2 

See parameter 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1. 

See parameter 8406. 

NOT SEL 

8409 SEQ LOGIC Selects the operation between logic value 3 and the result NOT SEL 

OPER 2 of the first logic operation defined by parameter 8407 SEQ 

LOGIC OPER 1. 

NOT SEL Logic value 2 (no logic comparison) 0 

AND Logic function: AND 1 

OR Logic function: OR 2 

XOR Logic function: XOR 3 

8410 SEQ LOGIC 

VAL 3 

See parameter 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1. 

See parameter 8406. 

NOT SEL 

8411 SEQ VAL 1 Defines the high limit for the state change when parameter 0.0% 

HIGH 

8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 is set to eg AI 1 HIGH 1. 


8412 SEQ VAL 1 Defines the low limit for the state change when parameter 0.0% 

LOW 

8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 is set to eg AI 1 LOW 1. 


8413 SEQ VAL 2 Defines the high limit for the state change when parameter 0.0% 

HIGH 

8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 is set to eg AI 2 HIGH 1. 


8414 SEQ VAL 2 Defines the low limit for the state change when parameter 0.0% 

LOW 

8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 is set to eg AI 2 LOW 1. 


8415 CYCLE CNT Activates the cycle counter for Sequence programming. NOT SEL 

LOC 

Example: When parameter is set to ST6 TO NEXT, the 

cycle count (0171 SEQ CYCLE CNTR) increases every 

time the state changes from state 6 to state 7. 

NOT SEL Disabled 0 

ST1 TO NEXT From state 1 to state 2 1 







ST8 TO NEXT From state 8 to state 1 8




ST1 TO N From state 1 to state n. State n is defined by parameter 

8427 ST1 STATE N. 















8416 CYCLE CNT 

RST 

Selects the source for the cycle counter reset signal (0171 

SEQ CYCLE CNTR). 

DI1(INV) Reset through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = 

inactive. 

-1 






DI1 Reset through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1 





STATE 1 Reset during state transition to state 1. Counter is reset, 

when the state has been reached. 

6 



7 



8 



9 



10 



11 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

NOT SEL








SEQ PROG 

RST 

Reset signal source defined by parameter 8404 SEQ PROG 

RESET 

8420 ST1 REF SEL Selects the source for the Sequence programming state 1 

reference. Parameter is used when parameter 1103 REF1 

SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to SEQ PROG / 

AI1+SEQ PROG / AI2+SEQ PROG. 

Note: Constant speeds in group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS 

overwrite the selected Sequence programming reference. 

0.0% 

COMM 0136 COMM VALUE 2. For scaling, see Fieldbus reference -1.3 

scaling on page 310. 


REF = AI1(%) · (50% / AI2 (%)) 

-1.2 


REF = AI1(%) + 50% - AI2(%) 

-1.1 


REF = AI1(%) · (AI2(%) / 50%) 

-1.0 


REF = AI1(%) + AI2(%) - 50% 

-0.9 

DI4U,5D Digital input DI4: Reference increase. Digital input DI5: 


-0.8 

DI3U,4D Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 


-0.7 

DI3U,4DR Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 


-0.6 

AI2 JOY Analog input AI2 as joystick. The minimum input signal runs -0.5 

the motor at the maximum reference in the reverse 

direction, the maximum input at the maximum reference in 

the forward direction. Minimum and maximum references 

are defined by parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1105 REF1 

MAX. See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT selection 

AI1/JOYST for more information. 

AI1 JOY See selection AI2 JOY. -0.4 

AI2 Analog input AI2 -0.3 

AI1 Analog input AI1 -0.2 

KEYPAD Control panel -0.1 

0.0 …100.0% Constant speed 1 = 0.1% 

8421 ST1 

COMMANDS 

Selects the start, stop and direction for state 1. Parameter 

1002 EXT2 COMMANDS must be set to SEQ PROG. 

Note: If change of direction of rotation is required, 

parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to REQUEST. 

DRIVE 

STOP 

12 

13 

14




DRIVE STOP Drive coast or ramps to stop depending on parameter 2102 

STOP FUNCTION setting. 

START FRW Direction or rotation is fixed to forward. If the drive is not 

already running, it is started according to parameter 2101 

START FUNCTION settings. 

START REV Direction or rotation is fixed to reverse. If the drive is not 

already running, it is started according to parameter 2101 

START FUNCTION settings. 

8422 ST1 RAMP Selects the acceleration/deceleration ramp time for 

Sequence programming state 1, ie defines the rate of the 

reference change. 

-0.2/-0.1/ 

0.0…1800.0 s 

8423 ST1 OUT 

CONTROL 

Time 

When value is set to -0.2, ramp pair 2 is used. Ramp pair 2 

is defined by parameters 2205…2207. 

When value is set to -0.1, ramp pair 1 is used. Ramp pair 1 

is defined by parameters 2202…2204. 

With ramp pair 1/2, parameter 2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL 

must be set to SEQ PROG. See also parameters 

2202…2207. 

Selects the relay, transistor and analog output control for 

Sequence programming state 1. 

The relay/transistor output control must be activated by 

setting parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 / 1805 DO 

SIGNAL to SEQ PROG. Analog output control must be 

activated by parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS. 

Analog output control values can be monitored with signal 

0170 SEQ PROG AO VAL. 

R=0,D=1,AO=0 Relay output is de-energized (opened), transistor output is 

energized and analog output is cleared. 

R=1,D=0,AO=0 Relay output is energized (closed), transistor output is deenergized 

and analog output is cleared. 

R=0,D=0,AO=0 Relay and transistor outputs are de-energized (opened) and 

analog output value is set to zero. 

RO=0,DO=0 Relay and transistor outputs are de-energized (opened) and 

analog output control is frozen to the previously set value. 

RO=1,DO=1 Relay and transistor outputs are energized (closed) and 

analog output control is frozen to the previously set value. 

DO=1 Transistor output is energized (closed) and relay output is 

de-energized. Analog output control is frozen to the 

previously set value. 

RO=1 Transistor output is de-energized (opened) and relay output 

is energized. Analog output control is frozen to the 

previously set value. 

0 

1 

2 

0.0 s 

1 = 0.1 s 

AO=0 

-0.7 

-0.6 

-0.5 

-0.4 

-0.3 

-0.2 

-0.1




AO=0 Analog output value is set to zero. Relay and transistor 

outputs are frozen to the previously set value. 

0.1…100.0% Value written to signal 0170 SEQ PROG AO VAL. Value can 

be connected to control analog output AO by setting 

parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL value to 170 (ie signal 

0170 SEQ PROG AO VAL). AO value is frozen to this value 

until it is zeroed. 

8424 ST1 CHANGE 

DLY 

Defines the delay time for state 1. When delay has elapsed, 

state transition is allowed. See parameters 8425 ST1 TRIG 

TO ST 2 and 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N. 

0.0 

0.0 s 

0.0…6553.5 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s 

8425 ST1 TRIG TO 

ST 2 

Selects the source for the trigger signal which changes the 

state from state 1 to state 2. 

Note: State change to state N (8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N) 

has a higher priority than state change to the next state 

(8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2). 

DI1(INV) Trigger through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = 

inactive. 

-1 





NOT SEL No trigger signal. If parameter 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N 

setting is also NOT SEL, the state is frozen and can be reset 

only with parameter 8402 SEQ PROG START. 

0 

DI1 Trigger through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1 





AI 1 LOW 1 State change when AI1 value < par. 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 

value. 

6 

AI 1 HIGH 1 State change when AI1 value > par. 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH 

value. 


value. 

AI 2 HIGH 1 State change when AI2 value > par. 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH 

value. 

AI1 OR 2 LO1 State change when AI1 or AI2 value < par. 8412 SEQ VAL 1 

LOW value. 

AI1LO1AI2HI1 State change when AI1 value < par. 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 

value and AI2 value > par. 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH value. 

NOT SEL 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11




AI1LO1 ORDI5 State change when AI1 value < par. 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 

value or when DI5 is active. 

12 

AI2HI1 ORDI5 State change when AI2 value > par. 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH 13 



value. 

14 

AI 1 HIGH 2 State change when AI1 value > par. 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH 15 

value. 


value. 

16 

AI 2 HIGH 2 State change when AI2 value > par. 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH 17 

value. 

AI1 OR 2 LO2 State change when AI1 or AI2 value < par. 8414 SEQ VAL 2 18 

LOW value. 

AI1LO2AI2HI2 State change when AI1 value < par. 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW 

value and AI2 value > par. 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value. 

19 

AI1LO2 ORDI5 State change when AI1 value < par. 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW 


20 

AI2HI2 ORDI5 State change when AI2 value > par. 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH 21 


TIMED FUNC 1 Trigger with timed function 1. See parameter group 36 

TIMED FUNCTIONS. 

22 




CHANGE DLY State change after delay time defined by parameter 8424 

ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed. 

26 

DI1 OR DELAY State change after DI1 activation or after delay time defined 27 

by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed. 

DI2 OR DELAY See selection DI1 OR DELAY. 28 




AI1HI1 ORDLY State change when AI1 value > par. 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH 32 

value or after delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 

CHANGE DLY has elapsed. 

AI2LO1 ORDLY State change when AI1 value < par. 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 



AI1HI2 ORDLY State change when AI1 value > par. 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH 



33 

34




AI2LO2 ORDLY State change when AI2 value < par. 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW 



SUPRV1 

OVER 

SUPRV2 

OVER 

SUPRV3 

OVER 

SUPRV1 

UNDER 

SUPRV2 

UNDER 

SUPRV3 

UNDER 

SPV1OVRORD 

LY 

SPV2OVRORD 

LY 

SPV3OVRORD 

LY 

Logic value according to supervision parameters 

3201…3203. See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION. 








State change according to supervision parameters 

3201…3203 or when delay time defined by parameter 8424 

ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed. See parameter group 32 

SUPERVISION. 




SUPERVISION. 




SUPERVISION. 

SPV1UNDORD 

LY 

See selection SPV1OVRORDLY. 45 

SPV2UNDORD 

LY 


SPV3UNDORD 

LY 


CNTR OVER State change when counter value exceeds the limit defined 

by par. 1905 COUNTER LIMIT. See parameters 

1904…1911. 

48 

CNTR UNDER State change when counter value is below the limit defined 

by par. 1905 COUNTER LIMIT. See parameters 

1904…1911. 

LOGIC VAL State change according to logic operation defined by 

parameters 8406…8410 

ENTER 

SETPNT 

State change when drive output frequency/speed enters the 

reference area (ie the difference is less than or equal to 4% 

of the maximum reference). 

35 

36 

37 

38 

42 

43 

44 

49 

50 

51




AT SETPOINT State change when drive output frequency/speed equals the 

reference value (= is within tolerance limits, ie the error is 

less than or equal to 1% of the maximum reference). 

AI1 L1 & DI5 State change when AI1 value < par. 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 

and when DI5 is active. 


value and when DI5 is active. 

AI1 H1 & DI5 State change when AI1 value > par. 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH 












DLY AND DI1 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 

ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and DI1 is active. 









DLY & AI2 H2 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 

ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and AI2 value > par. 8413 

SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value. 

DLY & AI2 L2 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 

ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and AI2 value < par. 8414 

SEQ VAL 2 LOW value. 

DLY & AI1 H1 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 

ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and AI1 value > par. 8411 

SEQ VAL 1 HIGH value. 

DLY & AI1 L1 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 

ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and AI1 value < par. 8412 

SEQ VAL 1 LOW value. 

COMM VAL1 

#0 

COMM VAL1 

#1 

0135 COMM VALUE 1 bit 0. 1 = state change. 70 


52 

53 

54 

55 

56 

57 

58 

59 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

69




COMM VAL1 

#2 


COMM VAL1 

#3 


COMM VAL1 

#4 


COMM VAL1 

#5 


COMM VAL1 

#6 


COMM VAL1 

#7 


AI2H2DI4SV1O State change according to supervision parameters 

3201…3203 when AI2 value > par. 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH 

value and DI4 is active. 

78 

AI2H2DI5SV1O State change according to supervision parameters 

3201…3203 when AI2 value > par. 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH 

value and DI5 is active. 

STO State change when STO (Safe torque off) has been 

triggered. 

STO(-1) State change when STO (Safe torque off) becomes inactive 

and the drive operates normally. 

8426 ST1 TRIG TO 

ST N 

Selects the source for the trigger signal which changes the 

state from state 1 to state N. State N is defined with 

parameter 8427 ST1 STATE N. 

Note: State change to state N (8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N) 

has a higher priority than state change to the next state 

(8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2). 

79 

80 

81 

NOT SEL 

8427 ST1 STATE N 

See parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2. 

Defines the state N. See parameter 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST 

N. 

STATE 1 

STATE 1 State 1 1 







STATE 8 

8430 ST2 REF SEL 

State 8 8 

… 

8497 ST8 STATE N 

See parameters 8420…8427.




98 OPTIONS External serial communication activation 

9802 COMM PROT 

SEL 

Activates the external serial communication and selects the 

interface. 

NOT SEL No communication 0 

STD MODBUS Embedded fieldbus. Interface: EIA-485 provided by optional 1 

FMBA-01 Modbus adapter connected to drive terminal X3. 

See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on 

page 301. 

EXT FBA The drive communicates through a fieldbus adapter module 

connected to drive terminal X3. See also parameter group 

51 EXT COMM MODULE. 

See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 

325. 

MODBUS 

RS232 

Embedded fieldbus. Interface: RS-232 (ie control panel 

connector). See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus 


NOT SEL 

99 START-UP DATA Language selection. Definition of motor set-up data. 

9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language used on the assistant control 

panel. 

Note: With the ACS-CP-D assistant control panel, the 

following languages are available: English (0), Chinese (1), 

Korean (2) and Japanese (3). 

ENGLISH 

ENGLISH British English 0 

ENGLISH (AM) American English 1 

DEUTSCH German 2 

ITALIANO Italian 3 

ESPAÑOL Spanish 4 

PORTUGUES Portuguese 5 

NEDERLANDS Dutch 6 

FRANÇAIS French 7 

DANSK Danish 8 

SUOMI Finnish 9 

SVENSKA Swedish 10 

RUSSKI Russian 11 

POLSKI Polish 12 

TÜRKÇE Turkish 13 

CZECH Czech 14 

MAGYAR Hungarian 15 

ELLINIKA Greek 16 

9902 APPLIC Selects the application macro. See chapter Application ABB 

MACRO macros on page 109. 

STANDA 

RD 

4 

10




ABB 

STANDARD 

Standard macro for constant speed applications 1 

3-WIRE 3-wire macro for constant speed applications 2 

ALTERNATE Alternate macro for start forward and start reverse 

applications 

3 

MOTOR POT Motor potentiometer macro for digital signal speed control 

applications 

4 

HAND/AUTO Hand/Auto macro to be used when two control devices are 

connected to the drive: 

• Device 1 communicates through the interface defined by 

external control location EXT1. 

• Device 2 communicates through the interface defined by 

external control location EXT2. 

EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time. Switching between 

EXT1/2 through digital input. 

5 

PID CONTROL PID control. For applications in which the drive controls a 

process value, eg pressure control by the drive running the 

pressure boost pump. Measured pressure and the pressure 

reference are connected to the drive. 

TORQUE 

CTRL 

Torque control macro 8 

LOAD FD SET FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop 

file. Parameter view is selected by parameter 1611 

PARAMETER VIEW. 

FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of 

parameters to unpowered drives. FlashDrop allows easy 

customization of the parameter list, eg selected parameters 

can be hidden. For more information, see MFDT-01 

FlashDrop user’s manual (3AFE68591074 [English]). 

31 

USER S1 

LOAD 

USER S1 

SAVE 

USER S2 

LOAD 

USER S2 

SAVE 

USER S3 

LOAD 

USER S3 

SAVE 

User 1 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that 

the saved parameter settings and the motor model are 

suitable for the application. 

Save User 1 macro. Stores the current parameter settings 

and the motor model. 











6 

0 

-1 

-2 

-3 

-4 

-5




9903 MOTOR TYPE Selects the motor type. 

Cannot be changed while the drive is running. 

AM Asynchronous motor. Three-phase AC voltage-supplied 

induction motor with squirrel cage rotor. 

PMSM Permanent magnet motor. Three-phase AC voltagesupplied 

synchronous motor with permanent magnet rotor 

and sinusoidal back emf voltage. 

9904 MOTOR CTRL 

MODE 

VECTOR: 

SPEED 

VECTOR: 

TORQ 

SCALAR: 

FREQ 

Selects the motor control mode. SCALAR: 

FREQ 

Sensorless vector control mode. 

Reference 1 = speed reference in rpm. 

Reference 2 = speed reference in percent. 100% is the 

absolute maximum speed, equal to the value of parameter 

2002 MAXIMUM SPEED (or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the 

absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the 

maximum speed value). 

Vector control mode. 

Reference 1 = speed reference in rpm. 

Reference 2 = torque reference in percent. 100% equals 

nominal torque. 

Scalar control mode. 

3 

Reference 1 = frequency reference in Hz. 

Reference 2 = frequency reference in percent. 100% is the 

absolute maximum frequency, equal to the value of 

parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ (or 2007 MINIMUM 

FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater 

than the maximum speed value). 

AM 

1 

2 

1 

2

9905 MOTOR NOM 

VOLT 

200 V units: 

115…345 V 

400 V E units: 

200…600 V 

400 V U units: 

230…690 V 





CURR 

Defines the nominal motor voltage. For asynchronous 

motors, must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. 

For permanent magnet motors, the nominal voltage is the 

back emf voltage at nominal speed. 

If the voltage is given as voltage per rpm, eg 60 V per 

1000 rpm, the voltage for 3000 rpm nominal speed is 

3·60V = 180V. 

The drive cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater 

than the input power voltage. 

Note that the output voltage is not limited by the nominal 

motor voltage but increased linearly up to the value of the 

input voltage. 

Output voltage 

WARNING! Never connect a motor to a drive which is 

connected to power line with voltage level higher than 

the rated motor voltage. 

Voltage. 

Note: The stress on the motor insulations is always 

dependent on the drive supply voltage. This also applies to 

the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than the 

rating of the drive and the supply of the drive. 

Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the 

value on the motor rating plate. 

200 V 

units: 

230 V 

400 V 

E units: 

400 V 

400 V 

U units: 

460 V 

1 = 1 V 

0.2…2.0 · I 2N Current 1 = 0.1 A 


FREQ 

Defines the nominal motor frequency, ie the frequency at 

which the output voltage equals the motor nominal voltage: 

Field weakening point = Nom. frequency · Supply voltage / 

Motor nom. voltage 

I 2N 

E: 50.0 Hz 

U: 60.0 Hz 



SPEED 

Defines the nominal motor speed. Must be equal to the 

value on the motor rating plate. 

Type 

dependent 

50…30000 rpm Speed 1 = 1 rpm 


POWER 

Input voltage 

9905 

9907 

Output frequency 

Defines the nominal motor power. Must equal the value on 

the motor rating plate. 

0.2…3.0 · P N kW Power 1 = 

0.1 kW / 

0.1 hp 

P N




9910 ID RUN This parameter controls a self-calibration process called the 

Motor ID run. During this process, the drive operates the 

motor and makes measurements to identify motor 

characteristics and create a model used for internal 

calculations. 

OFF/IDMAGN The Motor ID run process is not run. Identification 

magnetization is performed, depending on parameter 9904 

MOTOR CTRL MODE. In identification magnetization, the 

motor model is calculated at first start by magnetizing the 

motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed (motor not rotating, 

except that a permanent magnet motor can rotate a fraction 

of a revolution). The model is recalculated always at start 

after motor parameter changes. 

• Parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR: SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR: 

TORQ): Identification magnetization is performed. 

• Parameter 9904 = 3 (SCALAR: FREQ): Identification 

magnetization is not performed. 

ON ID run. Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The 

ID run takes about one minute. An ID run is especially 

effective when: 

• vector control mode is used (parameter 9904 = 1 

[VECTOR: SPEED] or 2 [VECTOR: TORQ]), and 

• operation point is near zero speed and/or 

• operation requires a torque range above the motor 

nominal torque, over a wide speed range, and without 

any measured speed feedback (ie without a pulse 

encoder). 

Note: The motor must be de-coupled from the driven 

equipment. 

Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before 

starting the ID run. During the run, the motor will rotate in 

the forward direction. 

Note: If motor parameters are changed after ID run, repeat 

the ID run. 

WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 

50…80% of the nominal speed during the ID run. 

ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR 

BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN! 


TORQUE 

Calculated motor nominal torque in N·m (calculation is 

based on parameter 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER and 9908 

MOTOR NOM SPEED values). 

OFF/IDM 

AGN 

0…3000.0 N·m Read-only 1 = 

0.1 N·m 

0 

1 

0

9913 MOTOR POLE 

PAIRS 




Calculated motor pole pair number (calculation is based on 

parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ and 9908 MOTOR 

NOM SPEED values). 

- Read-only 1 = 1 

9914 PHASE 

INVERSION 

Inverts two phases in the motor cable. This changes the 

direction of the motor rotation without having to exchange 

the positions of two motor cable phase conductors at the 

drive output terminals or at the motor connection box. 

NO Phases not inverted 0 

YES Phases inverted 1 

0 

NO

300 Actual signals and parameters




Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 301 

The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a 

communication network using embedded fieldbus. 

System overview 

The drive can be connected to an external control system through a fieldbus adapter 

or embedded fieldbus. For fieldbus adapter control, see chapter Fieldbus control with 

fieldbus adapter on page 325. 

The embedded fieldbus supports Modbus RTU protocol. Modbus is a serial, 

asynchronous protocol. Transaction is half-duplex. 

The embedded fieldbus can be connected with either RS-232 (control panel 

connector X2) or EIA-485 (terminal X1 of the optional FMBA-01 Modbus adapter 

connected to drive terminal X3). The maximum length of the communication cable 

with RS-232 is restricted to 3 meters. For more information on the FMBA-01 Modbus 

adapter module, see FMBA-01 Modbus adapter module user’s manual 

(3AFE68586704 [English]). 

RS-232 is designed for a point-to-point application (a single master controlling one 

slave). EIA-485 is designed for a multipoint application (a single master controlling 

one or more slaves).

302 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 

Drive 

RS-232 

panel connector 

1) 

X3 

FMBA-01 

Modbus adapter 

Other 

devices 

Data flow 

Control word (CW) 

References 

Status word (SW) 

Actual values 

Parameter R/W 

requests/responses 

EIA-485 1) 

X1 

Fieldbus controller 

Fieldbus 

1) Embedded fieldbus 

(Modbus) connection is 

either RS-232 or EIA-485. 

Process I/O (cyclic) 

Service messages (acyclic) 

The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus 

interface, or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other 

available sources, eg digital and analog inputs.


Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus 

Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control, the FMBA-01 Modbus adapter (if 

used) must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions 

given in section Attach the optional fieldbus module on page 35, and the module 

manual. 

The communication through the fieldbus link is initialized by setting parameter 9802 

COMM PROT SEL to STD MODBUS or MODBUS RS232. The communication 

parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL must also be adjusted. See the table below. 

Parameter Alternative 

settings 

COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION 


SEL 

NOT SEL 

STD MODBUS 

EXT FBA 

MODBUS RS232 

ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION 

5302 EFB STATION 

ID 

5303 EFB BAUD 

RATE 

Setting for 

fieldbus control 

STD MODBUS 

(with EIA-485) 

MODBUS RS232 

(with RS-232) 

Function/Information 

Initializes embedded fieldbus 

communication. 

0…247 Any Defines the station ID address of 

the RS-232/EIA-485 link. No two 

stations on line may have the 

same address. 

1.2 kbit/s 

2.4 kbit/s 

4.8 kbit/s 

9.6 kbit/s 

19.2 kbit/s 

38.4 kbit/s 

57.6 kbit/s 

115.2 kbit/s 

5304 EFB PARITY 8 NONE 1 

8 NONE 2 

8 EVEN 1 

8 ODD 1 

5305 EFB CTRL 

PROFILE 

5310 

… 

5317 

EFB PAR 10 

… 

EFB PAR 17 

ABB DRV LIM 

DCU PROFILE 

ABB DRV FULL 

Defines the communication 

speed of the RS-232/EIA-485 

link. 

Selects the parity setting. The 

same settings must be used in all 

on-line stations. 

Any Selects the communication profile 

used by the drive. See section 

Communication profiles on 

page 315. 

0…65535 Any Selects an actual value to be 

mapped to Modbus register 400xx. 

After the configuration parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL have been set, the 

drive control parameters (shown in section Drive control parameters on page 304) 

must be checked and adjusted when necessary. 

The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up, or when 

parameter 5302 EFB STATION ID setting is cleared and reset.


Drive control parameters 

After the Modbus communication has been set up, the drive control parameters listed 

in the table below should be checked and adjusted when necessary. 

The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the Modbus 

interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal. The 

Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter. 

Parameter Setting for 

fieldbus 

control 

Function/Information Modbus register 

address 

CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU 

1001 EXT1 

COMMANDS 

1002 EXT2 

COMMANDS 

1003 DIRECTION FORWARD 

REVERSE 

REQUEST 

1010 JOGGING 

SEL 


SEL 

1103 REF1 

SELECT 

1106 REF2 

SELECT 

COMM Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 

0…1 (STOP/START) when EXT1 is 

selected as the active control 

location. 

COMM Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 

0…1 (STOP/START) when EXT2 is 

selected as the active control 

location. 

Enables the rotation direction control 

as defined by parameters 1001 and 

1002. The direction control is 

explained in section Reference 

handling on page 311. 

COMM Enables jogging 1 or 2 activation 

through 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bits 

20…21 (JOGGING 1 / JOGGING 2). 

COMM Enables EXT1/EXT2 selection 

through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5 

(EXT2); with the ABB drives profile 

5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 11 (EXT CTRL 

LOC). 

COMM 

COMM+AI1 

COMM*AI1 

COMM 

COMM+AI1 

COMM*AI1 

Fieldbus reference REF1 is used 

when EXT1 is selected as the active 

control location. See section Fieldbus 

references on page 308 for 

information on the alternative 

settings. 

Fieldbus reference REF2 is used 

when EXT2 is selected as the active 

control location. See section Fieldbus 

references on page 308 for 

information on the alternative 

settings. 

40001 

bit 11 

40031 

bits 0…1 

40031 

bits 0…1 

40031 

bit 2 

40032 

bits 

20…21 

40031 

bit 5 

40002 for REF1 

40003 for REF2


fieldbus 

control 


OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU 

1401 RELAY 

OUTPUT 1 

1501 AO1 

CONTENT 

SEL 

COMM 

COMM(-1) 

Enables relay output RO control by 

signal 0134 COMM RO WORD. 

135 Directs the contents of the fieldbus 

reference 0135 COMM VALUE 1 to 

analog output AO. 

40134 for signal 

0134 

40135 for signal 

0135 

SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS ABB DRV DCU 

1601 RUN 

ENABLE 

1604 FAULT 

RESET SEL 

1606 LOCAL 

LOCK 

1607 PARAM 

SAVE 

1608 START 

ENABLE 1 

1609 START 

ENABLE 2 

COMM Enables the control of the inverted 

Run enable signal (Run disable) 

through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 6 

(RUN_DISABLE); with the ABB 

drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 3 

(INHIBIT OPERATION). 

COMM Enables fault reset through the 

fieldbus 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 

(RESET); with the ABB drives profile 

5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 7 (RESET). 

COMM Local control mode lock signal 

through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 

14 (REQ_LOCALLOC) 

DONE 

SAVE… 

Saves parameter value changes 

(including those made through 

fieldbus control) to permanent 

memory. 

COMM Inverted Start enable 1 (Start disable) 


18 (START_DISABLE1) 

COMM Inverted Start enable 2 (Start disable) 


19 (START_DISABLE2) 

40001 

bit 3 

40001 

bit 7 

40031 

bit 6 

40031 

bit 4 

- 40031 

bit 14 

41607 

- 40032 

bit 18 

- 40032 

bit 19 

LIMITS ABB DRV DCU 

2013 MIN 

TORQUE 

SEL 

2014 MAX 

TORQUE 

SEL 

2201 ACC/DEC 

1/2 SEL 


address 

COMM Minimum torque limit 1/2 selection 


15 (TORQLIM2) 

COMM Maximum torque limit 1/2 selection 


15 (TORQLIM2) 

COMM Acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 

selection through 0301 FB CMD 

WORD 1 bit 10 (RAMP_2) 

- 40031 

bit 15 

- 40031 

bit 15 

- 40031 

bit 10



fieldbus 

control 

2209 RAMP 

INPUT 0 

COMM Ramp input to zero through 0301 FB 

CMD WORD 1 bit 13 (RAMP_IN_0); 

with the ABB drives profile 5319 EFB 

PAR 19 bit 6 (RAMP_IN_ ZERO) 

40001 

bit 6 

40031 

bit 13 

COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS ABB DRV DCU 

3018 COMM 

FAULT FUNC 

NOT SEL 

FAULT 

CONST SP 

7 

LAST 

SPEED 

3019 COMM 

FAULT TIME 0.1… 

600.0 s 

Determines the drive action in case 

the fieldbus communication is lost. 

Defines the time between the 

communication loss detection and 

the action selected with parameter 

3018 COMM FAULT FUNC. 

43018 

43019 

PID CONTROLLER REFERENCE SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU 

4010/ 

4110/ 

4210 

SET POINT 

SEL 

COMM 

COMM+AI1 

COMM*AI1 


address 

PID control reference (REF2) 40003 for REF2

Fieldbus control interface 


The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16-bit input 

and output data words (with the ABB drives profile) and 32-bit input and output words 

(with the DCU profile). 

� Control word and Status word 

The Control word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus 

system. The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive 

switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control 

word. 

The Status word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to the 

fieldbus controller. 

� References 

References (REF) are 16-bit signed integers. A negative reference (eg reverse 

direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the 

corresponding positive reference value. The contents of each reference word can be 

used as the speed, frequency, torque or process reference. 

� Actual values 

Actual values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing selected values of the drive.


Fieldbus references 

� Reference selection and correction 

Fieldbus reference (called COMM in signal selection contexts) is selected by setting a 

reference selection parameter – 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT – to 

COMM, COMM+AI1 or COMM*AI1. When parameter 1103 or 1106 is set to COMM, 

the fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction. When parameter 1103 

or 1106 is set to COMM+AI1 or COMM*AI1, the fieldbus reference is corrected using 

analog input AI1 as shown in the following examples for the ABB drives profile. 

Setting When COMM > 0 When COMM < 0 

COMM 

+AI1 

1500 

COMM(%) · (MAX-MIN) + MIN 

+ (AI(%) - 50%) · (MAX-MIN) 

Corrected 

reference (rpm) 

750 

0 

0 

AI = 100% 

AI = 50% 

AI = 0% 

50 

Corrected 


1500 

1200 

750 

300 

0 

0 

AI = 100% 

AI = 50% 

AI = 0% 

50 

100 

100 

Max. limit 

Min. limit 

COMM 

REF (%) 

Max limit 

Min limit 

COMM 

REF (%) 

COMM(%) · (MAX-MIN) - MIN 

+ (AI(%) - 50%) · (MAX-MIN) 

COMM 

REF (%) 

Min. limit 

Max. limit 

COMM 

REF (%) 

Min. limit 

Max. limit 

-100 -50 0 

AI = 100% 

AI = 50% 

AI = 0% 

Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX / 1108 REF2 MAX. 

Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN / 1107 REF2 MIN. 

0 

-750 

-1500 

Corrected 


-100 -50 0 

0 

-300 

AI = 100% 

AI = 50% 

AI = 0% 

-750 

-1200 

-1500 

Corrected 

reference (rpm)

COMM 

*AI1 

COMM(%) · (AI(%) / 50%) · (MAX-MIN) + 

MIN 


Setting When COMM > 0 When COMM < 0 

Corrected 


1500 

750 

0 

0 

AI = 50% 

AI = 100% 

Corrected 


1500 

1200 

750 

300 

0 

0 

AI = 100% 

AI = 0% 

50 100 

AI = 50% 

50 

AI = 0% 

100 

Max. limit 

Min. limit 

COMM 

REF (%) 

Ma.x limit 

Min. limit 

COMM 

REF (%) 

COMM(%) · (AI(%) / 50%) · (MAX-MIN) - 

MIN 

COMM 

REF (%) 

Min. limit 

Max. limit 

COMM 

REF (%) 

Min. limit 

Max. limit 

-100 -50 0 

AI = 0% 

AI = 50% 

AI = 100% 



0 

-750 

-1500 

Corrected 


-100 -50 0 

0 

AI = 0% 

-300 

-750 

AI = 100% 

AI = 50% 

-1200 

-1500 

Corrected 

reference (rpm)


� Fieldbus reference scaling 

Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled for the ABB drives profile as shown 

in the following table. 

Note: Any correction of the reference (see section Reference selection and 

correction on page 310) is applied before scaling. 

Reference Range Reference 

type 

REF1 -32767 

… 

+32767 

REF2 -32767 

… 

+32767 

Speed or 

frequency 

Speed or 

frequency 

Scaling Remarks 

-20000 = -(par. 1105) 

0 = 0 

+20000 = (par. 1105) 

(20000 corresponds to 100%) 

-10000 = -(par. 1108) 

0 = 0 

+10000 = (par. 1108) 


Torque -10000 = -(par. 1108) 

0 = 0 

+10000 = (par. 1108) 


PID 

reference 

-10000 = -(par. 1108) 

0 = 0 

+10000 = (par. 1108) 


Final reference limited by 

1104/1105. Actual motor 

speed limited by 2001/2002 

(speed) or 2007/2008 

(frequency). 


1107/1108. Actual motor 

speed limited by 2001/2002 

(speed) or 2007/2008 

(frequency). 


2015/2017 (torque 1) or 

2016/2018 (torque 2). 


4012/4013 (PID set 1) or 

4112/4113 (PID set 2). 

Note: The settings of parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN have no 

effect on the reference scaling.

� Reference handling 


The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location (EXT1 and 

EXT2) using the parameters in group 10 START/STOP/DIR. Fieldbus references are 

bipolar, ie they can be negative or positive. The following diagrams illustrate how 

group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce the 

reference REF1/REF2. 

Par. 1003 

DIRECTION = 

FORWARD 

Par. 1003 

DIRECTION = 

REVERSE 

Par. 1003 

DIRECTION = 

REQUEST 

� Actual value scaling 

Direction determined by 

the sign of COMM 

Max. ref. 

Fieldbus 

ref. 1/2 

-100% 100% 

-163% 

163% 

–[Max. ref.] 

Resultant 

REF1/2 

Resultant 

REF1/2 

Max. ref. 

Fieldbus 

-163% 

163% 

-100% 100% 

ref. 1/2 

Fieldbus 

-163% 

-100% 

ref. 1/2 

Max. ref. 

Resultant 

REF1/2 


100% 

163% 


Direction determined by digital 

command, eg digital input, 

control panel 

Max. ref. 

Fieldbus 

ref. 1/2 

-100% 100% 

-163% 

163% 


Resultant 

REF1/2 

Max. ref. 

Fieldbus 

-163% 

163% 

-100% 100% 

ref. 1/2 


Max. ref. 

Resultant 

REF1/2 

Fieldbus 

ref. 1/2 

-100% 100% 

-163% 


Resultant 

REF1/2 

Direction 

command: 

FORWARD 

The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual values depends on the 

selected function. See chapter Actual signals and parameters on page 175. 

163% 

Direction 

command: 

REVERSE


Modbus mapping 

The following Modbus function codes are supported by the drive. 

Function Code 

hex (dec) 

Read Multiple 

Holding 

Registers 

Write Single 

Holding 

Register 

� Register mapping 

Additional information 

03 (03) Reads the contents of registers in a slave device. 

Parameter sets, control, status and reference values are mapped 

as holding registers. 

06 (06) Writes to a single register in a slave device. 



Diagnostics 08 (08) Provides a series of tests for checking the communication between 

the master and the slave devices, or for checking various internal 

error conditions within the slave. 

The following subcodes are supported: 

00 Return Query Data: The data passed in the request data field is 

to be returned in the response. The entire response message 

should be identical to the request. 

01 Restart Communications Option: The slave device serial line 

port must be initialized and restarted, and all of its communication 

event counters cleared. If the port is currently in Listen Only Mode, 

no response is returned. If the port is not currently in Listen Only 

Mode, a normal response is returned before the restart. 

04 Force Listen Only Mode: Forces the addressed slave device to 

Listen Only Mode. This isolates it from the other devices on the 

network, allowing them to continue communicating without 

interruption from the addressed remote device. No response is 

returned. The only function that will be processed after this mode is 

entered is the Restart Communications Option function (subcode 

01). 

Write Multiple 

Holding 

Registers 

Read/Write 

Multiple 

Holding 

Registers 

10 (16) Writes to the registers (1 to approximately 120 registers) in a slave 

device. 



17 (23) Performs a combination of one read operation and one write 

operation (function codes 03 and 10) in a single Modbus 

transaction. The write operation is performed before the read 

operation. 

The drive parameters, Control/Status word, references and actual values are mapped 

to the area 4xxxx so that: 

• 40001…40099 are reserved for drive control/status, reference and actual values. 

• 40101…49999 are reserved for drive parameters 0101…9999 (eg 40102 is 

parameter 0102). In this mapping, the thousands and hundreds correspond to the


group number, while the tens and ones correspond to the parameter number 

within a group. 

The register addresses that do not correspond with drive parameters are invalid. 

If there is an attempt to read or write invalid addresses, the Modbus interface returns 

an exception code to the controller. See Exception codes on page 314. 

The following table gives information on the contents of the Modbus addresses 

40001…40012 and 40031…40034. 

Modbus register Access Information 

40001 Control word R/W Control word. Supported only by the ABB drives profile, 

ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV 

LIM or ABB DRV FULL. Parameter 5319 EFB PAR 19 

shows a copy of the Control word in hexadecimal 

format. 

40002 Reference 1 R/W External reference REF1. See section Fieldbus 

references on page 308. 

40003 Reference 2 R/W External reference REF2. See section Fieldbus 

references on page 308. 

40004 Status word R Status word. Supported only by the ABB drives profile, 

ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV 

LIM or ABB DRV FULL. Parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20 

shows a copy of the Control word in hexadecimal 

format. 

40005 

… 

40012 

Actual 1…8 R Actual value 1…8. Use parameter 5310… 5317 to 

select an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 

40005…40012. 

40031 Control word LSW R/W 0301 FB CMD WORD 1, ie the least significant word of 

the DCU profile 32-bit Control word. 

Supported only by the DCU profile, ie when 5305 EFB 

CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE. 

40032 Control word MSW R/W 0302 FB CMD WORD 2, ie the most significant word of 

the DCU profile 32-bit Control word. 



40033 Status word LSW R 0303 FB STS WORD 1, ie the least significant word of 

the DCU profile 32-bit Status word. 



40034 ACS355 Status 

word MSW 

R 0304 FB STS WORD 2, ie the most significant word of 

the DCU profile 32-bit Status word. 



Note: Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile, ie modified 

values are not automatically stored to the permanent memory. Use parameter 1607 

PARAM SAVE to save all changed values.


� Function codes 

Supported function codes for the holding 4xxxx register: 

Code 

hex 

(dec) 

03 

(03) 

06 

(06) 

10 

(16) 

17 

(23) 

Function name Additional information 

Read 4X Register Reads the binary contents of registers (4X references) in a slave 

device. 

Preset single 4X 

register 

Preset multiple 4X 

registers 

Read/Write 4X 

registers 

Note: In the Modbus data message, register 4xxxx is addressed as xxxx -1. For 

example register 40002 is addressed as 0001. 

� Exception codes 

Presets a value into a single register (4X reference). When 

broadcast, the function presets the same register reference in all 

attached slaves. 

Presets values into a sequence of registers (4X references). When 

broadcast, the function presets the same register references in all 

attached slaves. 

Performs a combination of one read operation and one write 

operation (function codes 03 and 10) in a single Modbus 

transaction. Write operation is performed before the read 

operation. 

Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive. The drive 

supports the standard Modbus exception codes listed in the following table. 

Code Name Description 

01 Illegal Function Unsupported command 

02 Illegal Data Address Address does not exist or is read/write protected. 

03 Illegal Data Value Incorrect value for the drive: 

• Value is outside minimum or maximum limits. 

• Parameter is read-only. 

• Message is too long. 

• Parameter write is not allowed when start is active. 

• Parameter write is not allowed when factory macro is 

selected. 

Drive parameter 5318 EFB PAR 18 holds the most recent exception code.

Communication profiles 


The embedded fieldbus supports three communication profiles: 

• DCU communication profile (DCU PROFILE) 

• ABB drives limited communication profile (ABB DRV LIM) 

• ABB drives full communication profile (ABB DRV FULL). 

The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits, and it is the 

internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus 

environment. The ABB drives limited profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface. 

The ABB drives full profile (ABB DRV FULL) supports two Control word bits not 

supported by the ABB DRV LIM implementation. 

Modbus 

network 

ABB drives profile 


RS-232/EIA-485 

ABB DRV LIM / 

ABB DRV FULL 

Data conversion 

DCU profile 

DCU PROFILE 

Control/Status word DCU profile 


for REF1/2 

� ABB drives communication profile 

DCU profile 

Drive 

Actual values 

selected by 

parameters 

5310…5317 

Actual values 

selected by 

parameters 

5310…5317 

Two implementations of the ABB drives communication profile are available: ABB 

drives full and ABB drives limited. The ABB drives communication profile is active 

when parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE is set to ABB DRV FULL or ABB DRV 

LIM. The Control word and Status word for the profile are described below. 

The ABB drives communication profiles can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2. 

The Control word commands are in effect when parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 

or 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS (whichever control location is active) is set to COMM.


Control word 

The table below and the state diagram on page 319 describe the Control word 

content for the ABB drives profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the states 

shown in the diagram. 

ABB drives profile Control word, parameter 5319 EFB PAR 19 

Bit Name Value Comments 

0 OFF1 CONTROL 1 Enter READY TO OPERATE. 

0 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp (2203/2206). 

Enter OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON 

unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active. 

1 OFF2 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive). 

0 Emergency OFF, drive coast to stop. 

Enter OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED. 

2 OFF3 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive). 

0 Emergency stop, drive stops within time defined by par. 

2208. Enter OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON 

INHIBITED. 

WARNING! Ensure motor and driven machine can be 

stopped using this stop mode. 

3 INHIBIT 1 Enter OPERATION ENABLED. (Note: The Run enable 

OPERATION 

signal must be active; see parameter 1601. If par. 1601 is 

set to COMM, this bit also activates the Run enable signal.) 

0 Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION INHIBITED. 

4 Note: Bit 4 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile. 

RAMP_OUT_ 1 Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: OUTPUT 

ZERO 

ENABLED. 

(ABB DRV FULL) 

0 Force Ramp function generator output to zero. 

Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force). 

5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp function. 

Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR 

ENABLED. 

0 Halt ramping (Ramp function generator output held). 

6 RAMP_IN_ 1 Normal operation. Enter OPERATING. 

ZERO 

0 Force Ramp function generator input to zero. 

7 RESET 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Enter SWITCH-ON 

INHIBITED. Effective if par. 1604 is set to COMM. 

0 Continue normal operation. 

8… 

9 

Not in use

Status word 


ABB drives profile Control word, parameter 5319 EFB PAR 19 

Bit Name Value Comments 

10 Note: Bit 10 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL. 

REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled. 

(ABB DRV FULL) 0 Control word =/ 0 or reference =/ 

0: Retain last Control word 

and reference. 

Control word = 0 and reference = 0: Fieldbus control 

enabled. 

Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked. 

11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 Select external control location EXT2. Effective if par. 1102 

is set to COMM. 

0 Select external control location EXT1. Effective if par. 1102 

is set to COMM. 

12… 

15 

Reserved 

The table below and the state diagram on page 319 describe the Status word content 

for the ABB drives profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in 

the diagram. 

ABB drives profile (EFB) Status word, parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20 

Bit Name Value STATE/Description 

(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram) 

0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON 

0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON 

1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE 

0 OFF1 ACTIVE 

2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED 

0 OPERATION INHIBITED 

3 TRIPPED 0…1 FAULT. See chapter Fault tracing on page 335. 

0 No fault 

4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive 

0 OFF2 ACTIVE 

5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 inactive 

0 OFF3 ACTIVE 

6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED 

0 Switch-on inhibit not active 

7 ALARM 1 Alarm. See chapter Fault tracing on page 335. 

0 No alarm


ABB drives profile (EFB) Status word, parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20 

Bit Name Value STATE/Description 

(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram) 

8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value (= is 

within tolerance limits, ie in speed control the difference 

between the output speed and the speed reference is less 

than or equal to 4/1%* of the nominal motor speed). 

* Asymmetric hysteresis: 4% when speed enters the 

reference area, 1% when speed exits the reference area. 

0 Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside 

tolerance limits). 

9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2) 

0 Drive control location: LOCAL 

10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high 

limit. Bit value is 1 until the supervised parameter value falls 

below the supervision low limit. See parameter group 32 

SUPERVISION. 

0 Supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low 

limit. Bit value is 0 until the supervised parameter value 

exceeds the supervision high limit. See parameter group 32 

SUPERVISION. 

11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location EXT2 selected 

0 External control location EXT1 selected 

12 EXT RUN 1 External Run enable signal received 

ENABLE 

0 No external Run enable received 

13… Reserved 

15

State diagram 


The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of Control word (CW) and 

Status word (SW) bits for the ABB drives profile. 


Emergency Stop 

OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) 

(SW Bit5=0) 

OFF1 (CW Bit0=0) 

(SW Bit1=0) 

n(f)=0 / I=0 


n(f)=0 / I=0 

OFF3 

ACTIVE 

OFF1 

ACTIVE 

(SW Bit2 =0) 


OFF2 

ACTIVE 

INPUT POWER OFF 

Power ON (CW Bit0=0) 

(CW Bit3 =0) 

OPERATION INHIBITED 

A B* C D 

OPERATION 

INHIBITED 

(CW Bit4=0)* 

State 

(CW Bit5=0) 

State change 

Path described in example 

CW = Control word 

SW = Status word 

(CW Bit6=0) 

RFG = Ramp function generator 

I = Par. 0104 CURRENT 

f = Par. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 

n = Speed 

* Supported only by ABB DRV FULL 

profile. 

** State transition also occurs if the fault 

is reset from any other source (eg digital 

input). 

Emergency Off 

OFF2 (CW Bit 1=0) 

(SW Bit 4=0) 

B* C* D* 

C D 

D 

A 

B* 

C 

D 


FAULT 

Fault 

SWITCH-ON 

INHIBITED 

NOT READY 

TO SWITCH ON 

READY TO 

SWITCH ON 

READY TO 

OPERATE 

OPERATION 

ENABLED 

RFG OUTPUT 

ENABLED* 

(SW Bit3=1) 

(CW Bit7=1)** 

RFG: ACCELERATOR 

ENABLED 

OPERATING 

(SW Bit6=1) 

(SW Bit0=0) 

(CW xxxx x1*xx xxxx x110) 

(SW Bit0=1) 

(CW= xxxx x1*xx xxxx x111) 

(SW Bit1=1) 

(CW Bit3=1 and 

SW Bit12=1) 

(SW Bit2=1) 

(CW=xxxx x1*xx xxx1* 1111 

ie Bit4=1)* 

(CW=xxxx x1*xx xx11* 1111 

ie Bit5=1) 

(CW=xxxx x1*xx x111* 1111 

ie Bit6=1) 

(SW Bit8=1)


� DCU communication profile 

Because the DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits, two 

different signals are needed for both the control words (0301 and 0302) and status 

words (0303 and 0304). 

Control words 

The following tables describe the Control word content for the DCU profile. 

DCU profile Control word, parameter 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 

Bit Name Value Information 

0 STOP 1 Stop according to either the stop mode parameter (2102) or 

the stop mode requests (bits 7 and 8). 

Note: Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in 

a stop command. 

0 No operation 

1 START 1 Start 

Note: Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in 

a stop command. 


2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction. The direction is defined by using the 

XOR operation on bit 2 and 31 (= sign of the reference) 

values. 

0 Forward direction 

3 LOCAL 1 Enter local control mode. 

0 Enter external control mode. 

4 RESET -> 1 Reset. 

other No operation 

5 EXT2 1 Switch to external control EXT2. 

0 Switch to external control EXT1. 

6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Activate Run disable. 

0 Activate Run enable. 

7 STPMODE_R 1 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp (bit 10). Bit 0 

value must be 1 (STOP). 


8 STPMODE_EM 1 Emergency stop. Bit 0 value must be 1 (STOP). 


9 STPMODE_C 1 Coast to stop. Bit 0 value must be 1 (STOP). 


10 RAMP_2 1 Use acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 2 (defined by 


0 Use acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 1 (defined by 


11 RAMP_OUT_0 1 Force ramp output to zero. 

0 No operation




12 RAMP_HOLD 1 Halt ramping (Ramp function generator output held). 


13 RAMP_IN_0 1 Force ramp input to zero. 


14 REQ_LOCALLOC 1 Enable local lock. Entering the local control mode is 

disabled (LOC/REM key of the panel). 


15 TORQLIM2 1 Use minimum/maximum torque limit 2 (defined by 

parameters 2016 and 2018). 

0 Use minimum/maximum torque limit 1 (defined by 

parameters 2015 and 2017). 



16 FBLOCAL_CTL 1 Fieldbus local mode for Control word requested. 

Example: If the drive is in remote control and the 

start/stop/direction command source is DI for external 

control location 1 (EXT1): by setting bit 16 to value 1, the 

start/stop/direction is controlled by the fieldbus command 

word. 

0 No fieldbus local mode 

17 FBLOCAL_REF 1 Fieldbus local mode Control word for reference requested. 

See the example for bit 16 (FBLOCAL_CTL). 

0 No fieldbus local mode 

18 START_DISABL 1 No Start enable 

E1 

0 Enable start. Effective if parameter 1608 setting is COMM. 

19 START_DISABL 1 No Start enable 

E2 

0 Enable start. Effective if parameter 1609 setting is COMM. 

21 JOGGING 1 1 Activate jogging 1. Effective if parameter 1010 setting is 

COMM. See section Jogging on page 161. 

0 Jogging 1 disabled 

20 JOGGING 2 1 Activate jogging 2. Effective if parameter 1010 setting is 

COMM. See section Jogging on page 161. 

0 Jogging 2 disabled 

22… 

26 

Reserved 

27 REF_CONST 1 Constant speed reference request. 

This is an internal control bit. Only for supervision. 

0 No operation




28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed reference request. 



29 LINK_ON 1 Master detected on fieldbus link. 


0 Fieldbus link is down. 

30 REQ_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit 

0 No start inhibit 

31 Reserved 

Status words 

The following tables describe the Status word content for the DCU profile. 

DCU profile Status word, parameter 0303 FB STS WORD 1 

Bit Name Value Status 

0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command. 

0 Drive is not ready. 

1 ENABLED 1 External Run enable signal received. 

0 No external Run enable signal received. 

2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command. 

0 Drive has not received start command. 

3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating. 

0 Drive is not modulating. 

4 ZERO_SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed. 

0 Drive has not reached zero speed. 

5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating. 

0 Drive is not accelerating. 

6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating. 

0 Drive is not decelerating. 

7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint. Actual value equals reference 

value (ie is within tolerance limits). 

0 Drive has not reached setpoint. 

8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by group 20 LIMITS settings. 

0 Operation is within group 20 LIMITS settings. 

9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter (group 32 SUPERVISION) is 

outside its limits. 

0 All supervised parameters are within limits. 

10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction. 

0 Drive reference is in forward direction. 

11 REV_ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction. 

0 Drive is running in forward direction.




12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel (or PC tool) local mode. 

0 Control is not in control panel local mode. 

13 FIELDBUS_LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode 

0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode. 

14 EXT2_ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode. 

0 Control is in EXT1 mode. 

15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state. 

0 Drive is not in a fault state. 



16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on. 

0 No alarms are on. 

17 NOTICE 1 A maintenance request is pending. 

0 No maintenance request 

18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON. (Direction change is locked.) 

0 Direction lock is OFF. 

19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON. (Local mode is locked.) 

0 Local mode lock is OFF. 

20 CTL_MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode. 

0 Drive is in scalar control mode. 

21 JOGGING ACTIVE 1 Jogging function is active. 

0 Jogging function is not active. 

22… 

25 

Reserved 

26 REQ_CTL 1 Control word requested from fieldbus 


27 REQ_REF1 1 Reference 1 requested from fieldbus 

0 Reference 1 is not requested from fieldbus. 

28 REQ_REF2 1 Reference 2 requested from fieldbus 

0 Reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus. 

29 REQ_REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested from fieldbus 

0 External PID reference 2 is not requested from 

fieldbus. 

30 ACK_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit from fieldbus 

0 No start inhibit from fieldbus 

31 Reserved

324 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus


fieldbus adapter 


Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 325 

The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a 

communication network through fieldbus adapter. 

System overview 

The drive can be connected to an external control system through a fieldbus adapter 

or embedded fieldbus. For embedded fieldbus control, see chapter Fieldbus control 

with embedded fieldbus on page 301. 

Fieldbus adapter is connected to drive terminal X3.

326 Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 

Drive 

X3 

Fieldbus 

adapter 

Data flow 

Control word (CW) 

References 

Status word (SW) 

Actual values 

Parameter R/W 

requests/responses 

Other 

devices 

Fieldbus 

controller 

Fieldbus 

Process I/O (cyclic) 

Service messages (acyclic) 

The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus 

interface, or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other 

available sources, eg digital and analog inputs. 

The drive can communicate to a control system through a fieldbus adapter using eg 

the following serial communication protocols. Other protocols may be available; 

contact your local ABB representative. 

• PROFIBUS-DP (FPBA-01 adapter) 

• CANopen (FCAN-01 adapter) 

• DeviceNet (FDNA-01 adapter) 

• Ethernet (FENA-01 adapter) 

• Modbus RTU (FMBA-01 adapter. See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded 

fieldbus on page 301.) 

The drive detects automatically which fieldbus adapter is connected to drive terminal 

X3 (with the exception of FMBA-01). The DCU profile is always used in 

communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter (see section Fieldbus 

control interface on page 330). The communication profile on the fieldbus network 

depends on the type and settings of the connected adapter. 

The default profile settings are protocol dependent (eg vendor-specific profile (ABB 

drives) for PROFIBUS and industry-standard drive profile (AC/DC Drive) for 

DeviceNet).


Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter 

module 

Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control, the adapter module must be 

mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in section 

Attach the optional fieldbus module on page 35, and the module manual. 

The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module is activated 

by setting parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL to EXT FBA. The adapter-specific 

parameters in group 51 EXT COMM MODULE must also be set. See the table below. 

Parameter Alternative 

settings 

COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION 


SEL 

NOT SEL 

STD MODBUS 

EXT FBA 

MODBUS RS232 

Setting for 



EXT FBA Initializes the communication 

between the drive and the 

fieldbus adapter module. 

ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION 

5101 FBA TYPE - - Displays the type of the 

fieldbus adapter module. 

5102 FB PAR 2 These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more 

… … 

information, see the module manual. Note that not all of these 

5126 FB PAR 26 

parameters are necessarily used. 

5127 FBA PAR (0) DONE - Validates any changed 

REFRESH (1) REFRESH 

adapter module 

configuration parameter 

settings. 

Note: In adapter module, the parameter group number is A (group 1) for group 51 EXT 

COMM MODULE. 

TRANSMITTED DATA SELECTION 

5401 

… 

5410 

5501 

… 

5510 

FBA DATA IN 1 

… 

FBA DATA OUT 

10 

FBA DATA OUT 1 

… 

FBA DATA OUT 

10 

0 

1…6 

101…9999 

0 

1…6 

101…9999 

Defines the data transmitted 

from the drive to the fieldbus 

controller. 

Defines the data transmitted 

from the fieldbus controller to 

the drive. 

Note: In adapter module, the parameter group number is C (group 3) for group 54 FBA DATA 

IN and B (group 2) for group 55 FBA DATA OUT. 

After the module configuration parameters in groups 51 EXT COMM MODULE, 54 

FBA DATA IN and 55 FBA DATA OUT have been set, the drive control parameters 

(shown in section Drive control parameters on page 328) must be checked and 

adjusted when necessary.


The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up, or when 

parameter 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH is activated. 

Drive control parameters 

After the fieldbus communication has been set up, the drive control parameters listed 

in the table below should be checked and adjusted where necessary. 

The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the fieldbus 

interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal. The 

Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter. 



CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION 

1001 EXT1 

COMMANDS 

1002 EXT2 

COMMANDS 

1003 DIRECTION FORWARD 

REVERSE 

REQUEST 


COMM Selects the fieldbus as the source for the start 

and stop commands when EXT1 is selected as 

the active control location. 

COMM Selects the fieldbus as the source for the start 

and stop commands when EXT2 is selected as 

the active control location. 

Enables the rotation direction control as defined 

by parameters 1001 and 1002. The direction 

control is explained in section Reference 

handling on page 311. 

1010 JOGGING SEL COMM Enables jogging 1 or 2 activation through the 

fieldbus. 


SEL 

1103 REF1 SELECT COMM 

COMM+AI1 

COMM*AI1 

1106 REF2 SELECT COMM 

COMM+AI1 

COMM*AI1 

OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION 

1401 RELAY 

OUTPUT 1 

1501 AO1 CONTENT 

SEL 

COMM Enables EXT1/EXT2 selection through the 

fieldbus. 

COMM 

COMM(-1) 

135 (ie 0135 

COMM VALUE 1) 

Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when EXT1 is 

selected as the active control location. See 

section Reference selection and correction on 

page 332. 

Fieldbus reference REF2 is used when EXT2 is 

selected as the active control location. See 

section Reference selection and correction on 

page 332. 

Enables relay output RO control by signal 0134 

COMM RO WORD. 

Directs the contents of fieldbus reference 0135 

COMM VALUE 1 to analog output AO. 

SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS 

1601 RUN ENABLE COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for 

the inverted Run enable signal (Run disable).



1604 FAULT RESET 

SEL 


COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for 

the fault reset signal. 

1606 LOCAL LOCK COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for 

the local lock signal. 

1607 PARAM SAVE DONE 

SAVE… 

1608 START 

ENABLE 1 

1609 START 

ENABLE 2 

LIMITS 

2013 MIN TORQUE 

SEL 

2014 MAX TORQUE 

SEL 

2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 

SEL 

Saves parameter value changes (including 

those made through fieldbus control) to the 

permanent memory. 


the inverted Start enable 1 (Start disable) signal. 


the inverted Start enable 2 (Start disable) signal. 


the minimum torque limit 1/2 selection. 


the maximum torque limit 1/2 selection. 


acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 1/2 

selection 

2209 RAMP INPUT 0 COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for 

forcing ramp input to zero. 

COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS 


FUNC 


TIME 

NOT SEL 

FAULT 

CONST SP 7 

LAST SPEED 

Determines the drive action in case the fieldbus 

communication is lost. 

0.1 … 60.0 s Defines the time between the communication 

loss detection and the action selected with 

parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC. 

PID CONTROLLER REFERENCE SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION 

4010/ 

4110/ 

4210 

SET POINT 

SEL 

COMM 

COMM+AI1 

COMM*AI1 


PID control reference (REF2)


Fieldbus control interface 

The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16-bit input 

and output data words. The drive supports at the maximum the use of 10 data words 

in each direction. 

Data transformed from the drive to the fieldbus controller is defined by parameter 

group 54 FBA DATA IN and data transformed from the fieldbus controller to the drive 

is defined by parameter group 55 FBA DATA OUT. 

Fieldbus network 

Fieldbus module 

Fieldbusspecific 

interface 

DATA IN 

1 

… 

10 

DATA 

OUT 

1 

… 

10 

Data in 

select 

5401/…/5410 

Data out 

select 

5501/…/5510 

� Control word and Status word 

4 = Status word 1) 

5 = ACT1 1) 

6 = ACT2 1) 

Par. 0101…9914 

1 = Control word 1) 

2 = REF1 1) 

3 = REF2 1) 

Par. 0101…9914 

1) Some fieldbus adapters map this data automatically. For 

the use of virtual addresses, see the user's manual of 

the appropriate fieldbus adapter. 

2) See also other COMM selection parameters. 

NOT SEL 

… 

2) COMM 

KEYPAD 

… 

2) COMM 

KEYPAD 

… 

2) COMM 

Start, stop, 

dir select 

1001/1002 

REF1 select 

REF2 select 

The Control word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus 

system. The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive 

switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control 

word. 

The Status word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to the 

fieldbus controller. 

1103 

1106

� References 


References (REF) are 16-bit signed integers. A negative reference (indicating 

reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the 

corresponding positive reference value. The contents of each reference word can be 

used as speed or frequency reference. 

� Actual values 

Actual values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations of 

the drive. 

Communication profile 

The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter supports the DCU 

communication profile. The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 

bits. 

Fieldbus 

network 


Industry standard drive 

profile (eg PROFIdrive) 


ABB drives 


Transparent 16 

Optional reference, 

actual value scaling 

Transparent 32 

For the DCU profile Control and Status word contents, see section DCU 


1) 

1) 

Select 

2) 

Drive 

1) DCU profile 

2) Selection through fieldbus adapter configuration parameters (parameter group 51 EXT 

COMM MODULE)


Fieldbus references 

� Reference selection and correction 

Fieldbus reference (called COMM in signal selection contexts) is selected by setting a 

reference selection parameter – 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT – to 

COMM, COMM+AI1 or COMM*AI1. When parameter 1103 or 1106 is set to COMM, 

the fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction. When parameter 1103 

or 1106 is set to COMM+AI1 or COMM*AI1, the fieldbus reference is corrected using 

analog input AI1 as shown in the following examples for the DCU profile. 

With the DCU profile the fieldbus reference type can be Hz, rpm or percent. In the 

following examples the reference is in rpm. 

Setting When COMM > 0 rpm When COMM < 0 rpm 

COMM 

+AI1 

COMM/1000 + (AI(%) - 50%) · (MAX-MIN) COMM/1000 + (AI(%) - 50%) · (MAX-MIN) 

Corrected 


1500 

750 

0 

0 

AI = 100% 

AI = 50% 

AI = 0% 

750000 

Corrected 


1500 

1200 

750 

300 

0 

0 

AI = 100% 

1500000 

AI = 50% 

AI = 0% 

750000 1500000 

Max. limit 

Min. limit 

COMM 

REF 

Max limit 

Min limit 

COMM 

REF 

COMM 

REF -1500000 

Min. limit 

-750000 0 

0 

AI = 100% 

Max. limit 

COMM 

REF 

Min. limit 

Max. limit 

-1500000 

AI = 100% 

AI = 50% 

AI = 0% 



-7500 

-1500 

Corrected 


-750000 

AI = 50% 

AI = 0% 

0 

0 

-300 

-750 

-1200 

-1500 

Corrected 

reference (rpm)

COMM 

*AI1 


Setting When COMM > 0 rpm When COMM < 0 rpm 

1500 

(COMM/1000) · (AI(%) / 50%) (COMM/1000) · (AI(%) / 50%) 

Corrected 


750 

AI = 50% 

AI = 100% 

0 

AI = 0% 

0 750000 1500000 

Corrected 


1500 

1200 

750 

300 

0 

0 

AI = 100% 

AI = 50% 

AI = 0% 

750000 1500000 

Max. limit 

Min. limit 

COMM 

REF 

Ma.x limit 

Min. limit 

COMM 

REF 

COMM 

REF -1500000 -750000 

Min. limit AI = 0% 

Max. limit 

COMM 

REF 

Min. limit 

Max. limit 

-1500000 

AI = 50% 

AI = 100% 

AI = 0% 



0 

0 

-750 

-1500 

Corrected 


-750000 

0 

0 

-300 

-750 

AI = 100% 

AI = 50% 

-1200 

-1500 

Corrected 

reference (rpm)


� Fieldbus reference scaling 

Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled for the DCU profile as shown in the 

following table. 

Note: Any correction of the reference (see section Reference selection and 

correction on page 332) is applied before scaling. 

Reference Range Reference 

type 

REF1 -214783648 

… 

+214783647 

REF2 -214783648 

… 

+214783647 

Note: The settings of parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN have no 

effect on the reference scaling. 

� Reference handling 

Reference handling is the same for the ABB drives profile (embedded fieldbus) and 

DCU profile. See section Reference handling on page 311. 

� Actual value scaling 

Speed or 

frequency 

Speed or 

frequency 

Scaling Remarks 

1000 = 1 rpm / 1 Hz Final reference limited by 

1104/1105. Actual motor speed 

limited by 2001/2002 (speed) or 

2007/2008 (frequency). 

1000 = 1% Final reference limited by 

1107/1108. Actual motor speed 

limited by 2001/2002 (speed) or 

2007/2008 (frequency). 

Torque 1000 = 1% Final reference limited by 

2015/2017 (torque 1) or 

2016/2018 (torque 2). 

PID 

reference 

1000 = 1% Final reference limited by 

4012/4013 (PID set 1) or 

4112/4113 (PID set 2). 

The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual values depends on the 

selected function. See chapter Actual signals and parameters on page 175.

Fault tracing 


Fault tracing 335 

The chapter tells how to reset faults and view fault history. It also lists all alarm and 

fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions. 

Safety 

drive. 

WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. Read 

the safety instructions in chapter Safety on page 17 before you work on the 

Alarm and fault indications 

Fault is indicated with a red LED. See section LEDs on page 356. 

An alarm or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status. 

Using the information given in this chapter, most alarm and fault causes can be 

identified and corrected. If not, contact an ABB representative. 

The four digit code number in parenthesis after the fault is for the fieldbus 

communication. See chapters Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 301 

and Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 325. 

How to reset 

RESET 

EXIT 

The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad key (basic control panel) or 

RESET 

(assistant control panel), through digital input or fieldbus, or by switching the 

supply voltage off for a while. The source for the fault reset signal is selected by

336 Fault tracing 

parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL. When the fault has been removed, the motor 

can be restarted. 

Fault history 

When a fault is detected, it is stored in the fault history. The latest faults are stored 

together with the time stamp. 

Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT, 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 and 0413 PREVIOUS 

FAULT 2 store the most recent faults. Parameters 0404…0409 show drive operation 

data at the time the latest fault occurred. The assistant control panel provides 

additional information about the fault history. See section Fault logger mode on page 

101 for more information.

Alarm messages generated by the drive 

CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 

2001 OVERCURRENT 

0308 bit 0 

(programmable fault 

function 1610) 

2002 OVERVOLTAGE 

0308 bit 1 



2003 UNDERVOLTAGE 

0308 bit 2 



2004 DIR LOCK 

0308 bit 3 

2005 IO COMM 

0308 bit 4 


function 3018, 3019) 

2006 AI1 LOSS 

0308 bit 5 


function 3001, 3021) 

2007 AI2 LOSS 

0308 bit 6 


function 3001, 3022) 

Output current limit 

controller is active. 

DC overvoltage 


DC undervoltage 


Change of direction is 

not allowed. 

Fieldbus 

communication break 

Analog input AI1 signal 

has fallen below limit 

defined by parameter 


LIMIT. 





LIMIT. 


Check motor load. 

Check acceleration time (2202 and 

2205). 

Check motor and motor cable 

(including phasing). 

Check ambient conditions. Load 

capacity decreases if installation site 

ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C. 

See section Derating on page 359. 

Check deceleration time (2203 and 

2206). 

Check input power line for static or 

transient overvoltage. 

Check input power supply. 

Check parameter 1003 DIRECTION 

settings. 

Check status of fieldbus 

communication. See chapter Fieldbus 

control with embedded fieldbus on 

page 301, chapter Fieldbus control 

with fieldbus adapter on page 325 or 

appropriate fieldbus adapter manual. 

Check fault function parameter 

settings. 

Check connections. 

Check if master can communicate. 


settings. 

Check for proper analog control signal 

levels. 



settings. 


levels. 

Check connections.



2008 PANEL LOSS 

0308 bit 7 



2009 DEVICE 

OVERTEMP 

0308 bit 8 

2010 MOTOR TEMP 

0308 bit 9 


function 

3005…3009 / 3503) 


0308 bit 10 


function 

3013…3015) 

2012 MOTOR STALL 

0308 bit 11 


function 

3010…3012) 

2013 

1) 

2018 

1) 

AUTORESET 

0308 bit 12 

PID SLEEP 

0309 bit 1 

2019 ID RUN 

0309 bit 2 

Control panel selected 

as active control 

location for drive has 

ceased 

communicating. 

Drive IGBT 

temperature is 

excessive. Alarm limit 

is 120 °C. 

Motor temperature is 

too high (or appears to 

be too high) due to 

excessive load, 

insufficient motor 

power, inadequate 

cooling or incorrect 

start-up data. 

Measured motor 

temperature has 

exceeded alarm limit 

set by parameter 3503 

ALARM LIMIT. 

Motor load is too low 

due to eg release 

mechanism in driven 

equipment. 

Motor is operating in 

stall region due to eg 

excessive load or 


power. 

Check panel connection. 

Check fault function parameters. 

Check control panel connector. 

Refit control panel in mounting 

platform. 

If drive is in external control mode 

(REM) and is set to accept start/stop, 

direction commands or references 

through control panel: 

Check group 10 START/STOP/DIR 

and 11 REFERENCE SELECT 

settings. 

Check ambient conditions. See also 

section Derating on page 359. 

Check air flow and fan operation. 

Check motor power against drive 

power. 

Check motor ratings, load and cooling. 

Check start-up data. 


Check value of alarm limit. 

Check that actual number of sensors 

corresponds to value set by parameter 

3501 SENSOR TYPE. 

Let motor cool down. Ensure proper 

motor cooling: Check cooling fan, 

clean cooling surfaces, etc. 

Check for problem in driven 

equipment. 



power. 

Check motor load and drive ratings. 


Automatic reset alarm Check parameter group 31 

AUTOMATIC RESET settings. 

Sleep function has 

entered sleeping 

mode. 

Motor Identification run 

is on. 

See parameter groups 40 PROCESS 

PID SET 1… 41 PROCESS PID SET 

2. 

This alarm belongs to normal start-up 

procedure. Wait until drive indicates 

that motor identification is completed.


2021 START ENABLE 1 

MISSING 

0309 bit 4 

2022 START ENABLE 2 

MISSING 

0309 bit 5 

2023 EMERGENCY 

STOP 

0309 bit 6 

2024 ENCODER ERROR 

0309 bit 7 



2025 FIRST START 

0309 bit 8 

2026 INPUT PHASE 

LOSS 

0309 bit 9 



2029 MOTOR BACK EMF 

0309 bit 12 

No Start enable 1 

signal received 

No Start enable 2 

signal received 

Drive has received 

emergency stop 

command and ramps 

to stop according to 

ramp time defined by 

parameter 2208 

EMERG DEC TIME. 

Communication fault 

between pulse 

encoder and pulse 

encoder interface 

module or between 

module and drive. 

Motor identification 

magnetization is on. 

This alarm belongs to 

normal start-up 

procedure. 

Intermediate circuit DC 

voltage is oscillating 

due to missing input 

power line phase or 

blown fuse. 

Alarm is generated 

when DC voltage 

ripple exceeds 14% of 

nominal DC voltage. 

Permanent magnet 

motor is rotating, start 

mode 2 (DC MAGN) is 

selected with 

parameter 2101 

START FUNCTION, 

and run is requested. 

Drive warns that 

rotating motor cannot 

be magnetized with 

DC current. 


Check parameter 1608 START 

ENABLE 1 settings. 

Check digital input connections. 

Check fieldbus communication 

settings. 

Check parameter 1609 START 

ENABLE 2 settings. 

Check digital input connections. 

Check fieldbus communication 

settings. 

Check that it is safe to continue 

operation. 

Return emergency stop push button to 

normal position. 

Check pulse encoder and its wiring, 

pulse encoder interface module and 

its wiring and parameter group 50 

ENCODER settings. 

Wait until drive indicates that motor 

identification is completed. 

Check input power line fuses. 

Check for input power supply 

imbalance. 


If start to rotating motor is required, 

select start mode 1 (AUTO) with 

parameter 2101 START FUNCTION. 

Otherwise drive starts after motor has 

stopped.



2035 SAFE TORQUE 

OFF 

0309 bit 13 

STO (Safe torque off) 

requested and it 

functions correctly. 

Parameter 3025 STO 

OPERATION is set to 

react with alarm. 

If this was not expected reaction to 

safety circuit interruption, check 

cabling of safety circuit connected to 

STO terminals X1C. 

If different reaction is required, change 

value of parameter 3025 STO 

OPERATION. 

Note: Start signal must be reset 

(toggled to 0) if STO has been used 

while drive has been running. 

1) Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions (eg parameter 1401 

RELAY OUTPUT 1 = 5 (ALARM) or 16 (FLT/ALARM)), this alarm is not indicated by a relay 

output.

Alarms generated by the basic control panel 


The basic control panel indicates control panel alarms with a code, A5xxx. 

ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 

5001 Drive is not responding. Check panel connection. 

5002 Incompatible 

communication profile 

Contact your local ABB representative. 

5010 Corrupted panel parameter Retry parameter upload. 

backup file 

Retry parameter download. 

5011 Drive is controlled from 

another source. 

Change drive control to local control mode. 

5012 Direction of rotation is Enable change of direction. See parameter 

locked. 

1003 DIRECTION. 

5013 Panel control is disabled Start from panel is not possible. Reset 

because start inhibit is emergency stop command or remove 3-wire 

active. 

stop command before starting from panel. 

See section 3-wire macro on page 113 and 

parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS, 1002 

EXT2 COMMANDS and 2109 EMERG STOP 

SEL. 

5014 Panel control is disabled 

because of drive fault. 

Reset drive fault and retry. 

5015 Panel control is disabled 

because local control 

mode lock is active. 

Deactivate local control mode lock and retry. 

See parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK. 

5018 Parameter default value is 

not found. 


5019 Writing non-zero 

parameter value is 

prohibited. 

Only parameter reset is allowed. 

5020 Parameter or parameter 

group does not exist or 

parameter value is 

inconsistent. 

5021 Parameter or parameter 

group is hidden. 

5022 Parameter is write 

protected. 

5023 Parameter change is not 

allowed when drive is 

running. 



Parameter value is read-only and cannot be 

changed. 

Stop drive and change parameter value. 

5024 Drive is executing a task. Wait until task is completed. 

5025 Software is being uploaded 

or downloaded. 

Wait until upload/download is complete. 

5026 Value is at or below 

minimum limit. 


5027 Value is at or above 

maximum limit. 


5028 Invalid value Contact your local ABB representative.



5029 Memory is not ready. Retry. 

5030 Invalid request Contact your local ABB representative. 

5031 Drive is not ready for 

operation, eg due to low 

DC voltage. 

Check input power supply. 

5032 Parameter error Contact your local ABB representative. 

5040 Parameter download error. 

Selected parameter set is 

not in current parameter 

backup file. 

Perform upload function before download. 

5041 Parameter backup file 

does not fit into memory. 

5042 Parameter download error. 

Selected parameter set is 

not in current parameter 

backup file. 


Perform upload function before download. 

5043 No start inhibit 

5044 Parameter backup file 

restoring error 

Check that file is compatible with drive. 

5050 Parameter upload aborted Retry parameter upload. 

5051 File error Contact your local ABB representative. 

5052 Parameter upload has 

failed. 

Retry parameter upload. 

5060 Parameter download 

aborted 


5062 Parameter download has 

failed. 


5070 Panel backup memory 

write error 


5071 Panel backup memory 

read error 


5080 Operation is not allowed 

because drive is not in 

local control mode. 

Switch to local control mode. 


because of active fault. 


because parameter lock is 

on. 


because drive is 

performing a task. 

5085 Parameter download from 

source to destination drive 

has failed. 



has failed. 

Check cause of fault and reset fault. 

Check parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 

setting. 

Wait until task is completed and retry. 

Check that source and destination drive types 

are same, ie ACS355. See type designation 

label of the drive. 

Check that source and destination drive type 

designations are the same. See type 

designation labels of the drives.




has failed because 

parameter sets are 

incompatible. 

5088 Operation has failed 

because of drive memory 

error. 

5089 Download has failed 

because of CRC error. 

5090 Download has failed 

because of data 

processing error. 

5091 Operation has failed 

because of parameter 

error. 



has failed because 

parameter sets are 

incompatible. 


Check that source and destination drive 

information are same. See parameters in group 

33 INFORMATION. 





Check that source and destination drive 

information are same. See parameters in group 

33 INFORMATION.


Fault messages generated by the drive 

CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 

0001 OVERCURRENT 

(2310) 

0305 bit 0 

0002 DC OVERVOLT 

(3210) 

0305 bit 1 

0003 DEV OVERTEMP 

(4210) 

0305 bit 2 

0004 SHORT CIRC 

(2340) 

0305 bit 3 

0006 DC UNDERVOLT 

(3220) 

0305 bit 5 

0007 AI1 LOSS 

(8110) 

0305 bit 6 


function 3001, 3021) 

0008 AI2 LOSS 

(8110) 

0305 bit 7 


function 3001, 3022) 

Output current has 

exceeded trip level. 

Excessive 

intermediate circuit DC 

voltage. DC 

overvoltage trip limit is 

420 V for 200 V drives 

and 840 V for 400 V 

drives. 

Drive IGBT 

temperature is 

excessive. Fault trip 

limit is 135 °C. 

Short circuit in motor 

cable(s) or motor 


voltage is not sufficient 


power line phase, 

blown fuse, rectifier 

bridge internal fault or 

too low input power. 





LIMIT. 





LIMIT. 

Check motor load. 

Check acceleration time (2202 and 

2205). 

Check motor and motor cable 

(including phasing). 

Check ambient conditions. Load 

capacity decreases if installation site 

ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C. 

See section Derating on page 359. 

Check that overvoltage controller is on 

(parameter 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL). 

Check input power line for static or 

transient overvoltage. 

Check brake chopper and resistor (if 

used). DC overvoltage control must be 

deactivated when brake chopper and 

resistor is used. 

Check deceleration time (2203, 2206). 

Retrofit frequency converter with 

brake chopper and brake resistor. 

Check ambient conditions. See also 

section Derating on page 359. 

Check air flow and fan operation. 


power. 

Check motor and motor cable. 

Check that undervoltage controller is 

on (parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT 

CTRL). 

Check input power supply and fuses. 


settings. 


levels. 



settings. 


levels. 

Check connections.


0009 MOT OVERTEMP 

(4310) 

0305 bit 8 


function 

3005…3009 / 3504) 

0010 PANEL LOSS 

(5300) 

0305 bit 9 



0011 ID RUN FAIL 

(FF84) 

0305 bit 10 

0012 MOTOR STALL 

(7121) 

0305 bit 11 


function 

3010…3012) 

0014 EXT FAULT 1 

(9000) 

0305 bit 13 



Motor temperature is 

too high (or appears to 

be too high) due to 

excessive load, 


power, inadequate 

cooling or incorrect 

start-up data. 

Measured motor 

temperature has 

exceeded fault limit set 

by parameter 3504 

FAULT LIMIT. 

Control panel selected 

as active control 

location for drive has 

ceased 

communicating. 

Motor ID run is not 

completed 

successfully. 

Motor is operating in 

stall region due to eg 

excessive load or 


power. 


Check motor ratings, load and cooling. 

Check start-up data. 


Check value of fault limit. 

Check that actual number of sensors 

corresponds to value set by parameter 

3501 SENSOR TYPE. 

Let motor cool down. Ensure proper 

motor cooling: Check cooling fan, 

clean cooling surfaces, etc. 

Check panel connection. 


Check control panel connector. 

Refit control panel in mounting 

platform. 

If drive is in external control mode 

(REM) and is set to accept start/stop, 

direction commands or references 

through control panel: 

Check group 10 START/STOP/DIR 

and 11 REFERENCE SELECT 

settings. 

Check motor connection. 

Check start-up data (group 99 START- 

UP DATA). 

Check maximum speed (parameter 

2002). It should be at least 80% of 

motor nominal speed (parameter 

9908). 

Ensure ID run has been performed 

according to instructions in section 

How to perform the ID run on page 69. 

Check motor load and drive ratings. 


External fault 1 Check external devices for faults. 

Check parameter 3003 EXTERNAL 

FAULT 1 setting.



0015 EXT FAULT 2 

(9001) 

0305 bit 14 



0016 EARTH FAULT 

(2330) 

0305 bit 15 




(FF6A) 

0306 bit 0 


function 

3013…3015) 

0018 THERM FAIL 

(5210) 

0306 bit 1 

0021 CURR MEAS 

(2211) 

0306 bit 4 

0022 SUPPLY PHASE 

(3130) 

0306 bit 5 



0023 ENCODER ERR 

(7301) 

0306 bit 6 



External fault 2 Check external devices for faults. 

Check parameter 3004 EXTERNAL 

FAULT 2 setting. 

Drive has detected 

earth (ground) fault in 

motor or motor cable. 

Motor load is too low 

due to eg release 

mechanism in driven 

equipment. 

Drive internal fault. 

Thermistor used for 

drive internal 

temperature 

measurement is open 

or short-circuited. 

Drive internal fault. 

Current measurement 

is out of range. 


voltage is oscillating 


power line phase or 

blown fuse. 

Trip occurs when DC 

voltage ripple exceeds 

14% of nominal DC 

voltage. 

Communication fault 

between pulse 

encoder and pulse 

encoder interface 

module or between 

module and drive. 

Check motor. 

Check motor cable. Motor cable length 

must not exceed maximum 

specifications. See section Motor 

connection data on page 367. 

Note: Disabling earth fault (ground 

fault) may damage drive. 

Check for problem in driven 

equipment. 



power. 

Contact your local ABB 

representative. 



Check input power line fuses. 

Check for input power supply 

imbalance. 


Check pulse encoder and its wiring, 

pulse encoder interface module and 

its wiring and parameter group 50 

ENCODER settings.


0024 OVERSPEED 

(7310) 

0306 bit 7 

0027 CONFIG FILE 

(630F) 

0306 bit 10 

0028 SERIAL 1 ERR 

(7510) 

0306 bit 11 


function 3018, 3019) 

0029 EFB CON FILE 

(6306) 

0306 bit 12 

0030 FORCE TRIP 

(FF90) 

0306 bit 13 

0034 MOTOR PHASE 

(FF56) 

0306 bit 14 

Motor is turning faster 

than highest allowed 

speed due to 

incorrectly set 

minimum/maximum 

speed, insufficient 

braking torque or 

changes in load when 

using torque 

reference. 

Operating range limits 

are set by parameters 

2001 MINIMUM 

SPEED and 2002 

MAXIMUM SPEED (in 

vector control) or 2007 

MINIMUM FREQ and 

2008 MAXIMUM 

FREQ (in scalar 

control). 

Internal configuration 

file error 

Fieldbus 

communication break 

Configuration file 

reading error 

Trip command 

received from fieldbus 

Motor circuit fault due 

to missing motor 

phase or motor 

thermistor relay (used 

in motor temperature 

measurement) fault. 


Check minimum/maximum frequency 

settings. 

Check adequacy of motor braking 

torque. 

Check applicability of torque control. 

Check need for brake chopper and 

resistor(s). 



Check status of fieldbus 

communication. See chapter Fieldbus 

control with embedded fieldbus on 

page 301, chapter Fieldbus control 

with fieldbus adapter on page 325 or 

appropriate fieldbus adapter manual. 


settings. 


Check if master can communicate. 



See appropriate communication 

module manual. 

Check motor and motor cable. 

Check motor thermistor relay (if used).



0035 OUTP WIRING 

(FF95) 

0306 bit 15 



0036 INCOMPATIBLE 

SW 

(630F) 

0307 bit 3 

0037 CB OVERTEMP 

(4110) 

0305 bit 12 

0044 SAFE TORQUE 

OFF 

(FFA0) 

0307 bit 4 

0045 STO1 LOST 

(FFA1) 

0307 bit 5 

0046 STO2 LOST 

(FFA2) 

0307 bit 6 

Incorrect input power 

and motor cable 

connection (ie input 

power cable is 

connected to drive 

motor connection). 

Fault can be 

erroneously declared if 

drive is faulty or input 

power is delta 

grounded system and 

motor cable 

capacitance is large. 

Loaded software is not 

compatible. 

Drive control board 

overheated. Fault trip 

limit is 95 °C. 


requested and it 

functions correctly. 

Parameter 3025 STO 

OPERATION is set to 

react with fault. 


input channel 1 has 

not de-energized, but 

channel 2 has. 

Opening contacts on 

channel 1 might have 

been damaged or 

there is a short circuit. 


input channel 2 has 

not de-energized, but 

channel 1 has. 

Opening contacts on 

channel 2 might have 

been damaged or 

there is a short circuit. 

Check input power connections. 



Check for excessive ambient 

temperature. 

Check for fan failure. 

Check for obstructions in air flow. 

Check the dimensioning and cooling 

of cabinet. 

If this was not expected reaction to 

safety circuit interruption, check 

cabling of safety circuit connected to 

STO terminals X1C. 

If different reaction is required, change 

value of parameter 3025 STO 

OPERATION. 

Reset fault before starting. 

Check STO circuit cabling and 

opening of contacts in STO circuit. 

Check STO circuit cabling and 

opening of contacts in STO circuit.


0101 SERF CORRUPT 

(FF55) 

0307 bit 14 

0103 SERF MACRO 

(FF55) 

0307 bit 14 

0201 DSP T1 

OVERLOAD 

(6100) 

0307 bit 13 

0202 DSP T2 

OVERLOAD 

(6100) 

0307 bit 13 

0203 DSP T3 

OVERLOAD 

(6100) 

0307 bit 13 

0204 DSP STACK 

ERROR 

(6100) 

0307 bit 12 

0206 CB ID ERROR 

(5000) 

0307 bit 11 

1000 PAR HZRPM 

(6320) 

0307 bit 15 

1003 PAR AI SCALE 

(6320) 

0307 bit 15 


Drive internal error Write down fault code and contact 

your local ABB representative. 

Incorrect 

speed/frequency limit 

parameter setting 

Incorrect analog input 

AI signal scaling 

Check parameter settings. Check that 

following applies: 

• 2001 MINIMUM SPEED < 

2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 

• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ < 

2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 

• 2001 MINIMUM SPEED / 

9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED, 

2002 MAXIMUM SPEED / 

9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED, 

2007 MINIMUM FREQ / 

9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ and 

2008 MAXIMUM FREQ / 

9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ are 

within range. 

Check parameter group 13 ANALOG 

INPUTS settings. Check that following 

applies: 

• 1301 MINIMUM AI1 < 

1302 MAXIMUM AI1 

• 1304 MINIMUM AI2 < 

1305 MAXIMUM AI2.



1004 PAR AO SCALE 

(6320) 

0307 bit 15 

1005 PAR PCU 2 

(6320) 

0307 bit 15 

1006 PAR EXT RO 

(6320) 

0307 bit 15 

1007 PAR FBUSMISS 

(6320) 

0307 bit 15 

1009 PAR PCU 1 

(6320) 

0307 bit 15 

1015 PAR CUSTOM U/F 

(6320) 

0307 bit 15 

Incorrect analog output 

AO signal scaling 

Incorrect motor 

nominal power setting 

Incorrect relay output 

extension parameters 

Fieldbus control has 

not been activated. 

Incorrect motor 

nominal 

speed/frequency 

setting 

Incorrect voltage to 

frequency (U/f) ratio 

voltage setting. 

Check parameter group 15 ANALOG 

OUTPUTS settings. Check that 


• 1504 MINIMUM AO1 < 

1505 MAXIMUM AO1. 

Check parameter 9909 MOTOR NOM 

POWER setting. Following must 

apply: 

• 1.1 < (9906 MOTOR NOM CURR · 

9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT · 1.73 / 

P N) < 3.0 

Where P N = 1000 · 9909 MOTOR 

NOM POWER (if units are in kW) 

or P N = 746 · 9909 MOTOR NOM 

POWER (if units are in hp). 

Check parameter settings. Check that 


• Output relay extension module 

MREL-01 is connected to drive. 

• 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2, 1403 

RELAY OUTPUT 3 and 1410 

RELAY OUTPUT 4 have non-zero 

values. 

See MREL-01 relay output extension 

module user's manual 

(3AUA0000035974 [English]). 

Check fieldbus parameter settings. 

See chapter Fieldbus control with 

fieldbus adapter on page 325. 

Check parameter settings. Following 

must apply: 

• 1 < (60 · 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 

/ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED) < 16 

• 0.8 < 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED / 

(120 · 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ / 

Motor poles) < 0.992 

Check parameter 2610 USER 

DEFINED U1 … 2617 USER 

DEFINED F4 settings.


1017 PAR SETUP 1 

(6320) 

0307 bit 15 

Only two of the 

following can be used 

simultaneously: 

MTAC-01 encoder 

module, frequency 

input signal or 

frequency output 

signal. 


Disable frequency output, frequency 

input or encoder: 

• change transistor output to digital 

mode (value of parameter 1804 TO 

MODE = 0 [DIGITAL]), or 

• change frequency input selection to 

other value in parameter groups 

11 REFERENCE SELECT, 

40 PROCESS PID SET 1, 

41 PROCESS PID SET 2 and 

42 EXT / TRIM PID, or 

• disable (parameter 5002 

ENCODER ENABLE) and remove 

MTAC-01 encoder module.


Embedded fieldbus faults 

Embedded fieldbus faults can be traced by monitoring group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 

parameters. See also fault/alarm SERIAL 1 ERR (0028). 

� No master device 

If there is no master device on line, parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES and 5307 

EFB CRC ERRORS values remain unchanged. 

What to do: 

• Check that the network master is connected and properly configured. 

• Check the cable connection. 

� Same device address 

If two or more devices have the same address, parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 

value increases with every read/write command. 

What to do: 

• Check the device addresses. No two devices on line may have the same address. 

� Incorrect wiring 

If the communication wires are swapped (terminal A on one device is connected to 

terminal B on another device), parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGESS value remains 

unchanged and parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS increases. 

What to do: 

• Check the RS-232/EIA-485 interface connection.

Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 353 

Maintenance and hardware 

diagnostics 


The chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator 

descriptions. 

Maintenance intervals 

If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very little maintenance. 

The table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB. 

Maintenance Interval Instruction 

Reforming of capacitors Every year when 

stored 

See Capacitors on page 355. 

Check of dustiness, corrosion 

and temperature 

Every year 

Replacement of the cooling fan 

(frame sizes R1…R4) 

Every three years See Cooling fan on page 354. 

Check and tightening of the 

power terminals 

Every six years See Power connections on page 355. 

Replacement of the battery in 

the assistant control panel 

Testing of Safe torque off (STO) 

operation and reaction 

Every ten years See Changing the battery in the 

assistant control panel on page 356. 

Every year See Appendix: Safe torque off (STO) 

on page 399. 

Consult your local ABB Service representative for more details on the maintenance. 

On the Internet, go to http://www.abb.com/drives and select Drive Services – 

Maintenance and Field Services.

354 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 

Cooling fan 

The drive’s cooling fan has a life span of minimum 25 000 operating hours. The 

actual life span depends on the drive usage and ambient temperature. Automatic fan 

on/off control increases the life span (see parameter 1612 FAN CONTROL). 

When the assistant control panel is in use, the Notice handler assistant informs when 

the definable value of the operating hour counter is reached (see parameter 2901 

COOLING FAN TRIG). This information can also be passed to the relay output (see 

group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS) regardless of the used panel type. 

Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from the fan bearings. If the drive 

is operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once 

these symptoms start appearing. Replacement fans are available from ABB. Do not 

use other than ABB specified spare parts. 

� Replacing the cooling fan (frame sizes R1…R4) 

Only frame sizes R1…R4 include a fan; frame size R0 has natural cooling. 

WARNING! Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 

17. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or 

damage to the equipment. 

1. Stop the drive and disconnect it from the AC power source. 

2. Remove the hood if the drive has the NEMA 1 option. 

3. Lever the fan holder off the drive frame with eg a screwdriver and lift the hinged 

fan holder slightly upward from its front edge. 

4. Free the fan cable from the clip. 

5. Disconnect the fan cable. 

6. Remove the fan holder from the hinges. 

3 

6 

4 

5

Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 355 

7. Install the new fan holder including the fan in reverse order. 

8. Restore power. 

Capacitors 

7 

� Reforming the capacitors 

The capacitors must be reformed if the drive has been stored for a year. See section 

Type designation label on page 28 for how to find out the manufacturing time from the 

serial number. For information on reforming the capacitors, refer to Guide for 

capacitor reforming in ACS50, ACS55, ACS150, ACS310, ACS350, ACS355, 

ACS550 and ACH550 (3AFE68735190 [English]), available on the Internet (go to 

http://www.abb.com and enter the code in the Search field). 

Power connections 

WARNING! Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 

17. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or 

damage to the equipment. 

1. Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line. Wait for five minutes to let the 

drive DC capacitors discharge. Ensure by measuring with a multimeter 

(impedance at least 1 Mohm) that there is no voltage present. 

2. Check the tightness of the power cable connections. Use the tightening torques 

given in section Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables on page 

366. 

3. Restore power.

356 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 

Control panel 

� Cleaning the control panel 

Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel. Avoid harsh cleaners which could 

scratch the display window. 

� Changing the battery in the assistant control panel 

A battery is only used in assistant control panels that have the clock function 

available and enabled. The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during 

power interruptions. 

The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years. To remove the battery, use 

a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel. Replace the 

battery with type CR2032. 

Note: The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive functions, except the 

clock. 

LEDs 

There is a green and a red LED on the front of the drive. They are visible through the 

panel cover but invisible if a control panel is attached to the drive. The assistant 

control panel has one LED. The table below describes the LED indications. 

Where LED off LED lit and steady LED blinking 

On the front of 

the drive. 

If a control panel 

is attached to the 

drive, switch to 

remote control 

(otherwise a fault 

will be 

generated), and 

then remove the 

panel to be able 

to see the LEDs. 

At the top left 

corner of the 

assistant control 

panel 

No power Green Power supply on 

the board OK 

Red Drive in a fault 

state. To reset 

the fault, press 

RESET from the 

control panel or 

switch off the 

drive power. 

Panel has no 

power or no 

drive 

connection. 

Green Drive in a normal 

state 

Red Drive in a fault 

state. To reset 

the fault, press 

RESET from the 

control panel or 

switch off the 

drive power. 

Green Drive in an alarm 

state 

Red Drive in a fault state. 

To reset the fault, 

switch off the drive 

power. 

Green Drive in an alarm 

state 

Red -

Technical data 


Technical data 357 

The chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive, eg ratings, sizes and 

technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and 

other marks.

358 Technical data 

Ratings 

Type Input Output Frame 

size 

ACS355- I 1N I 1N (480 V) I 2N I 2,1 min/10 min 2) I 2max P N 

x = E/U 1) A A A A A kW hp 

1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V) 

01x-02A4-2 6.1 - 2.4 3.6 4.2 0.37 0.5 R0 

01x-04A7-2 11.4 - 4.7 7.1 8.2 0.75 1 R1 

01x-06A7-2 16.1 - 6.7 10.1 11.7 1.1 1.5 R1 

01x-07A5-2 16.8 - 7.5 11.3 13.1 1.5 2 R2 

01x-09A8-2 21.0 - 9.8 14.7 17.2 2.2 3 R2 

3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V) 

03x-02A4-2 4.3 - 2.4 3.6 4.2 0.37 0.5 R0 

03x-03A5-2 6.1 - 3.5 5.3 6.1 0.55 0.75 R0 

03x-04A7-2 7.6 - 4.7 7.1 8.2 0.75 1 R1 

03x-06A7-2 11.8 - 6.7 10.1 11.7 1.1 1.5 R1 

03x-07A5-2 12.0 - 7.5 11.3 13.1 1.5 2 R1 

03x-09A8-2 14.3 - 9.8 14.7 17.2 2.2 3 R2 

03x-13A3-2 21.7 - 13.3 20.0 23.3 3 4 R2 

03x-17A6-2 24.8 - 17.6 26.4 30.8 4 5 R2 

03x-24A4- 2 41 - 24.4 36.6 42.7 5.5 7.5 R3 

03x-31A0-2 50 - 31 46.5 54.3 7.5 10 R4 

03x-46A2-2 69 - 46.2 69.3 80.9 11.0 15 R4 

3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V) 

03x-01A2-4 2.2 1.8 1.2 1.8 2.1 0.37 0.5 R0 

03x-01A9-4 3.6 3.0 1.9 2.9 3.3 0.55 0.75 R0 

03x-02A4-4 4.1 3.4 2.4 3.6 4.2 0.75 1 R1 

03x-03A3-4 6.0 5.0 3.3 5.0 5.8 1.1 1.5 R1 

03x-04A1-4 6.9 5.8 4.1 6.2 7.2 1.5 2 R1 

03x-05A6-4 9.6 8.1 5.6 8.4 9.8 2.2 3 R1 

03x-07A3-4 11.6 9.7 7.3 11.0 12.8 3 4 R1 

03x-08A8-4 13.6 11.4 8.8 13.2 15.4 4 5 R1 

03x-12A5-4 18.8 15.8 12.5 18.8 21.9 5.5 7.5 R3 

03x-15A6-4 22.1 18.6 15.6 23.4 27.3 7.5 10 R3 

03x-23A1-4 30.9 26.0 23.1 34.7 40.4 11 15 R3 

03x-31A0-4 52 43.7 31 46.5 54.3 15 20 R4 

03x-38A0-4 61 51.2 38 57 66.5 18.5 25 R4 

03x-44A0-4 67 56.3 44 66 77.0 22.0 30 R4 

1) 

E = EMC filter connected (metal EMC filter screw installed), 

U = EMC filter disconnected (plastic EMC filter screw installed), US parametrization. 

2) 

Overloading not allowed through Common DC connection. 

00353783.xls J

� Definitions 

� Sizing 


Input 

I1N continuous rms input current (for dimensioning cables and fuses) 

I1N (480 V) continuous rms input current (for dimensioning cables and fuses) for drives 

with 480 V input voltage 

Output 

I2N continuous rms current. 50% overload is allowed for one minute every ten 

minutes. 

I2,1 min/10 min maximum (50% overload) current allowed for one minute every ten minutes 

I2max maximum output current. Available for two seconds at start, otherwise as long 

as allowed by the drive temperature. 

PN typical motor power. The kilowatt ratings apply to most IEC 4-pole motors. The 

horsepower ratings apply to most NEMA 4-pole motors. This is also the 

maximum load through the Common DC connection and must not be 

exceeded. 

R0…R4 ACS355 is manufactured in frame sizes R0…R4. Some instructions and other 

information that only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol 

of the frame size (R0…R4). 

Drive sizing is based on the rated motor current and power. To achieve the rated 

motor power given in the table, the rated current of the drive must be higher than or 

equal to the rated motor current. Also the rated power of the drive must be higher 

than or equal to compared to the rated motor power. The power ratings are the same 

regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range. 

Note 1: The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1.5 · P N. If the limit is 

exceeded, motor torque and current are automatically restricted. The function 

protects the input bridge of the drive against overload. 

Note 2: The ratings apply at ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F) for I 2N . 

Note 3: It is important to check that in Common DC systems the power flowing 

through the common DC connection does not exceed P N . 

� Derating 

I 2N : The load capacity decreases if the installation site ambient temperature exceeds 

40 °C (104 °F), the altitude exceeds 1000 meters (3300 ft) or the switching frequency 

is changed from 4 kHz to 8, 12 or 16 kHz. 

Temperature derating, I 2N 

In the temperature range +40 °C…+50 °C (+104 °F…+122 °F), the rated output 

current (I 2N ) is decreased by 1% for every additional 1 °C (1.8 °F). The output current 

is calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor. 

Example: If the ambient temperature is 50 °C (+122 °F), the derating factor is 

100% - 1 

% 

· 10 °C = 90% or 0.90. The output current is then 0.90 · I2N . 

°C


Altitude derating, I 2N 

In altitudes 1000…2000 m (3300…6600 ft) above sea level, the derating is 1% for 

every 100 m (330 ft). 

For 3-phase 200 V drives, the maximum altitude is 3000 m (9800 ft) above sea level. 

In altitudes 2000…3000 m (6600…9800 ft), the derating is 2% for every 100 m 

(330 ft). 

Switching frequency derating, I 2N 

The drive derates itself automatically when parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL = 

1(ON). 

Switching 

Drive voltage rating 

frequency 

UN = 200…240 V UN = 380…480 V 

4 kHz No derating No derating 

8kHz I2N derated to 90%. I2N derated to 75% for R0 or to 80% for R1…R4. 

12 kHz I2N derated to 80%. I2N derated to 50% for R0 or to 65% for R1…R4 

and maximum ambient temperature derated to 

30 °C (86 °F). 

16 kHz I2N derated to 75%. I2N derated to 50% and maximum ambient 

temperature derated to 30 °C (86 °F). 

When parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL = 2 (ON (LOAD)), the drive controls the 

switching frequency towards the selected switching frequency 2606 SWITCHING 

FREQ if the drive’s internal temperature allows.

Power cable sizes and fuses 


Cable dimensioning for rated currents (I 1N ) is shown in the table below together with 

the corresponding fuse types for short-circuit protection of the input power cable. The 

rated fuse currents given in the table are the maximums for the mentioned fuse 

types. If smaller fuse ratings are used, check that the fuse rms current rating is larger 

than the rated I 1N current given in section Ratings on page 358. If 150% output power 

is needed, multiply current I 1N by 1.5. See also section Selecting the power cables on 

page 38. 

Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0.5 seconds. The operating 

time depends on the fuse type, the supply network impedance as well as the crosssectional 

area, material and length of the supply cable. In case the 0.5 seconds 

operating time is exceeded with the gG or T fuses, ultra rapid (aR) fuses will in most 

cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level. 

Note: Larger fuses must not be used when the input power cable is selected 

according to this table. 

Type Fuses Size of copper conductor in cablings 

ACS355- gG UL Class Supply Motor PE Brake 

T (600 V) (U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2) 

(BRK+, BRK-) 

x = E/U A A mm2 AWG mm2 AWG mm2 AWG mm2 AWG 

1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V) 

01x-02A4-2 10 10 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14 

01x-04A7-2 16 20 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14 

01x-06A7-2 16/20 1) 25 2.5 10 1.5 14 2.5 10 2.5 12 

01x-07A5-2 20/25 1) 30 2.5 10 1.5 14 2.5 10 2.5 12 

01x-09A8-2 25/35 1) 35 6 10 2.5 12 6 10 6 12 

3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V) 

03x-02A4-2 10 10 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14 

03x-03A5-2 10 10 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14 

03x-04A7-2 10 15 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14 

03x-06A7-2 16 15 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12 2.5 12 

03x-07A5-2 16 15 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12 2.5 12 

03x-09A8-2 16 20 2.5 12 2.5 12 2.5 12 2.5 12 

03x-13A3-2 25 30 6 10 6 10 6 10 2.5 12 

03x-17A6-2 25 35 6 10 6 10 6 10 2.5 12 

03x-24A4- 2 63 60 10 8 10 8 10 8 6 10 

03x-31A0-2 80 80 16 6 16 6 16 6 10 8 

03x-46A2-2 100 100 25 2 25 2 16 4 10 8


Type Fuses Size of copper conductor in cablings 

ACS355- gG UL Class Supply Motor PE Brake 

T (600 V) (U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2) 

(BRK+, BRK-) 

x = E/U A A mm 

3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V) 

03x-01A2-4 10 10 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14 

03x-01A9-4 10 10 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14 

03x-02A4-4 10 10 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14 

03x-03A3-4 10 10 2.5 12 0.75 18 2.5 12 2.5 12 

03x-04A1-4 16 15 2.5 12 0.75 18 2.5 12 2.5 12 

03x-05A6-4 16 15 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12 2.5 12 

03x-07A3-4 16 20 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12 2.5 12 

03x-08A8-4 20 25 2.5 12 2.5 12 2.5 12 2.5 12 

03x-12A5-4 25 30 6 10 6 10 6 10 2.5 12 

03x-15A6-4 35 35 6 8 6 8 6 8 2.5 12 

03x-23A1-4 50 50 10 8 10 8 10 8 6 10 

03x-31A0-4 80 80 16 6 16 6 16 6 10 8 

03x-38A0-4 100 100 16 4 16 4 16 4 10 8 

03x-44A0-4 100 100 25 4 25 4 16 4 10 8 

1) 

If 50% overload capacity is needed, use the larger fuse alternative. 00353783.xls J 

2 AWG mm2 AWG mm2 AWG mm2 AWG

Dimensions, weights and free space requirements 

� Dimensions and weights 

� Free space requirements 


Frame 

Dimensions and weights 

size 

IP20 (cabinet) / UL open 

H1 H2 H3 W D Weight 

mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in kg lb 

R0 169 6.65 202 7.95 239 9.41 70 2.76 161 6.34 1.2 2.6 

R1 169 6.65 202 7.95 239 9.41 70 2.76 161 6.34 1.2 2.6 

R2 169 6.65 202 7.95 239 9.41 105 4.13 165 6.50 1.7 3.7 

R3 169 6.65 202 7.95 236 9.29 169 6.65 169 6.65 2.9 6.4 

R4 181 7.13 202 7.95 244 9.61 260 10.24 169 6.65 5.1 11.2 

00353783.xls J 

Frame 

Dimensions and weights 

size 

IP20 / NEMA 1 

H4 H5 W D Weight 

mm in mm in mm in mm in kg lb 

R0 257 10.12 280 11.02 70 2.76 169 6.65 1.6 3.5 

R1 257 10.12 280 11.02 70 2.76 169 6.65 1.6 3.5 

R2 257 10.12 282 11.10 105 4.13 169 6.65 2.1 4.6 

R3 260 10.24 299 11.77 169 6.65 177 6.97 3.5 7.7 

R4 270 10.63 320 12.60 260 10.24 177 6.97 5.7 12.6 

00353783.xls J 

Symbols 

IP20 (cabinet) / UL open 

H1 height without fastenings and clamping plate 

H2 height with fastenings, without clamping plate 

H3 height with fastenings and clamping plate 

IP20 / NEMA 1 

H4 height with fastenings and connection box 

H5 height with fastenings, connection box and hood 

Frame 

Free space required 

size Above Below On the sides 

mm in mm in mm in 

R0…R4 75 3 75 3 0 0 

00353783.xls J


Losses, cooling data and noise 

� Losses and cooling data 

Frame size R0 has natural convection cooling. Frame sizes R1…R4 are provided 

with an internal fan. The air flow direction is from bottom to top. 

The table below specifies the heat dissipation in the main circuit at nominal load and 

in the control circuit with minimum load (I/O and panel not in use) and maximum load 

(all digital inputs in the on state and the panel, fieldbus and fan in use). The total heat 

dissipation is the sum of the heat dissipation in the main and control circuits. 

Type Heat dissipation Air flow 

ACS355- Main circuit Control circuit 

x = E/U Rated / 1N and / 2N Min Max 

W W W m 3 /h ft 3 /min 

1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V) 

01x-02A4-2 25 6.1 22.7 - - 

01x-04A7-2 46 9.5 26.4 24 14 

01x-06A7-2 71 9.5 26.4 24 14 

01x-07A5-2 73 10.5 27.5 21 12 

01x-09A8-2 96 10.5 27.5 21 12 

3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V) 

03x-02A4-2 19 6.1 22.7 - - 

03x-03A5-2 31 6.1 22.7 - - 

03x-04A7-2 38 9.5 26.4 24 14 

03x-06A7-2 60 9.5 26.4 24 14 

03x-07A5-2 62 9.5 26.4 21 12 

03x-09A8-2 83 10.5 27.5 21 12 

03x-13A3-2 112 10.5 27.5 52 31 

03x-17A6-2 152 10.5 27.5 52 31 

03x-24A4- 2 250 16.6 35.4 71 42 

03x-31A0-2 270 33.4 57.8 96 57 

03x-46A2-2 430 33.4 57.8 96 57

� Noise 


Type Heat dissipation Air flow 

ACS355- Main circuit Control circuit 

x = E/U Rated / 1N and / 2N Min Max 

W W W m3 /h ft3 /min 

3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V) 

03x-01A2-4 11 6.6 24.4 - - 

03x-01A9-4 16 6.6 24.4 - - 

03x-02A4-4 21 9.8 28.7 13 8 

03x-03A3-4 31 9.8 28.7 13 8 

03x-04A1-4 40 9.8 28.7 13 8 

03x-05A6-4 61 9.8 28.7 19 11 

03x-07A3-4 74 14.1 32.7 24 14 

03x-08A8-4 94 14.1 32.7 24 14 

03x-12A5-4 130 12.0 31.2 52 31 

03x-15A6-4 173 12.0 31.2 52 31 

03x-23A1-4 266 16.6 35.4 71 42 

03x-31A0-4 350 33.4 57.8 96 57 

03x-38A0-4 440 33.4 57.8 96 57 

03x-44A0-4 530 33.4 57.8 96 57 

00353783.xls J 

Frame Noise level 

size dBA 

R0


Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables 

Frame 

size 

Max. cable 

diameter for NEMA 1 

U1, V1, W1, 

U2, V2, W2 

BRK+ and 

BRK- 

U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, 

BRK+ and BRK- 

Terminal size Tightening 

torque 

Terminal and lead-through data for the control cables 

PE 

Clamp size Tightening 

torque 

mm in mm in mm2 AWG N·m lbf·in mm2 AWG N·m lbf·in 

R0 16 0.63 16 0.63 4.0/6.0 10 0.8 7 25 3 1.2 11 

R1 16 0.63 16 0.63 4.0/6.0 10 0.8 7 25 3 1.2 11 

R2 16 0.63 16 0.63 4.0/6.0 10 0.8 7 25 3 1.2 11 

R3 29 1.14 16 0.63 10.0/16.0 6 1.7 15 25 3 1.2 11 

R4 35 1.38 29 1.14 25.0/35.0 2 2.5 22 25 3 1.2 11 

00353783.xls J 

Conductor size Tightening torque 

Min/Max Min/Max 

mm2 AWG N·m lbf·in 

0.25/1.5 24/16 0.5 4.4

Electric power network specification 


Voltage (U1 ) 200/208/220/230/240 V AC 1-phase for 200 V AC drives 

200/208/220/230/240 V AC 3-phase for 200 V AC drives 

380/400/415/440/460/480 V AC 3-phase for 400 V AC drives 

±10% variation from converter nominal voltage is allowed as default. 

Short-circuit capacity Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current at the input power 

connection as defined in IEC 60439-1 and UL 508C is 100 kA. The 

drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more 

than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive maximum rated 

voltage. 

Frequency 50/60 Hz ± 5%, maximum rate of change 17%/s 

Imbalance Max. ±3% of nominal phase to phase input voltage 

Motor connection data 

Motor type Asynchronous induction motor or synchronous permanent 

magnet motor 

Voltage (U2) 0 to U1, 3-phase symmetrical, Umax at the field weakening point 

Short-circuit protection 

(IEC 61800-5-1, 

UL 508C) 

The motor output is short-circuit proof by IEC 61800-5-1 and 

UL 508C. 

Frequency 0…600 Hz 

Frequency resolution 0.01 Hz 

Current See section Ratings on page 358. 

Power limit 1.5 · PN Field weakening point 10…600 Hz 

Switching frequency 4, 8, 12 or 16 kHz (in scalar control) 

Speed control See section Speed control performance figures on page 143. 

Torque control See section Torque control performance figures on page 143. 

Maximum 

Operational functionality and motor cable length 

recommended 

motor cable length 

The drive is designed to operate with optimum performance with the 

following maximum motor cable lengths. The motor cable lengths may 

be extended with output chokes as shown in the table. 

Frame 

Maximum motor cable length 

size 

m ft 

Standard drive, without external options 

R0 30 100 

R1…R4 

With external output chokes 

50 165 

R0 60 195 

R1…R4 100 330 

Note: In multimotor systems, the calculated sum of all motor cable 

lengths must not exceed the maximum motor cable length given in 

the table.


EMC compatibility and motor cable length 

To comply with the European EMC Directive (standard 

IEC/EN 61800-3), use the following maximum motor cable lengths 

for 4 kHz switching frequency. 

All frame 

sizes 

With internal EMC filter 

Second environment 

(category C3 1) ) 

Maximum motor cable length, 4 kHz 

m ft 

30 100 

With optional external EMC filter 

Second environment 

(category C3 1) 30 (at least) 

) 

2) 

100 (at least) 2) 

First environment 


) 

2) 

100 (at least) 2) 

First environment 


) 

2) 

30 (at least) 2) 

1) 

See the terms in section Definitions on page 373. 

2) 

Maximum motor cable length is determined by the drive’s 

operational factors. Contact your local ABB representative for the 

exact maximum lengths when using external EMC filters. 

Note 1: The internal EMC filter must be disconnected by removing 

the EMC screw (see the figure on page 48) while using the low 

leakage current EMC filter (LRFI-XX). 

Note 2: Radiated emissions are according to C2 with and without an 

external EMC filter. 

Note 3: Category C1 with conducted emissions only. Radiated 

emissions are not compatible when measured with standard 

emission measurement setup and should be checked or measured 

on cabinet and machine installations case by case.

Control connection data 

Analog inputs 

X1A: 2 and 5 

(AI1 and AI2) 

Analog output 

X1A: 7 

(AO) 

Auxiliary voltage 

X1A: 9 

Digital inputs 

X1A: 12…16 

(DI1…DI5) 


X1A: 16 

(DI5) 

Relay output 

X1B: 17…19 

(RO 1) 

Digital output 

X1B: 20…21 

(DO) 

Frequency output 

X1B: 20…21 

(FO) 

STO interface 

X1C: 23…26 


Voltage signal, unipolar 0 (2)…10 V, R in = 675 kohm 

bipolar -10…10 V, R in = 675 kohm 

Current signal, unipolar 0 (4)…20 mA, R in = 100 ohm 

bipolar -20…20 mA, R in = 100 ohm 

Potentiometer reference 

value (X1A: 4) 10 V ± 1%, max. 10 mA, R


Brake resistor connection 

Short-circuit protection 

(IEC 61800-5-1, 

IEC 60439-1, UL 508C) 

Common DC connection 

Efficiency 

Degrees of protection 

The brake resistor output is conditionally short-circuit proof by 

IEC/EN 61800-5-1 and UL 508C. For correct fuse selection, contact 

your local ABB representative. Rated conditional short-circuit current 

as defined in IEC 60439-1 and the Short-circuit test current by 

UL 508C is 100 kA. 

Maximum power through common DC connection is equal to the 

drive nominal power. See ACS355 Common DC application guide 

(3AUA0000070130 [English]). 

Approximately 95 to 98% at nominal power level, depending on the 

drive size and options 

IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open: Standard enclosure. The drive 

must be installed in a cabinet to fulfil the requirements for shielding 

from contact. 

IP20 / NEMA 1: Achieved with an option kit (MUL1-R1, MUL1-R3 or 

MUL1-R4) including a hood and a connection box.

Ambient conditions 


Environmental limits for the drive are given below. The drive is to be used in a heated indoor 

controlled environment. 

Operation 

installed for 

stationary use 

Installation site altitude 0…2000 m (6600 ft) 

above sea level 

(above 1000 m 

[3300 ft], see section 

Derating on page 

359) 

Air temperature -10 … +50 °C 

(14 … 122 °F). 

No frost allowed. See 

section Derating on 

page 359. 

Storage 

in the protective 

package 

- - 

-40 … +70 °C ±2% 

(-40 … +158 °F ±2%) 

Transportation 

in the protective 

package 

-40 … +70 °C ±2% 

(-40 … +158 °F ±2%) 

Relative humidity 0 … 95% Max. 95% Max. 95% 

No condensation allowed. Maximum allowed relative humidity is 

60% in the presence of corrosive gases. 

Contamination levels 

(IEC 60721-3-3, 

IEC 60721-3-2, 

IEC 60721-3-1) 

Sinusoidal vibration 

(IEC 60721-3-3) 

Shock 

(IEC 60068-2-27, 

ISTA 1A) 

No conductive dust allowed. 

According to 

IEC 60721-3-3, 

chemical gases: 

Class 3C2 

solid particles: 

Class 3S2. 

Note: The drive must 

be installed in clean 

air according to 

enclosure 

classification. 

Note: Cooling air 

must be clean, free 

from corrosive 

materials and 

electrically conductive 

dust. 

Tested according to 

IEC 60721-3-3, 

mechanical 

conditions: Class 3M4 

2…9Hz, 3.0mm 

(0.12 in) 

9…200 Hz, 10 m/s 2 

(33 ft/s 2 ) 

According to 

IEC 60721-3-1, 


Class 1C2 


Class 1S2 

- - 

Not allowed According to ISTA 1A. 

Max. 100 m/s 2 

(330 ft/s 2 ), 11 ms 

According to 

IEC 60721-3-2, 


Class 2C2 


Class 2S2 

According to ISTA 1A. 

Max. 100 m/s 2 

(330 ft/s 2 ), 11 ms 

Free fall Not allowed 76 cm (30 in) 76 cm (30 in)


Materials 

Drive enclosure • PC/ABS 2 mm, PC+10%GF 2.5…3 mm and PA66+25%GF 

1.5 mm, all in color NCS 1502-Y (RAL 9002 / PMS 420 C) 

• hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet 1.5 mm, thickness of coating 

20 micrometers 

• extruded aluminium AlSi. 

Package Corrugated cardboard. 

Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve 

energy and natural resources. The package materials are 

environmentally compatible and recyclable. All metal parts can be 

recycled. The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under 

controlled circumstances, according to local regulations. Most 

recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks. 

If recycling is not feasible, all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors 

and printed circuit boards can be landfilled. The DC capacitors 

contain electrolyte, which is classified as hazardous waste within the 

EU. They must be removed and handled according to local 

regulations. 

For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed 

recycling instructions, please contact your local ABB distributor. 

Applicable standards 

• EN ISO 13849-1: 

2008 

• IEC/EN 60204-1: 

2006 

• IEC/EN 62061: 

2005 

• IEC/EN 61800-3: 

2004 

• IEC/EN 61800-5-1: 

2007 

• IEC/EN 61800-5-2: 

2007 

The drive complies with the following standards: 

Safety of machinery - Safety related parts of control systems - Part 1: 

general principles for design 

Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines. Part 1: 

General requirements. Provisions for compliance: The final 

assembler of the machine is responsible for installing 

- an emergency-stop device 

- a supply disconnecting device. 

Safety of machinery – Functional safety of safety-related electrical, 

electronic and programmable electronic control systems 

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3: EMC 

requirements and specific test methods 

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 5-1: Safety 

requirements – Electrical, thermal and energy 

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 5-2: Safety 

requirements. Functional. 

• UL 508C UL Standard for Safety, Power Conversion Equipment, third edition

CE marking 


The CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of 

the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives. 

� Compliance with the European EMC Directive 

The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical 

equipment used within the European Union. The EMC product standard 

(EN 61800-3:2004) covers requirements stated for drives. See section Compliance 

with EN 61800-3:2004 on page 373. 

Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004 

� Definitions 

EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility. It is the ability of electrical/electronic 

equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment. 

Likewise, the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or 

system within its locality. 

First environment includes establishments connected to a low-voltage network which 

supplies buildings used for domestic purposes. 

Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly 

supplying domestic premises. 

Drive of category C1: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V, intended for use in the 

first environment. 

Drive of category C2: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be 

installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first 

environment. 

Note: A professional is a person or organization having necessary skills in installing 

and/or commissioning power drive systems, including their EMC aspects. 

Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment 

restricted distribution. EMC standard IEC/EN 61800-3 does not any more restrict the 

distribution of the drive, but the using, installation and commissioning are defined. 

Drive of category C3: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V, intended for use in the 

second environment and not intended for use in the first environment. 

Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second 

environment unrestricted distribution. 

� Category C1 

The emission limits are complied with the following provisions:


1. The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentation and 

installed as specified in the EMC filter manual. 

2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual. 

3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual. 

4. For the maximum motor cable length with 4 kHz switching frequency, see page 

368. 

WARNING! In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio inference, in 

which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required. 


The emission limits are complied with the following provisions: 

1. The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentation and 

installed as specified in the EMC filter manual. 



4. For the maximum motor cable length with 4 kHz switching frequency, see page 

368. 

WARNING! In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio inference, in 

which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required. 


The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of 

IEC/EN 61800-3, second environment (see page 373 for IEC/EN 61800-3 

definitions). 

The emission limits are complied with the following provisions: 

1. The internal EMC filter is connected (the metal screw at EMC is in place) or the 

optional EMC filter is installed. 



4. With the internal EMC filter: motor cable length 30 m (100 ft) with 4 kHz switching 

frequency. For the maximum motor cable length with an optional external EMC 

filter, see page 368. 

WARNING! A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public 

network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is expected 

if the drive is used on such a network.


Note: It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT 

(ungrounded) systems. The supply network becomes connected to ground potential 

through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive. 

Note: It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on a 

corner-grounded TN system as this would damage the drive. 

UL marking 

See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive. 

The UL mark is attached to the drive to verify that it meets UL requirements. 

� UL checklist 

Input power connection – See section Electric power network specification on page 

367. 

Disconnecting device (disconnecting means) – See Selecting the supply 

disconnecting device (disconnecting means) on page 37. 

Ambient conditions – The drives are to be used in a heated indoor controlled 

environment. See section Ambient conditions on page 371 for specific limits. 

Input cable fuses – For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection 

must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and any 

applicable local codes. To fulfil this requirement, use the UL classified fuses given in 

section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 361. 

For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance 

with Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes. To fulfil this 

requirement, use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable sizes and 

fuses on page 361. 

Power cable selection – See section Selecting the power cables on page 38. 

Power cable connections – For the connection diagram and tightening torques, see 

section Connecting the power cables on page 49. 

Overload protection – The drive provides overload protection in accordance with 

the National Electrical Code (US). 

Braking – The drive has an internal brake chopper. When applied with appropriately 

sized brake resistors, the brake chopper will allow the drive to dissipate regenerative 

energy (normally associated with quickly decelerating a motor). Brake resistor 

selection is discussed in Appendix: Resistor braking on page 389.


C-Tick marking 

See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive. 

C-Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand. A C-Tick mark is attached 

to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard (IEC 61800-3:2004 – 

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 3: EMC product standard 

including specific test methods), mandated by the Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic 

Compatibility Scheme. 

The Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme (EMCS) was introduced 

by the Australian Communication Authority (ACA) and the Radio Spectrum 

Management Group (RSM) of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development 

(NZMED) in November 2001. The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency 

spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical/electronic 

products. 

For fulfilling the requirements of the standard, see section Compliance with 

EN 61800-3:2004 on page 373. 

TÜV NORD Safety Approved mark 

The presence of the TÜV NORD Safety Approved mark verifies that the drive has 

been evaluated and certified by TÜV NORD according to the following standards for 

the realization of the Safe torque off function (STO): IEC 61508-1:1998, 

IEC 61508-2:2000; SIL3, IEC 62061:2005 and ISO 13849-1:2006. See Appendix: 

Safe torque off (STO). 

RoHS marking 

The RoHS mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions 

of the European RoHS Directive. RoHS = the restriction of the use of certain 

hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. 

Compliance with the Machinery Directive 

The drive is intended to be incorporated into machinery to constitute machinery 

covered by Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC) and does therefore not in every 

respect comply with the provisions of the directive. For more information, see the 

Declaration of Incorporation by ABB Drives.

Patent protection in the USA 

This product is protected by one or more of the following US patents: 


4,920,306 5,301,085 5,463,302 5,521,483 5,532,568 5,589,754 5,612,604 

5,654,624 5,799,805 5,940,286 5,942,874 5,952,613 6,094,364 6,147,887 

6,175,256 6,184,740 6,195,274 6,229,356 6,252,436 6,265,724 6,305,464 

6,313,599 6,316,896 6,335,607 6,370,049 6,396,236 6,448,735 6,498,452 

6,552,510 6,597,148 6,600,290 6,741,059 6,774,758 6,844,794 6,856,502 

6,859,374 6,922,883 6,940,253 6,934,169 6,956,352 6,958,923 6,967,453 

6,972,976 6,977,449 6,984,958 6,985,371 6,992,908 6,999,329 7,023,160 

7,034,510 7,036,223 7,045,987 7,057,908 7,059,390 7,067,997 7,082,374 

7,084,604 7,098,623 7,102,325 7,109,780 7,164,562 7,176,779 7,190,599 

7,215,099 7,221,152 7,227,325 7,245,197 7,250,739 7,262,577 7,271,505 

7,274,573 7,279,802 7,280,938 7,330,095 7,349,814 7,352,220 7,365,622 

7,372,696 7,388,765 7,408,791 7,417,408 7,446,268 7,456,615 7,508,688 

7,515,447 7,560,894 D503,931 D510,319 D510,320 D511,137 D511,150 

D512,026 D512,696 D521,466 D541,743S D541,744S D541,745S D548,182S 

D548,183S D573,090S 

Other patents pending.

378 Technical data

Dimension drawings 

Dimension drawings 379 

Dimension drawings of the ACS355 are shown below. The dimensions are given in 

millimeters and [inches].

380 Dimension drawings 

Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open 

R1 and R0 are identical except for the fan at the top of R1. 

1) 

1) Extension modules add 26 mm (1.02 in) to the depth measure. 

3AUA0000067784-A Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open

Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 / NEMA 1 

R1 and R0 are identical except for the fan at the top of R1. 

1) 



3AUA0000067785-A 

Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 / NEMA 1


Frame size R2, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open 

1) 


3AUA0000067782-A 

Frame size R2, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open

Frame size R2, IP20 / NEMA 1 

1) 




3AUA0000067783-A



1) 



3AUA0000067786-A


1) 



3AUA0000067787-A 

Frame size R3, IP20 / NEMA 1



1) 


3AUA0000067836-A 

Frame size R4, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open


1) 



3AUA0000067883-A 

Frame size R4, IP20 / NEMA 1

388 Dimension drawings

Appendix: Resistor braking 389 

Appendix: Resistor braking 


The chapter tells how to select the brake resistor and cables, protect the system, 

connect the brake resistor and enable resistor braking. 

Planning the braking system 

� Selecting the brake resistor 

ACS355 drives have an internal brake chopper as standard equipment. The brake 

resistor is selected using the table and equations presented in this section. 

1. Determine the required maximum braking power PRmax for the application. PRmax must be smaller than PBRmax given in the table on page 390 for the used drive 

type. 

2. Calculate resistance R with Equation 1. 

3. Calculate energy ERpulse with Equation 2. 

4. Select the resistor so that the following conditions are met: 

• The rated power of the resistor must be greater than or equal to PRmax . 

• Resistance R must be between Rmin and Rmax given in the table for the used 

drive type. 

• The resistor must be able to dissipate energy ERpulse during the braking 

cycle T.

390 Appendix: Resistor braking 

Equations for selecting the resistor: 

150000 

Eq. 1. UN = 200…240 V: R = 

PRmax ton 450000 

UN = 380…415 V: R = 

PRmax 615000 

UN = 415…480 V: R = 

PRmax Eq. 2. ERpulse = PRmax · ton T 

PRave Eq. 3. PRave ton = PRmax · 

T 

For conversion, use 1 hp = 746 W. 

where 

R = selected brake resistor value (ohm) 

PRmax = maximum power during the braking cycle (W) 

PRave = average power during the braking cycle (W) 

ERpulse = energy conducted into the resistor during a single braking pulse (J) 

ton = length of the braking pulse (s) 

T = length of the braking cycle (s). 

Resistor types shown in the table are pre-dimensioned resistors using the maximum 

braking power with cyclic braking shown in the table. Resistors are available from 

ABB. Information is subject to change without further notice. 

Type R min R max P BRmax Selection table by resistor type 

ACS355- CBR-V / CBT-H Braking time 2) 

x = E/U 1) 

ohm ohm kW hp 160 210 260 460 660 560 s 

1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V) 

01x-02A4-2 70 390 0.37 0.5 90 

01x-04A7-2 40 200 0.75 1 45 

01x-06A7-2 40 130 1.1 1.5 28 

01x-07A5-2 30 100 1.5 2 19 

01x-09A8-2 30 70 2.2 3 14 

3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V) 

03x-02A4-2 70 390 0.37 0.5 90 

03x-03A5-2 70 260 0.55 0.75 60 

03x-04A7-2 40 200 0.75 1 42 

03x-06A7-2 40 130 1.1 1.5 29 

03x-07A5-2 30 100 1.5 2 19 

03x-09A8-2 30 70 2.2 3 14 

03x-13A3-2 30 50 3.0 4 16 

03x-17A6-2 30 40 4.0 5 12 

03x-24A4- 2 18 25 5.5 7.5 45 

03x-31A0-2 7 19 7.5 10 35 

03x-46A2-2 7 13 11.0 15 23 

P Rmax

Appendix: Resistor braking 391 

Type R min R max P BRmax Selection table by resistor type 

ACS355- CBR-V / CBT-H Braking time 2) 

x = E/U 1) ohm ohm kW hp 160 210 260 460 660 560 s 

3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V) 

03x-01A2-4 200 1180 0.37 0.5 90 

03x-01A9-4 175 800 0.55 0.75 90 

03x-02A4-4 165 590 0.75 1 60 

03x-03A3-4 150 400 1.1 1.5 37 

03x-04A1-4 130 300 1.5 2 27 

03x-05A6-4 100 200 2.2 3 17 

03x-07A3-4 70 150 3.0 4 29 

03x-08A8-4 70 110 4.0 5 20 

03x-12A5-4 40 80 5.5 7.5 15 

03x-15A6-4 40 60 7.5 10 10 

03x-23A1-4 30 40 11 15 10 

03x-31A0-4 16 29 15 20 16 

03x-38A0-4 13 23 18.5 25 13 

03x-44A0-4 13 19 22.0 30 10 

1) E = EMC filter connected (metal EMC filter screw installed), 

U = EMC filter disconnected (plastic EMC filter screw installed), US 

parametrization. 

2) Braking time = maximum allowed braking time in seconds at PBRmax every 

120 seconds, at 40 °C ambient temperature. 

WARNING! Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum 

value specified for the particular drive. The drive and the internal chopper are 

not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance. 

� Selecting the brake resistor cables 

00353783.xls J 

Symbols 

Rmin = minimum allowed brake resistor that can be connected to the brake chopper 

Rmax = maximum allowed brake resistor that allows PBRmax PBRmax = maximum braking capacity of the drive, must exceed the desired braking power. 

Ratings by resistor type CBR-V CBR-V CBR-V CBR-V CBR-V CBT-H 

160 210 260 460 660 560 

Nominal power (W) 280 360 450 790 1130 2200 

Resistance (ohm) 70 200 40 80 33 18 

Use a shielded cable with the conductor size specified in section Power cable sizes 

and fuses on page 361. The maximum length of the resistor cable(s) is 5 m (16 ft).

392 Appendix: Resistor braking 

� Placing the brake resistor 

Install all resistors in a place where they will cool. 

WARNING! The materials near the brake resistor must be non-flammable. The 

surface temperature of the resistor is high. Air flowing from the resistor is of 

hundreds of degrees Celsius. Protect the resistor against contact. 

� Protecting the system in brake circuit fault situations 

Protecting the system in cable and brake resistor short-circuit situations 

For short-circuit protection of the brake resistor connection, see Brake resistor 

connection on page 370. Alternatively, a two-conductor shielded cable with the same 

cross-sectional area can be used. 

Protecting the system in brake resistor overheating situations 

The following setup is essential for safety – it interrupts the main supply in fault 

situations involving chopper shorts: 

• Equip the drive with a main contactor. 

• Wire the contactor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens (an 

overheated resistor opens the contactor). 

Below is a simple wiring diagram example. 

Electrical installation 

For the brake resistor connections, see the power connection diagram of the drive on 

page 49. 

Start-up 

Fuses 


1 

2 

L1 L2 L3 

3 

4 

5 

6 

U1 V1 W1 

K1 

Q Thermal switch of the resistor 

To enable resistor braking, switch off the drive’s overvoltage control by setting 

parameter 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL to 0 (DISABLE).

Appendix: Extension 

modules 


Appendix: Extension modules 393 

The appendix describes common features and mechanical installation of the optional 

extension modules for the ACS355: MPOW-01 auxiliary power module, MTAC-01 

pulse encoder interface module and MREL-01 output relay module. 

The appendix also describes specific features and electrical installation for the 

MPOW-01; for information on the MTAC-01 and MREL-01, refer to the corresponding 

user’s manual. 


� Description 

Extension modules have similar enclosures and they are mounted between the 

control panel and the drive. Therefore only one extension module can be used for a 

drive. ACS355 IP66/67 / UL Type 4X drives are not compatible with extension 

modules due to space restrictions. 

The following optional extension modules are available for the ACS355. The drive 

automatically identifies the module, which is ready for use after the installation and 

power-up. 

• MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface module 

• MREL-01 output relay module 

• MPOW-01 auxiliary power module.

394 Appendix: Extension modules 

Generic extension module layout 

� Installation 

Checking the delivery 

Grounding stand-off 

Panel port adapter 

The option package contains: 

• extension module 

• grounding stand-off with an M3 × 12 screw 

• panel port adapter (fixed to the MPOW-01 module at the factory). 

Installing the extension module 

WARNING! Follow the safety instructions given in chapter Safety on page 17. 

To install the extension module: 

1. If not already off, remove input power from the drive. 

2. Remove the control panel or panel cover. See how to remove the panel cover in 

step 1. on page 56. 

3. Remove the grounding screw in the top left corner of the drive’s control panel slot 

and install the grounding stand-off in its place. 

4. For the MREL-01 and MTAC-01, ensure that the panel port adapter is attached to 

either the panel port of the drive or the mate part of the extension module. The 

adapter of the MPOW-01 is already fixed to the extension module at the factory. 

5. Gently and firmly install the extension module to the drive’s panel slot directly from 

the front. 

Note: Signal and power connections to the drive are automatically made through a 

6-pin connector.


6. Ground the extension module by inserting the screw removed from the drive in 

the top left corner of the extension module. Tighten the screw using a torque of 

0.8 N·m (7 lbf·in). 

Note: Correct insertion and tightening of the screw is essential for fulfilling the EMC 

requirements and proper operation of the extension module. 

7. Install the control panel or panel cover on the extension module. 

8. Electrical installation is module-specific. For MPOW-01, see section Electrical 

installation on page 397. For MTAC-01, see MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface 

module user’s manual (3AFE68591091 [English]), and for MREL-01, see 

MREL-01 relay output extension module user’s manual (3AUA0000035957 

[English]). 

5 

6 

3 

4


� Technical data 

Dimensions 

Extension module dimensions are shown in the figure below. 

118 [4.63] 

70 [2.77] 

64 [2.52] 

45 [1.79] 

Generic extension module specifications 

• Enclosure degree of protection: IP20 

• All materials are UL/CSA-approved. 

• When used with ACS355 drives, the extension modules comply with EMC 

standard EN/IEC 61800-3:2004 for electromagnetic compatibility and 

EN/IEC 61800-5-1:2005 for electrical safety requirements. 

MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface module 

See MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface module user’s manual (3AFE68591091 

[English]) delivered with this option. 

MREL-01 output relay module 

See MREL-01 relay output extension module user’s manual (3AUA0000035957 

[English]) delivered with this option.

MPOW-01 auxiliary power module 

� Description 


The MPOW-01 auxiliary power module is used in installations where the drive's 

control part is required to be powered during network failures and maintenance 

interruptions. The MPOW-01 provides auxiliary voltages to the control panel, fieldbus 

and I/O. 

Note: If you change any of the drive parameters when the drive is powered 

through the MPOW-01, you have to force parameter saving with parameter 1607 

PARAM SAVE by setting the value to (1) SAVE…; otherwise all changed data 

will be lost. 

� Electrical installation 

Wiring 

• Use 0.5…1.5 mm 2 (20…16 AWG) shielded cable. 

• Connect the control wires according to the diagram in section Terminal 

designations below. Use a tightening torque of 0.8 N·m (7 lbf·in). 

Terminal designations 

The diagram below shows the MPOW-01 terminals and how the MPOW-01 module is 

connected to the external power supply and how the modules are daisy chained. 

External 

power supply 

+ 

GND 

SCR 

Next 

MPOW-01 

SCR MPOW-01 

SCR 

+ +24 V DC or 24 V AC ± 10% 

- Terminal SCR is internally connected 

to the analog ground (AGND) of the 

drive. 

+ 

- 

SCR 

SCR 

All terminals are connected together 

inside the module allowing daisy 

chaining of the signals.


� Technical data 

Specifications 

• Input voltage: +24 V DC or 24 V AC ± 10% 

• Maximum load 1200 mA rms 

• Power losses with maximum load 6 W 

• Designed lifetime of the MPOW-01 module is 50 000 hours in the specified 

ambient conditions of the drive (see section Ambient conditions on page 371).

Appendix: Safe torque off (STO) 399 

Appendix: Safe torque off 

(STO) 

What this appendix contains 

The appendix describes the basics of the Safe torque off function (STO) for the 

ACS355. In addition, application features and technical data for the safety system 

calculation are presented. 

Basics 

The drive supports the Safe torque off (STO) function according to standards 

EN 61800-5-2; EN/ISO 13849-1:2006, IEC/EN 60204-1:1997; EN 61508:2002, 

EN 1037:1996, and IEC 62061:2005 (SILCL 3). The function also corresponds to an 

uncontrolled stop in accordance with category 0 of IEC 60204-1. 

The STO may be used where power removal is required to prevent an unexpected 

start. The function disables the control voltage of the power semiconductors of the 

drive output stage, thus preventing the inverter from generating the voltage required 

to rotate the motor (see the diagram below). With this function, short-time operations 

(like cleaning) and/or maintenance work on non-electrical parts of the machinery can 

be performed without switching off the power supply to the drive.

400 Appendix: Safe torque off (STO) 

Control 

circuit 

+24 V 

Output stage 

(1 phase 

shown) 


X1C:1 OUT1 

X1C:2 OUT2 

X1C:3 IN1 

X1C:4 IN2 

UDC+ 

UDC- 

U2/V2/W2 

WARNING! The STO function does not disconnect the voltage of the main and 

auxiliary circuits from the drive. Therefore maintenance work on electrical parts 

of the drive or the motor can only be carried out after isolating the drive system from 

the main supply. 

Note: It is not recommended to stop the drive using the STO. If a running drive is 

stopped with this function, the drive will trip and stop by coasting. If this is not 

acceptable eg, it causes danger, the drive and machinery must be stopped using the 

appropriate stopping mode before using this function. 

Note: Permanent magnet motor drives in case of a multiple IGBT power 

semiconductor failure: In spite of the activation of the STO function, the drive system 

can produce an alignment torque which maximally rotates the motor shaft by 180/p 

degrees, where p denotes the pole pair number. 

Program features, settings and diagnostics 

� Operation of the STO function and its diagnostics function 

Safety circuit 

(switch, 

relays, etc.) 

Notes: 

• The contacts of the safety circuit 

must open/close within 200 ms of 

each other. 

• The maximum cable length 

between the drive and the safety 

switch is 25 m (82 ft). 

When both STO inputs are energized, the STO function is in the standby state and 

the drive operates normally. If either of the STO inputs is de-energized, the STO 

function awakes, stops the drive and disables start. Start is possible only after the


STO inputs have been energized, and any of the drive reactions have been reset. 

Drive event can be parametrized according to the table below. 

Parameter Selection values Explanation 

3025 STO 

OPERATION 

If the operation delay between the inputs is excessive or only one STO input is deenergized, 

an event is always considered a fault (STO1 LOST or STO2 LOST). This 

event cannot be changed. De-energizing of only one STO input is not considered 

normal operation since the safety integrity level would decrease if only one channel is 

used. 

STO status indications 

(1) ONLY FAULT Drive event on successful STO operation is fault 

SAFE TORQUE OFF. The fault bit is updated. 

(2) ALARM&FAULT Drive event on successful STO operation is alarm 

SAFE TORQUE OFF when stopped and fault SAFE 

TORQUE OFF when running. Fault and alarm bits 

are updated. 

(3) NO & FAULT Drive event on successful STO operation is no alarm 

when stopped and fault SAFE TORQUE OFF when 

running. The fault bit is updated. 

Default: 

(4) ONLY ALARM 

Drive event on successful STO operation is alarm 

SAFE TORQUE OFF. The alarm bit is updated. Start 

command must be toggled to continue running the 

drive. 

When both STO inputs are energized, the STO function is in the standby state and 

the drive operates normally. If either of the STO inputs or both are de-energized, the 

STO function is executed in a safe manner and corresponding reaction is updated 

according to the table below. 

STO event Fault name Description Status 

Fault 0044 SAFE TORQUE 

OFF 

STO functions correctly and the 

fault must be reset before starting. 

Fault 0045 STO1 LOST STO input channel 1 has not deenergized, 

but channel 2 has. 

Opening contacts on channel 1 

might have been damaged or there 

is a short circuit. 

Fault 0046 STO2 LOST STO input channel 2 has not deenergized, 

but channel 1 has. 

Opening contacts on channel 2 

might have been damaged or there 

is a short circuit. 

Alarm 2035 SAFE TORQUE 

OFF 

0307 FAULT WORD 3 

bit 4 


bit 5 


bit 6 

STO functions correctly. 0309 ALARM WORD 2 

bit 13


� STO function activation and indication delays 

STO activation delay is below 1 ms. STO indication delay (time from the deenergization 

of any STO input to the updating of the status bit) is 200 ms. 

Note: If any STO channel is toggled very fast, it is possible that the drive trips to 

overcurrent or short circuit. 

Installation 

Connect the cables as shown in the diagram below. 


X1C: OUT1 

X1C: OUT2 

X1C:3 IN1 

X1C:4 IN2 

13 23 31 

Y1 Y2 

14 

24 

32 

Safety relay 

STO input channels can be also supplied with an external power supply. The required 

supply current is maximum 15 mA for each STO channel, and the voltage 

requirement is 24 V DC +/-10%. The negative terminal of the power supply must be 

connected to the analog ground (AGND) of the drive. 


AGND 

X1C:1 OUT1 

X1C:2 OUT2 

X1C:3 IN1 

X1C:4 IN2 

+24 V DC external 

power supply 

- + 

14 

24 

STO can also be daisy-chained from drive to drive, so that several drives are behind 

one safety switch. If STO outputs (OUT1 and OUT2) are used to supply the STO 

circuit, maximum five drives can be supplied. The number of drives depends on the 

A1 

A2 

13 23 31 

Y1 Y2 

32 

Safety relay 

A1 

A2 

Safe PLC 

OUT 

GND 

Safe PLC 

OUT 

GND


24 V auxiliary voltage load (I/O, panel load, used fieldbus or STO circuits; max. 

200 mA) of the drive supplying the STO circuit (see section Control connection data 

on page 369). When using external supply, all analog grounds (AGND) of the drives 

must be chained together. 

Note: Daisy chaining lowers the total system safety integrity level, which needs to be 

calculated case by case for each system. 

Start-up and commissioning 

Always test the operation and reaction of the STO function before commissioning. 

Technical data 

� STO components 

STO safety relay type 

General requirements 

Output requirements 

IEC 61508 and/or EN/ISO 13849-1 

No. of current paths 2 independent paths (one for each STO path) 

Switching voltage capability 30 V DC per contact 

Switching current capability 100 mA per contact 

Maximum switching delay 

between contacts 

200 ms 

Example 1 Simple SIL3 approved safety relay 

Type and manufacturer PSR-SCP- 24UC/ESP4/2X1/1X2 by Phoenix Contacts 

Approvals EN 954-1, cat 4; IEC 61508, SIL3 

Example 2 Programmable safety logic 

Type and manufacturer PNOZ Multi M1p by Pilz 

Approvals EN 954-1, cat 4; IEC 61508, SIL3; and ISO 13849-1, PL e 

STO connection 

Input for external STO 

supply 

24 V DC ± 10%, load 25 mA 

Input impedance Rin = 2 kohm 

Load 12 mA / channel 

Output Maximum load 200 mA depending on I/O load 

STO cable 

Type 2×2 cables, low voltage, single shielded, twisted pair cable 

Conductor size 1.5…0.25 mm 2 (16…24 AWG) 

Maximum length Max. 25 m between STO inputs and the operating contact 

Tightening torque 0.5 N·m (4.4 lbf·in)


� Data related to safety standards 

IEC 61508 EN/ISO 13849-1 IEC 62061 

SIL 3 PL e SILCL 3 

PFH 6.48E-09 

(6.48 FIT) 

Category 3 

HFT 1 MTTFd 470 years 

SFF 91% DCavg 18% 

� Abbreviations 

Abbreviation Reference Description 

CCF EN/ISO 13849-1 Common Cause Failure (%) 

DCavg EN/ISO 13849-1 Diagnostic Coverage Average 

FIT Failure In Time: 1E-9 hours 

HFT IEC 61508 Hardware Fault Tolerance 

MTTFd EN/ISO 13849-1 Mean Time To dangerous Failure: (The total number of 

life units) / (the number of dangerous, undetected 

failures) during a particular measurement interval under 

stated conditions 

PFHd IEC 61508 Probability of Dangerous Failures per Hour 

PL EN/ISO 13849-1 Performance Level: Corresponds SIL, Levels a-e 

SFF IEC 61508 Safe Failure Fraction (%) 

SIL IEC 61508 Safety Integrity Level 

STO EN 61800-5-2 Safe Torque Off 

Maintenance 

Test the operation and reaction of the STO function every year.

Further information 

Product and service inquiries 

Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting 

the type designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales, 

support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www.abb.com/drives and 

selecting Sales, Support and Service network. 

Product training 

For information on ABB product training, navigate to www.abb.com/drives and select 

Training courses. 

Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals 

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Go to www.abb.com/drives and select 

Document Library – Manuals feedback form (LV AC drives). 

Document library on the Internet 

You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. 

Go to www.abb.com/drives and select Document Library. You can browse the library 

or enter selection criteria, for example a document code, in the search field.

Contact us 

ABB Oy 

Drives 

P.O. Box 184 

FI-00381 HELSINKI 

FINLAND 

Telephone +358 10 22 11 

Fax +358 10 22 22681 

www.abb.com/drives 

ABB Inc. 

Automation Technologies 

Drives & Motors 

16250 West Glendale Drive 

New Berlin, WI 53151 

USA 

Telephone 262 785-3200 

800-HELP-365 

Fax 262 780-5135 


ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co. Ltd. 

No. 1, Block D, A-10 Jiuxianqiao Beilu 

Chaoyang District 

Beijing, P.R. China, 100015 

Telephone +86 10 5821 7788 

Fax +86 10 5821 7618 


3AUA0000066143 Rev A (EN) EFFECTIVE: 2010-01-01

ACS355 user's manual Rev A

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?